X # to! 
 
 y .> 
 
 . 
 
 s , 
 
 • \ i \ 
 
 3 frAA. V- 
 

 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2015 
 
 ■ , . $ ’ 
 
 https://archive.org/details/perspectivepractOOdubr 
 
Printed for Ttabe rt ^Erickc ag a,i nft Aid e r* inary CliurcK in Bow lane C6y & , 
 
Perfpedive Practical. 
 
 O R, A Plain and Eafie 
 
 METHOD 
 
 Of True and Lively Reprefenting all Things to 
 
 the Eye at a Distance, by the Exad: 
 
 RULES of ART; 
 
 A S, 
 
 , Landskips, Towns, Streets, Palaces, Churches, Caftles, 
 Fortifications, Houles, Gardens and Walks, with their Parts, as 
 Walls, Doors, Windows, Stairs, Chimneys, Chambers, and Shbps, 
 with their Ornaments and Furniture, as Beds, Tables, Ghefts, 
 Cupboards, Couches, Chairs, Stools, and otheftMoveables, Regu- 
 lar or Irregular, in feveral Poftures. 
 
 LIKEWISE 
 
 RULES for Placing all forts of Figures, with their feveral 
 Poftures, Situation, and Horizon $ 
 
 Alfb, A TREATISE of Shadows Natural by the Sun, 
 Torch, Candle, and Lamp. 
 
 Very Ufeful and Neceflary for all 
 
 PAINTER S, 
 
 Engravers, 1 C Carvers, 
 
 X_Archite£is, > <Goldfmith$, 
 
 Embroiderers ,) £ Tapefrry- workers. 
 
 And all Others that work by Defign- 
 
 By a Religious Perfon of the Society of JESUS, a Pariftan. 
 
 
 Faithfully Tranflated out of French, and Illuftrated with i yo Copper Cuts. 
 
 
 Set forth in Englijh by Robert Pricke for the Lovers of Art. 
 
 
 [ Printed 1 
 
 i a 
 
 LONDON ; 
 
 for Robert Pricke , over-againft Alderman Church, in Bow-Lane j and 
 re to be Sold by 5 . Sprint, at the Bell, in Little- Britain. 1698. 
 
 
E 
 
 HE Art of Perfpe&ive, which hath the eye for its 
 Principle 3 to whom Nature hath given more vivacity 
 and more Perfections then to the other fenfes,and which 
 holdeth amongft them the Rank, and 'the Advantages 
 that the Soul hath above the Body, is likewifethe faireft and in oft 
 -^delightful of all the Parts, that the Science of the Mathematicks 
 hath putforth into light. This Science may well boaft it felf to 
 be the foul and the life of Painting, feeing thatit is it which gi- 
 veth unto Painters the Perfection of their Art, which in its or- 
 dering the heights and the meafures of the Figures, the Move- 
 ables, the Architectures, and other Ornaments of a Picture: It 
 
 inftru&eth what colours hefhould ufe, lively or fad, in what place 
 he ought to apply the one and the other, what he ought to finifli, 
 and what ought not fo to be .• where one is to give a light, and 
 where there is no need of it : in a word, it is this that ought to 
 begin and finifh, feeing that it ought to go throughout all. With- 
 out help, the beft Mafter will make as many faults as draughts, 
 principally. in Architectures, wherewith they would enrich their 
 Works, as I have feen in Pieces well efteemed, where they have 
 failed fo foully, that this in part hath been the motive of myde- 
 fign, for to caufe them to know their errours without naming 
 them, and to teach the young ones to avoid them. How excel- 
 lent a Painter foeverpne is, he m ift obferve all thefe Rules, or he 
 (hall content none but gnorants, and aReafonablc Painter that 
 ' (hall know and ufe thefe well, 'fhall do wondors-to every ones- con- r 
 tent. 
 
 : " [ : - a . The 
 
TliE PREFACE. 
 
 The Engrav.cr.Jn Copper ought not to.be more ignorant of it 
 then the Painter, feeing that he doth that with his Graver, which 
 the (th er doth with his Pencil : It will make him to know that 
 which he ought to touch roughly, and that which he ought to 
 make faint. The need that he hath of this Science is fo much the 
 more neceflary, as his Pieces arefar more in number, then thofe 
 of the Painter ; the which if they be skilfully made, his pr .life 
 is encreafed ; if on the contrary, his defeats are thereby the more 
 known, and every Piece is a Mouth which decrieth its Work- 
 man* 
 
 The Carver in Bofs {hall learn the height which he mufi give 
 W his Statues, as well for below as for the midft, and in proporti- 
 on to chat which is higher, what Projedior he mull give to Build- 
 ings, and toother Bodies that have Mouldings or demi-Bofs, the 
 Angle for the point of the fight, for to take the heights and a- 
 bridgemcPits of all the Objects near and farotf 
 
 The Architect by this Science, may be able to give the unde r- 
 ftandingof hisdefignes in a f. mall 1 pace , he may alfo elevate one 
 part, and leave the other in Plane, for to make his whole work ap- 
 pear 5 and feeing that we are upon Architecture, there needeth that 
 the Perfpective, (or he that profelfeth this,) be learned therein, at 
 leafi in the Practice of the Hand, byreafonthat the faireft Pieces 
 of Perfpective are made in rich and fumptuous Buildings, framed 
 according to the Orders of Columns, the Beauty of which de- 
 'pendeth on Proportions and Meafures, which ought to be obier- 
 ved therein, otherwife they will offend the eye ^ wherefore they 
 ought to be well ftudied, and whofoever knoweth them not when 
 he ought to know them, is worthy of blame, feeing the eafinefs 
 that he hath to learn them, having Vitruvius^ Vtgnoh , Scamozzii , 
 and many other which" have written thereof fo pertinently. 
 
 It is not enough that be knows the Orders of Columns, he mull 
 underfland all the Meafures which are ordinarily given to Build- 
 ings, and co each particular thing, Gates, Windows, Chimneys, 
 &c. and to place them wdl, and to take days fit for the purpofe, 
 th at he make not any thing like one eye or maimed, to take great 
 care that every thing be right, nothing faulty, and that the iyrti- 
 rnetry and proportion be kept, as much as one is able, otherwife 
 
 the 
 
THE PREFACE. 
 
 the Perfpediive, which is made for to content the fight, would 
 offend it by its defe&s. 
 
 Goldfmiths, Embroiderers, Makers of Tapiftry, Painters; 
 workers in Silver, in Silk, and in Wool 5 Joyners, and all 
 others that bulie rhemfelves in making defignes , and 
 with Painting, cannot let pafs this Science, of Per- 
 fpediive, if they would do any thing that may he commend- 
 able. 
 
 Themoft part of thofe I have known to affedi this Sci- 
 ence, have affured me, that they have been beaten off by 
 the great number of lines, that feme Authors have fee for 
 to frame and findethe place of their Objects, Bodies, or Fi- 
 gures •, others, by having met with too much obfeurity in 
 their Orders and Explications, and particularly, for that they 
 have not fet the Inftrudtions over againft the Figures, and 
 that whilft that they turn over leaves to finde them, they for- 
 gat that which they defired to know. Allthefe Complaints 
 oblige me to be more clear, and more Methodical in the 
 Inftrudtions which 1 have fet before every figure, that they 
 might have before them the Manner to fet into Pradtice that 
 which they defire, applying my Elf to their capacity, with- 
 out giving fuch Demonftrations as would obftruct or hinder 
 them r ther then clear them, -ufi'ng words which all may be 
 able to underftand, even in the?] Definitions, as one may fee 
 at the feventhfol. Having alfo given to certain things quali- 
 ties which the common fort give to them, though that in ef- 
 fi dt they have them not. As for example, at the 15th. foL 
 where I difeourfe of the diftance or removal far off, I have 
 been conftrained to fay, againft mv thought^ that it is the 
 Appleof the eye which receiver;- the Rays of the Objedis, 
 as if they were bounded there, by reafon that 1 have expe- 
 rimented that when I fay that the Vifi ' is made upon the 
 Retine, or fi r th thin Membrane, at the bo: r am of the eye, that 
 the Rays do but pafs by the Apple, and that the rcpref.n- 
 
 a 2 ration. 
 
THE PREFACE,' 
 
 ration, or fpedes of that which we bchoM are turaed back $ it 
 feemeth tome that Zfpeak anew language, and that they can- 
 not conceive that. Wherefore having confidered that this 
 knowledge did little import for the Pra&ice of this Art: 1 
 
 oave to the Apple that which appertained to the bottom of 
 the eye, which is the true place of the vifion or fight, where 
 the fpecies of the Objects are framed although others fay that 
 it is in the Criftaliine : Thpfe which would be refolved is this, 
 may look into Aquiltm Scheiner and des Cartes, which have ve- 
 ry well difcourfed thereof.* 
 
 Although /have ufed all diligence poffible, for to render 
 this Science very eafie, yet / doubt rtot but many may 
 finde. trouble therein at the beginning ; but he which fhall 
 be able to furmount the difficulties, which he fhall finde at 
 the firft 5 there is nothing which he may not underftand and 
 pradice, fo that he be careful to underftand well, and retain 
 one Order, before that he turn Over the leaf : becaufe that 
 they are, as it were linked together, and dependent the one 
 of the other : this little pains will give the fatisfa&ion, by 
 the eafinefs which one fhall have afterwards, in making all 
 whatfoever he would. 
 
 7t fhall be known by the Table following , that this Book 
 fufficeth for to make all forts of Perfpe&ives, by ufing the or- 
 ders, which the Figures and Letters fhall fhew, the which one 
 may bring together to have that which one defireth, in which 
 he that would make fome fair Perfpe&ive, fhall be delighted to 
 find prefently that which he fhall conceive will content his 
 minde : and then he fhall have far more delight then if he 
 
 copied a Piece wholly made by another -, and if one be 
 conftrained to imitate any one, this fhall be done with fa- 
 cility, feeing that there are here orders, of all that poffibly 
 he can meet with. I cohfefs freely that I have an incredible de- 
 light in making of new defigns, and in inventing of new pieces 
 
 which 
 
. THE PREFACE, 
 
 which I would !we pubiijflic^ , as others have done * had 
 it not been that my defire is that every one ffaottld be par- 
 taker of this Recreation which he may take, in competing 
 them 3 &making them himfelf, having given him all the means, 
 and the orders for to bring the fame to pafs. But if any 
 one will not take this as pains, he fliall find many of them 
 all made already in Marolois^Uredeman , Unefje , and others, 
 which have taken delight to make their ingenuity appear 
 therein. 
 
 So many , fo fair , and excellent works have feryed to 
 make i ©me Painters lazy , that they will not learn to make 
 that which they found already made $ they are eoivent 
 only to defign thofe the beft that they are able , and as 
 far as they underfland them, the which would be tolerable, 
 if they did imitate them well, but counterfeiting them with- 
 out underftanding, they make nothing that is good , giving 
 ordinarily fo many points in a Pi&ure, as they fliall meet with 
 objects therein , lines and returns , they will * make you 
 fee the under part of a thing , which as a certain one hath 
 very well faid , Ideal from particulars that which they give 
 to the pubiick, to draw glory to themfelves from the labour 
 of others. 
 
 1 had rather fay freely, that I intending to make this 
 little Treatife of Perfpe&ive^ I would fee, as far as 
 I could, thofe which had written thereof, and take 
 from one and others, that which might ferve for my 
 fubject , afterwards to make a General RePdtution , 
 with which / have mingled a little of mine own , for 
 to bind them together, and to follow an Order, which they 
 had forgot to keep. The firft that / found to have 
 given feme light to this Science , is George Reich , an 
 High- Germane , in the tenth Book of his Works: 
 After him Viator , a Cannon of Toul 5 which hath 
 
 given 
 
THE PREFACE . 
 
 -given (lore of gooJ Figures, but t^o little /nftructions. 
 /ifcer him came Albert Barer •> an excellent man, which hath 
 left fomeRules and Principles among ft his Works in the fourth 
 Book of his Geometry: zfohn Ccufin alfo hath made a Book 
 
 thereof, wherein- there are many good things. After thofe 
 came Bant el Earbaro , Vignola , Serho 3 du Cereati^ Sirigary , .SW 0 * 
 77Z0/Z dfe CVw, Maroleis , Ur e dement Uriejje , Guidus Ubaldas^ Pi- 
 etro., Acolti 5 .Sim* Vault zaj le Sieur Befargues, and lately 
 
 the Reverned P,Nicercn aMinme y whom / have feen all, the one 
 after the other, admiring their ftudyand pains, for to ferve 
 the Publick, eftecming my felf much honoured to imitate 
 that which they done, and to be the unknown Copier of 
 their Works, befides thofe which I have named’ 5 there are 
 many other brave fpirits , which have written thereon, 
 which I have not had the happinefs to fee, becaufe I could not 
 attain to it This Multitude of Authors caufeth fufficiently 
 to underhand, that this Science hath been in all times cherifh- 
 ed and efteemed by the moft curious fpirits, and more in that 
 age that we are in, then in any other pafs’d, the which 
 maketh me to hope, that this little work will not dif- 
 pleafe many, feeing that it bringeth Idftrudtions 5 which 
 have nor been feen for fetting into Perfpeccive, that which 
 falleth ordinarily under the fenfes, and by confequence gi« 
 verb the manner of making all forts of Perfpectives^which a- 
 ny one can imagine. 
 
 I defire to proceed to c a life it to be feen , and to teach 
 to let into Perfpective all that may be fet into it, not only 
 in ] ieces level, and upon an united Plane, but alfo the bend- 
 ing, round and oblique, as for to paint within Roofs, fret- 
 tings or rais’d Works, Corners and Turnings again, ma- 
 king to appear fquare, or round, that which it'fhall not 
 be* In one word, all the Rarities and Deceits of Perfpe- 
 ctive, whereof thefe ought to come forth firft, being the 
 fuondations and principles of thofe which tnuft follow. 
 
 if 
 
THE ERE FACE. 
 
 If /fir, li know that they maybe pleafingr &nd that they are 
 look d upon with a courteous eye., it fhall be fuch a content- 
 ment and fatisfaction to me, as / hope not for, and which 
 fhall eafily compel me to acquit my felf of my Pro- 
 mile* 
 
Inftrufting how to find the pieces that may ferve to make any part 
 
 of Perfpe&ive. 
 
 T He Art of Perfective ought to begin by the planes > and according to 
 t'eafon, by thofe that are the mofl eafle, amongfl the which the fqv are , or 
 the Cube , is the mo ft eafle, you may fnd how the pla te thereof ought to 
 be made 3 at the igth fol. and its elevation, at the 4.4th . and \gth . folios . If one 
 
 would have it feen by the Angle fits plane is at the 20: h fol. and its elevation 
 at the 5 oth. fol. 
 
 For to elevate the Walls of an Houfe, or Hedge-Rows for a Garden , yon nrfl 
 take the 51th and 5 2th fol. andyo’t Jhall find there 3 with the planes the manner of 
 elevating them. 
 
 Thofe that would have the in -fide of a Chamber , or of an Hall feen by the 
 Front 3 Jhall find fir ft the Walls , as we fit a II Jhew in the 5 ith and 52 th fid. The 
 Leaf following will give you the Doors , and the 5 4th fol. will jhew how to make 
 the Windows there. For to raife the Chimneys in what place Joever you would 3 
 yoamufifeek. the jjth fol. After that you mu fl lay there the Planchers , wh ch 
 may be found in the 5 fth and 5 jth fol } for the Pavements , there are of ma :y 
 forts in the 31. 32* 33. and 34th. fol} If one would have open Doors, the gith 
 fol . will Jhew how to do it, and the Leaf following Jhall be for opening the Win- 
 dows. When there Jhall be two or three Stories, or Chambers, the one above the 
 ether 3 you mnfl always keep the fame Orders, and there ought to be but one only 
 point for the view , as you may fee in the 76 fol. for to afeend into thefe Chambers 
 there is an Af cent turning, or Stairs in the 82. 83. and 84 fol. 
 
 Ordinarily all the Buildings which are viewed by the in fide , are garni fired with 
 fotue Moveables, he that will place fuch there, Jhall find of all forts in the g6th 
 fol. and foforword unto the 103 fol. For the meafi res cf fuch Fig t res, if any 
 fuch ore to be placed there , they are to be^ found in the 122th. oriz^th fol. 
 
 For to make a Church appear by the in fide ,we mufi firfl re (Joke upon a plane , 
 and place that in the Perfpective, according u the two orders , that we- have fivers. 
 
 b ' there- 
 
A Table. 
 
 thereupon in the yptb or 41th fol. Ton muftrafe the Wallses is to he [een in the 
 51th fol. For the Windows, one may make them as the Arches of the 62th fob 
 or asiti the 54 th fol Except that there is no need of the crof-bars , and that 
 they mu ft be round above. If one would have Pilafiers, or Fillers, they are to he 
 found in the fiiih fol. If one would have Columns there , he muft take the Order 
 f r them from the iyih fol. After all that there muft he made a lending Roof, 
 or Roofs, if one would j'tt it upon the fide.s fol. 63 . 69. 70. 71. and 72. Will 
 f arm f you with all forts thereof. 
 
 The Ridge or top of the Church is made fter another manner then bending 
 fidcs, the Order f.r that may he found at the 74th fol. for to enrich it with Cor- 
 nifhes, Mouldings and other Ornaments, you muft have recot.rfic to the SS. 89. 
 
 90. 91. and 92.foI.fer Altars, if one would have them there, you Jhall find the 
 
 Method of making them in the 1 04 fol In the midfl of the erofs-bars of the 
 Church one may maize d Lanth. rn or Cubeloe, as is to he feen in the 75 .fol. The 
 Pavement maybe chofen in the 31. 32. 33. and 34 fol,. 
 
 As fir the Buildings without fide of the Doors and Windows, they are made 
 ike the Buildings in the in-fide, in the 5 3 and 54 .fol. as may be feen in the 106. 
 fol. When you jhall have elevated them to the height that you think.fit , you fall 
 find the draught there to raife fetch a kind of covering , as you. fall think, m-ft 
 fitting in the 107 , r Wi fol. If one would have there any Cornifh , or other 
 
 Ornaments, you may find how they ought to be placed in the fol. 81. 89. 90 91 
 
 and 92. Galleries Arch-wife, either for the out- fide or in-ftde may be found 
 in the fol. 6 3. 66 67. and 106. He that would make a whole ftreet of Buil-. 
 dings, he muft multiply the houfes, and place them on the one fide , and on the 
 ether, as one may fieern fol. 109. When one fall make houfes at a diftance 
 in the Perfpectives, and that they fall be parallel to the Honz.cn , you ought to 
 allow them the fingie draught only , without the thieve ft fthe Doors or the Win- 
 dows as I have made at the 1 10 fol. In the large open places, which are ordi- 
 narily m Streets in Respective, one may raifie a Pyramide there, the 80 fol. will 
 few howto elevate it, uponfteps, or any other figure, or Statue, upon a Pie - 
 
 deftal, the 91 fol. wtllfurmf the Piedefid, and the 124. fol. will few the 
 figure. J 
 
 When one would have Buildings feen by the left Angle he may take the planes 
 of the fol. 19. jo , and make the Elevations as he fall find them in the fol. 50. 
 anai 1 1 . which fall give Orders, how to make the Doors and Windows there. 
 Gardens madem Perfective do more delight the fight then any thing in the 
 
 II I I f r the variety of things, 
 
 vehchmay befietthere. The planes are to be made, as in the fol. 5S . 3 S.er 113 . 
 
 In 
 
A Table, 
 
 In the which one may make fuch c.iviftons , as one fhall defire. If we would have 
 Bowers, the order therefore may fie found in the 60 and 6 1 . fol . If one Jhould 
 like better Hedges or Arbours, he may find them in the fol. 5 1 • and $2. If in * 
 ftead of Bowers and Hedges , one would have a Wood, or Jlleys of Trees, th* 
 
 1 1 2 ft l. will Jhew the Orders for divers forts. When one wo "Id make Fountain s 
 there , or /pouts cf Water , the Round of the 2 9 fol may feme for a Bafon , its e 
 levation is at the 7 3 fol. If one would have af j are , he m ft take the fol 19 0 r 
 44 Fey to have 1 hereof with divers q carters he muft fee kjn the 45 or d.6 fol • 
 where he may find P oh gone s . He that would fet Slat! es,or Fig res upon P:e 
 deftals , which is a very fair Ornament for a Garden, he m ft take their n-eaj 1 es 
 in the fol 122. or 125 If one woudd place there any Caves orGrottes , the 7 4 * 
 fol. will jhew him how they ought to be made. 
 
 When one ceould caufi an Afient from one Garden to another, he fhdl find ma- 
 ny forts offteps in the fol. 78 79 80. and 8 1 . Every one may choofe among ft all 
 theft things, that which fhall pleafte him heft, and may p t them all there uto the 
 fame piece , and withou confufion , only he mu ft keep the prQportions and fymmetryes 
 which ought to be obferved therein 
 
 If one would have Shops open, where there is nothing but the Walls, the 
 will Jhew : If one would that they fhould be gar nifhed With Boards cr little Tables > 
 he Jhall find the order thereof in the 105 fol Tnere is alfo another fafhion for a 
 a Shop, which is not in the front Ifufthis, and whereof the Opening is altogether 
 different, one may fet it in the 95* fol. 
 
 Amp l theatres were heretofore more in ufe in Pictures, then they are at pre- 
 fent, which is the caufe that I have not fet any of them here, a ccouming them un- 
 it fief id here : If I jhall know, that any one defire them, I will fet forth fome,in the 
 Jecond part in the mean time, if any one would raife up one thereof, he may ufe the 
 ’flame, that is in fol 29. in the which he muft make a greater number of Girths , 
 according to the number and bigneft,of the Stages, that he would have therein: fer 
 to raife the Stages, he muft ufe the line of elevation, which he fijall find in the 75 . 
 foL As for Fortifications, he that would fet them into Perfpective, fhall find the 
 Method to reduce and abreviate the plane thereof in the 39 fol. and how they ought 
 to be elevated in fol. 114. 
 
 The Trcatife ft Shad ws , which beginneth at the 129 >fil. unto the 150. teach- 
 eth how to give them to all forts of Objects , whether they be caufcd by the Sun, by 
 a Torch, or by the Candle. 
 
 As fir all other things in particular, they are to be found according to the Or- 
 der of the Table which is at the end of the Bock. 
 
 b 2 
 
LicenfedMay I672. 
 Roger L Eftrange. 
 
I 
 
 some 
 
 AND 
 
 PRINCIPLES 
 
 OF 
 
 PERSPECTIVE- 
 
 \ 
 
we fall 
 
 P E R S P ECT I V E 
 
 'Ik TVejinit {or:s r bfxmcs ar>4 Terms of the Points, Lines and Figures which 
 
 rje. 
 
 He point' hath not any pans, as we fee A, in figure, i . In Purfpedive, there 
 
 J| -are three ferts dural, which are called, points of fight, points of difiance, 
 
 Js- and points contingent or accidental. 
 
 The line; is a length w i hour breadth, as A B in figure 2. The Perfpedive hath 
 five principle ones, the which it always uleib. The 1 . The line of the bale or plane, 
 as C D may be in figure 3. The 2 . I he line Perpendicular, or Plomb-line, which 
 failing upon another, maketh the Angles on the one part and another equal, and thefe 
 Angles are called Right Angles, and the line is Perpendicular to that upon the which 
 it fa Ik th as in the figure 3. A Band E F, falling upon C D, do make the Angle’ right 
 in G. The 3 . are lines parallel • T hefe are lit.es the wh ch being continued npon the 
 fame plane, and prolonged on the one part and o .her infinitely, will never meet toge- 
 ther, as N O, in the figure 6 . 1 he Horizontal line, is no other thing, then a parallel to 
 the bale - 5 We lhall fpeak cf it more largely in its place. The/}. is the line Diagonal, 
 this is a line drawn from one Angle to another, as K L in the figure ic.And the 5. The 
 line , occult or pointed, is a line which ought to be made in white, or with points, as O N 
 in figure and. thefe lines never ought to appear, when the work is finifhed. 
 
 The right Angle, is that which we lpeak bf treating of Perpendiculars, I have fee 
 it apart by it felf, that it may be better known what it is, by E F G, in figure 4. 
 
 There are two of her Angies, under which are comprized all the Angles which are 
 not right, the one is called the Obtufe which is more then right, as H L M, in figuae 5. 
 And the other fharp, which is lefs then right, as is H I R, in the fame figure. 
 
 A term, is the end, of any thing, as in the 2. A and B are terms or the ends of the line* 
 
 A figure, is comprized by one or by more terms , as in 7. p e 13. 14, & c , are 
 figures. 
 
 The fquare, hath the four fides equal, and the four Angles right, ABC D,in fig./. 
 
 The Parallelogram, or long fquare, hath the four Angles right, but not the fides 
 equal asCDEF, in fig ?. 
 
 The Triangle Equilateral, hath the three fides equal, as G H X in fig. 9. 
 
 Sedion and Interftdion of lines, are two lines which do crofs and divide themfelves 
 in one point, as in the figure 1 1, the lines A B and C D, divide themfelves in E, 
 
 The bowed or crooked Iine* 3 is that which is drawn by a Circuit from one point to 
 another, as LM, in fig. 12 
 
 A, Circle or Round, is a plane figure, comprized in one line only, called a circum- 
 ference, towards which all the lines coming from the Center are equal between them- 
 fclves, as B C D of the figure 1 3, the point of the midil of the Circle A, is called the 
 Center 
 
 The Diameter, is the right line B C of the Circle, the which palling by the Center 
 of the Circle A, divideth it into two equally 
 
 The Oval is a long figure, comprized within one line only, not Circular but bowed 
 and Regular as E in fig. 14. 
 
 The Spiral or Volute, isa line, that is framed by two Centers* or by one only by 
 Revolution or Diminution F, in fig. 15. 
 
t 
 
 P K ri' C i i i. A , 
 
 Afj 
 
P K R S 
 
 VS «*,• VS, ,V>. jU .A cV <*s ftV «*>, VS. £®fe y 
 
 i|> 5k 5k M &k §M 5M- 5k ^5M 5k 5k 5k %k si 
 
 Refi of the Definitions, Names and Ter me s . 
 
 Angents are one or more lines, which being drawn forth, do but only touch 
 || 0 r graze upon fome Objed, figures or lines, without dividing them in any 
 manner, as A B touch the Circle C, at the points DD. 
 
 I have placed here two forts of lines, which bear the fame name with the 
 Precedent, and which nevertheieis produce another effed, by reafonof the point o 
 fight, and of the Perfpedive, for the Angle E A B ought to be held for a right 
 Angle, and all the lines C ought to be held for Perpendiculars upon the Plane in Per- 
 fpedive, as is D F, and the lines A B, G I, and H K, are accounted Perpendiculars 
 t pon the bafe, and all the lines which go to the point of fight, either from above or 
 frcm below, or on the fide, are called Rays, and lines vifual or Radial. 
 
 The Plane or Ichnography, is a defcription or firft defign, the which reprefenteth 
 by fingle lineaments the Prints or foot-fteps, which the foundation of the thing which 
 one would defcribe, would make upon the Ground, to the end that by one view only 5 
 one may behold the correfpondence,fcituation and interval of the parts between them- 
 feives, as one may fee in Land M. 
 
 L. A Polygone is a figure which hath many Angles as is L A Degree is one littl e 
 part, whereby the Circle is divided into 360, and every degree is further divided by 
 the Aftronomers into 60 Minutes, and thefe Minutes into 60 others which they call 
 Seconds, &c. the which is not ufeful for us here. It fufficeththat we know, that 
 she degrees are thofe little divifions which are in the Circle N O P for to have the 
 knowledge of the Angles. This knowledge will enable eafily to make all forts of Po- 
 lygons, by dividing 360 by the number of Angles, which one would have in the 
 gure: for example, if I would make a fquare, I divide 360 by 4, and the Quotient 
 will give 90, which is the right Angle N MO, andfo of others : for thofe which 
 have not the ufe of Arithmetick, they fhall fintfe at the fourth fide of the Geometrical 
 Orders to make fuch, whatfoever may pleafe them* 
 
P R A C I I C A L. 
 
P ■ V- % V P C V I V b 
 
 s of Ccct:ntrj- 3 f<r to v.zheihc Lhi's-v;d Fi^t:r, $> which \vc abo;:tto dcfnc^ 
 
 Or io make i be Perpendiculars, or as ihg W or kin en -fay, the f'quare Draught, which 
 j s necellary in all our operations. If that you would have ic in the mid (hoi a line, as 
 Mi' you muft open the Compafs more then the Half of the line, and place one leg 
 ( p e ^oint A and with the other frame two little Arches or Bows above and below, as F 
 a d to do the fame from the point E, and the ftdions of tlufe Si tie Arches, will give the Per- 
 pendicular upon A E, t ngnre . t - , 
 
 2 if the line be at the bottom or the table or paper, and that one cannot make the Arcnes 
 
 above and below You muft divide this line into two, for to have the p >int G, then from the 
 ends of this line to make the Arches, wlfch fhall divide themfelves in H,then to draw a line 
 from H, to G, as in the fecond iigure. . f 
 
 3 To elevate a Perpendicular from the end of a line, as from the point I of the hae I Ik 
 This may be done divers way$,firft as we have faid,but when place is wanting you muft place 
 one ieo of the Compafs at the point I, and with the other leg to make a great portion of the 
 Circled M then to fet the Compafs fo opened upon the point M,and with the other to make 
 it to divide the Circle at the point N, then to take the half towards the point O, for to have 
 the right Angle O I or without bufying ones felf to feek this half of the Arch M N , you 
 muft with the°fame, opening of the Compafs make yet upon the N, and from th e fame point 
 N an Arch P Q,then having laid the Ruler at the points M and N,you muft draw a line which 
 fhall divide thisArch P Q£at the point P,and elevate a line from I to P,for to have the Per- 
 pendicular and the right Angle P I K, figure 3 . 
 
 4 Otherwife. if from the point P, you would raife a Perpendicular, take a point at plea- 
 fure upon the line P R, as Q^and from the point Qmake a Circle which toucheth the point P, 
 and fhall divide the line P S, in fome part, as S, then to draw from S, by the point Q, unto 
 the circumference of the Circle T, and T P, fhall be the Perpendicular, fig 4. For to abre- 
 viate all the orders, you muft have an equaller very juft. 
 
 5. From a point given upon a line to make a Perpendicular to fall From che point given A-, 
 you muft make the Arch B C, which divideth the line given E F, at the points G H,from thefe 
 points G H, make two little Arches above and bftow, which fhall divide themfelves as at the 
 point I, then from the point A, caufe a line to fall pafting by I, upon the line E F, and that 
 (hall be the Perpendicular of the point given® 
 
 6. From a point given at the end of a line to make a Perpendicular Fall. Let the point 
 given be K, and the line L M, from the point K, you muft draw aline traverfing at pleafure, 
 which divideth in fome place the line L M, as N : after divide this line K N, into two equal 
 parts, and from the midft 0 ,make the Arch that pafteth by the point K, and at the feftion 
 which ic will make upon the line L M, as P, and the point P, fhall be to make the Perpendi- 
 cular to fill K P.- 
 
 7. The parallels. For to be well made ought to be over half- Rounds, which they ought to 
 touch as F G, which is parallel to FI I, it is made over the half, Round which it toucheth at 
 the points KL. 
 
 8 » To divide a line into many equal parts. Let the line to be divided be A B. You muft 
 draw another above or below, which may be parallel to it, as C D, and upon this latter, 
 which muft be greater or lefter, then that which is to be divided : You muft make as many 
 parrs, as you would divide that of A B into, as in our example feven, then from the firft and 
 laft point of thefe divifions, to draw lines which pafs by the ends of that which is to be di- 
 vided, which fhall divide themfelves in a certain point as here, having drawn from C by A, 
 and from D, by B, the fe&ion E is made, at which point F, you muft draw all the divifions 
 @f th e line G D, and the line A B, fhall be divided fs one defimh. 
 
3 
 
 P R A C T I C A L' 
 
 * 
 
r 
 
 Q For to frame the Figures, 
 
 r f'*W F die line A B, be given to make of it a fquare You mull fet one Leg of the compafs, at the poir 
 I and with the other leg take the length A B, and holding firm at the point A, with the other 1c 
 JtL the Compafs, make the Arch B C,and make alfo from the point B,the Arch A D, which fhall di 
 themfelvesa: the point £, without the fide of the fedion, he muft t ran (port the half ofthe'Arch A 
 E, which (hall be in the points D C, by the which drawing right lines one fhaUbav^a pyrftd fquare 
 After another ma .n.r. Upon the line A B, draw from the point A, a perpendicular C A, equal 
 B, then having taken with a Compafs the lerg h A B or AC, you muft fet uSfeleg of the Comp 
 the point. B, and with the o.'n r make an Arch , ani do aLo-gether the fame from the point C, the 
 on of ih'.-fe two Archest all be the point D, ior to frame the iquai e ABCD, 
 
 2. For to make a parallelogram or long ftjuare-.Dr w aPerpend’cuhr greater or frnailer LhenE F,as 
 then ha i ,g tak n the height E GJec a Eg of the Comp.E at F, and wEh the other tn. ke an Arch, tak 
 the 1 ng h E F,nd let a leg of theCompjft in G,mi m ike a Cconi Arch then divide the firft at H, 
 you Iliad haverhat which, you dJire,you muft always obfeive .he Erne thing, far all the four rightAn 
 Of Poljgoncs Circular, whu h are f igures with divers Ajfiglos within one Circle 
 
 3 . For the Triangle equilateral You muft iet the halfDiameter at the point A, and deferibe tB 
 D E, and draw a line D E, this line fhall. be ihe fide of the Triangle, D E F. 
 
 4.For the fquare draw 2 Di meters at right Angles-, & joyn their ends, this fli all be the fquare A 
 
 5. For the Pentagone ( r five Angles. Make 2 Diameters, and take D G, the half of the Demy 
 meter D 3 , and from .he point G, of the Interval G A , make the Arch A H, the fubtendent H A , 
 be the fide of die Pentagone. 
 
 6 For the Hexagone, or fix Angles. The half Diameter is the fide of the Hexagone. 
 
 7. For the Hei ta gone or feven Angles. Take the half of the fide of the Triangle Equilateral A. 
 
 8. For the Gdogor.e or eight Angles Take the half of the quarter of the Circle . - 
 
 9 For ihe Ennagone or 9 Angles. Take the 2 thirds of the half Diameter, as E B,for its fide, 
 ro. For .he D.cagone or ten Angles: Take an halfDiameter and divide it in two at the point G 
 from the pci.it G, and the interval G'A/iqake the Arch A B, the part of the half Diameter B C, 
 make the fide of the Dxagone, -A 
 
 11 For the Herd cigone or eleven Angles. ( Make two Diameters at right Angles , and froi 
 point A, make the ArcIfiB C, of ihe interval of the halfDiameter , then from the interRdion C, 
 the E, draw a line C D This is the fide of the Bendecagone. 
 
 12. For the Dodtcagone, or twelve Angles, divide into 2 the Arch of the Hexagone A B, the fab 
 dent fhall b: the fide 
 
 1 3 . The Ova! T made of many fafhions and all compofed of portions of the Circle, or of one onl 
 by two Cent, rs, the moil commonly ufed are ihefe. Having made a Circle wi ll 2 Diameters,as A B 
 from the ports A B, we muft make more tw r o circles equal to the firft, then from the point D 
 draw a 1 w by the Center of the 1 JF Circle A, unto the cir cumference E, then fetting a leg of the ( 
 p.Tj at the point D, wEh the other, you muft take the interval E, and make the Arch E F. You mul 
 as much on the o.her fide, and the Wall will be. made. 
 
 ,14 For an Oval more round. You muft draw one only line, and make a Circle, of the Center A 
 from ihe fedion of 1 his circle upon the right line at the point B, this fhall be the Center of another 
 cle. To frame the Oval, you muft take with a Compafs all the Diameter of one of the Circles, as : 
 ihe point A to the point E, and fet at the fedions of the two Circles D E, a leg of the Compafs, and 
 the other leg make the Arch D G H,and to do the fame from the point E. 
 
 1 5. There is ano.her manner of making of Ovals very eafie,and more ufeftil then the former, ft eipg 
 by one and ftie fame Order, they be made long, narrow, large, fhort,&c See here how they are made 
 muft upod a light line fet two nails, or two pins, which Erve for the Center, as A B,for to fafhn | th 
 or fm all cord cf die h fight and largenefs that you would have the Oval, as is the pack-thread ABC: 
 muft held l his- drr ad bended with a feather or pencil, which you fhall turn, until that you be arr 
 where you have begun. If you would make it longer, lengthen out the Center, and do the contrary 
 would have i: (hurt ; for if you Et the two nails clofe one to the other, you fhall have a Round/ 
 
 16. For the Volute, or line iikemmo the Spiral, take two points upon one line, as A B, let theft 
 points ferve ior a Center, throne after the other ; for example, having made the half-round A B,fet a ; 
 die leg of the Con- p aft on Bftdndwiih pother leg take thelength A, and make an half-Circle A C. 
 holding one leg of the Compafs at A, you muft take rhediftance A C, and make the half-Round C D, 
 po cftjt as you pieale, changing only the tenters. ffigmla giveth it another fafhion. 
 
4 
 
 PRACTICAL! 
 
 B 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 *U V* ,*• 4v rliv ^ v f*V A ^ j^Vf jjlt &, , jfal A J^hc jjfk 
 
 < 3 / the Rayes VISUAL. 
 
 T He Object being a Point, then there is but one Ray Vifual 
 made from the Qbjeft to the Center of the Eye 5 And this Ray is 
 called Axe or Centrical, which is the mod lively, and theftrong- 
 eft of all the other Rayes, as you fee in the Figure A B. It is this 
 which divideth always the Horizontal line, and which giveth the Point 
 of the fight. 
 
 If the Objedt be a right line, the Rayes Vifual make a Triangle, where- 
 of the line C D is the Bafe , and the two fides are the Kayes on the out- 
 fiie, which come from the Eye A, and make the Triangle C A D, And 
 A B is the Centrical Radius. If this line were viewed by one end, it would 
 
 feem as one point. 
 
 If the Objcdt be a Superficies plane or fpherical, the Vifual- Rayes will 
 make a Pyramid, the Bafe of which is the Object C D E F, and the top is 
 the Eye A, the reft of this Pyramide are the Rayes Vifual 5 if the Su* 
 perficies were view'd by the fide, it would make but a line. Of all the 
 Rayes Vifualstheftrongeft is the Centrical A B: and fo much as the 0- 
 thers arc further off, by fo much they are the weaker, and keep neverthe- 
 less a reafonable flrrength unto the opening of a right Triangle, at G A P. 1 
 Thofe which pals the right Angle, are fo weak, that they are notfeen but 
 confufedly,and therefore there is need that the out- fide Rayes w hich may 
 comprehend -the Object, make at leaft a right Angle within the Eye. 
 Wherefore one-may fee better a Perspective with one Eye only, then with two>. 
 Accordiugas tome fay, the whole object isbetterfeen with one eye only 
 then with two becaufe,fay they, that the fight is then more piercing, its 
 refpect that .all the Vifual fpirits of theEye clofedare directed and brought, 
 to the other, and this union of Vifual fpirits giveth a great force, and ma- 
 keththe fight very ftrong.-for every Virtue united is much more vigorous, 
 then whenit is dit'perfed: which is the caufe,as they fay,chat by clofing one 
 of the Eyes-ali tire Vifual Vertue which was difperfed in the two, cometh 
 to joyn it telf, and to be gathered into one, and by this means it is the bet- 
 ter. See here wherefore they holdit for a certain thing, that any one fedth 
 more e xactly,,, hawing one Eye clofed, then being both open. 
 
 Howfower it be, it is pertain, that one may fee a Perfpe&ive better 
 with one Eye alone then with two, beeaufe that the Centrical Radius 
 feeketh aut the point of the fight, where all the radials of the Picture do 
 m et, which caufeth the whole tobe feen in its Perfection : which is the 
 reafon that we do not fty the point of the ey<s-,but the'point oftheeye.- for 
 to give to underftand that the Perfpective is more pleafing, when it is 
 viewed with one eye only. 
 
f 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 The Firjl DifinitiiH. 
 
 P Erfpcctive is the Art which reprefenteth every Object, feen by fome 
 Diaphaae or tranfparent Mcdmm, through which the Vifual Rayes 
 penetrating, are terminated or bounded at the Object: and gene- 
 rally all that is feen through fomthing, as through the Air, through 
 the Water,through the Clouds, through Glafs, and the like, things may 
 be faid to be feen in Perfpective. And becaufe we can fee nothing, but 
 through thefe things, we muftfoy, that all that we fee »s feen mPerfpe- 
 
 ctive. 
 
 The end of Perfpective is to reprefent upon a Plane, as is £ E G H, 
 the obrets which are beyond fuch as you fee here A B C D, reprefented 
 in T K L M : for to underhand this better, let us fuppofe that there is upon 
 the Ground an object A B C D, and that the Eye of the Beholder is in O, 
 if one put between the one and the other a tranfparent Body, marked with 
 E F G H, the Sections which the Rayes of the Eye would make of the 
 
 Perpendicular QR S T, would make the Figure I K LM, fuch as the ohr-j 
 ^ 11 'Rnrlw which maketh us to under* 
 
 free would appear in the tranfparent Body : which maketh us to under- 
 ibnd, that all Perfpective is no other thing, then fections ©f a line i This 
 is thereafon that Monfteur MtroUis, calleth always that which he putteth 
 in Perfoective • The Appearance of the Section, becaufe that the Plane 
 E F G H, divideth the vifual Pyramid A B C D and O, and giveth fo$ 
 
 IS 
 
 the Section I K L M. g aectl0ns j s> that one on iy i; nc can determine ho- 
 
 thins, & that it is neceflary,that there be two of them which divide them- 
 felvs" for to have a Point: feeing that it is certain, that from our eye to the 
 object there is always made a Radius or right line,this cannot fail US : bat 
 for to have another, which muft divide it, we mu ft imagine, that from 
 our foot there is made a Center, from whence divers Lines or Rayes do 
 proceed which so to the Angles of the objects,which we behold as from 
 the Center P to the Angles A B C D, the which Rayes being divided by 
 fome tranfparent Plane, as is E F G H, all thefe Rays P B,P A, P C,P D, 
 which were Horizontal, raife themfelves, and become Perpendiculars, as 
 P B, becometh QM. P D,becometh R L,&c. For if they remained Ho- 
 rizontal, the vifual Rayes would not divide them, but at the objeeft it 
 ftlf where both of them do meet. This is the Reafon that we always fup- 
 pofe a Plane, the which making the Rayes to reflect, giveth the means to 
 divide them, and fo to finde all the Points, to frame the appearance of the 
 objects whatsoever they be. 
 
 Ml, 
 
r W A C % 1:6 .11 L? 
 
 » ilK 
 
7 
 
 P E E S P E Ct I ^ I 
 
 Second Definition; 
 
 I Chnography, is the Pourtraiture of the Platform or the Plane, upon 
 the which we would raife any thing, as A B C D is the Ichnography 
 or the plane of a fquare body. 
 
 The Third Definition* 
 
 Orthography is the Pourtraidfc of the face, or the fore-part of the ob/edt,’ 
 as of a Building, or elfe it is the Reprefentation of the Body, or of the 
 Edifice directly oppofite to our eye, fo as IF GH is the orthography 
 or the fore-part of a Cube, or of a Building ; for as the Ichnography 
 reprefenteth the Plane, fo the Orthography giveth the representation of 
 the fide oppofite to the Eye. 
 
 The fourth Definition . 
 
 Scemgraphy, is that which reprefenteth the Qbjed wholly elevated and 
 perfect, with all its diminutions and umbrages, as well on the fore-part 
 as on the fides, which may be feen, and are above, as I K L M N O P,is 
 a perfect Cube ; in brief, it isthe work wholly accomplilhed, which con- 
 ceineth in it (elf the other Parts, 
 
 That we may make thefe words more Intelligible, we (hall name here- 
 after the Ichno2raphy,thePlara p ' o*«-/io>giap[ry, the face or fore-part; 
 
 - * ^grapny,tne Elevation, r s 
 
s 
 
 perspective 
 
 Wherefore the obje&s that are far diftant fum to app roach and joyn themfelves 
 together , although they be in equal diftance* 
 
 T His Figure will help to fatisfie this queftion, which is difficult e- 
 nough 5 let us fuppofe then, that feme body hath his eye fac the 
 midftof a line : it is evident, that if he would fee the two Ends 
 thereof A B,he muft make an half-round V X,the center of which 
 is the Eye, and the centrical Ray f and making this half-Ckcle, he 
 
 difeovereth the objedls, which are on the one fide and other in fuch man- 
 ner, that it feemeth to him. that the fartheftdiftant of the fide A,feemto 
 come near to theccnterf.And thofeon the fide. B go thither alfo,and feem 
 as if they would joyn themfelvs as much as the one and the other fide can. 
 
 If one ask why the things fo diftaiit,approach the one to the other,whe-> 
 ther they be of the fide either above or below us : for it feemeth, that that 
 which is on our fides would joyn themfelves, and that the planchers both 
 above and below, do raife up and abafe themfelves the farther they are 
 diftant ftom us. 
 
 Behold the Anfvver and theReafon in two words:It is that all the objects 
 appear, under the vifual Angle, under the which they are feenmow it is that 
 the co!umns,trees, or whatfoever objects they be,which are on thefide A, 
 the fartheft diftant will appear to draw towards the center T, becaufe they 
 are viewed by an Angle, or by a Radius that draweth thitherward 5 and as 
 for example, rhe Ray j* K? is much nearer the centrical T, then is fC, 
 and f E, and by confequent it ought to appear fo : and if the theobjedis 
 were produced infinitely, they would ftill approach nearer to the centrical 
 T, until that they would feeiti to make but one point, which would be in- 
 finite, as all the points of fight ought to be. 
 
 Now in Petlpedtive the fides A fc» B S, remain not Parallels, but are 
 changed into vifual Raves, which divide themfelves at the point of fight, 
 and by this means caule the Diminutions of the body and fides of the 
 objects. For example in the fecond Figure, the eye being in a diftance 
 capable of feeing the line A B, from the two Angles A B, two Rayes 
 begin to be made, which goto finde out the point of fight T. And thefe 
 Raves A T and B T, receive thefediions that the point of diftance giveth 
 to objects, which do clofe together proportionally, as we fhall declare in 
 its place, fo that the whole Parallellogramne A K, B S, and all the ob- 
 jects that are on the one parr, and the other, come to be reduced to the 
 lictle (pace A V, B X : and if the eye were farther diftant, this fpace 
 would be yet left er, by reafonchat the objects, view’d afar off, feem very 
 finall, as I ihail make it appear in the next leaf. 
 
PRACTICAL « 
 
 c 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 ,-<-S jir*' vt* tin r*f> *■♦•> «-*>> #$% rt 1 * „ri\ <#. i*n A . v eti» r#\ <$» ,<ftv jtV .fta, .tV, 4* .*&» v r&>, r,W eta 
 
 Wherefore the objects draw near to each ether 3 being view'd afar off. 
 
 W E have already faid, that things do appear according to the Angle, in the 
 which they are view’d *, this Angle is taken at the Eye, where the lines do 
 meet that do compute the Objed ; for example, the firft Objed being B C, 
 if the Eye A look upon it, it will caufe the Rayes A B and A C, which give the Angle 
 BAG: fo that an Objed feen in a great Angle wall appear great, and another feen ia 
 a little Angle will appear little : Now it is, that the Objeds being equal, thofe that 
 aref&'cheft off are view'd in alefs Angle : we muft conclude then, that the Objeds 
 far theft off, ought to be the leaft in Perfpedives ; for example, if the Eye be in A the 
 Objed B C, which is the firft, will appear to it the greateft, becaufe that it is viewed 
 by a greater Angle, the 2 3 4 and 5 Objeds, wall appear to it always the lefs, although 
 that they be equal : the reafon is, becaufe that the Angles diminifh according as the 
 Objedsare farther diftant if the Eye were remitted into N L K L, it would appear the 
 greateft, and B C would be no bigger then N O. 
 
 This fecond figure is in purfuit of that which we are fpeaking of : for fuppofing, that 
 the Objeds appear fuch, as is the Angle within which they are viewed ^ it followeth 
 thence, that if one draw many lines under one and the fame Triangle, that they ought to 
 appear equal amongft themfelves : fo we fay, that all the lines which are comprifed 
 between the lines of the Triangle NOP, will appear equal amongft themfelves. Now 
 feeing that all the Objeds comprifed by the fame Angle feem equal, thofe which ftiall 
 be comprifed by a greater Angle will feem greater, and thofe that fliall be comprifed 
 fey a lefs Angle will feem lefs. 
 
 Suppofing that which we have faid, if there were a quantity of Columns or Pi- 
 hftersof one fide and the other in an Hall, it would be of neceflity that th? Objeds 
 fhould be under the fame Angle, and that all fliould proceed unto one point, which 
 'Is within the Horizon O. For example, the Eye being in A, difeovering the firft Ob- 
 jed D E if from the points DE, one draw the vifual Rayes, D O, E O, they will 
 make the Triangle DOE, which will enclofe the Pilafters D E, F G, H I, K L, 
 M N, whence they ought to appear all equal. 
 
 That which we have faid concerning the fides, ought to be underftood likewife of 
 the pavements and planchers : for the diminutions of the Angles, under the which we 
 fee the Objeds that are far off, are made as well both above and under «s as on the 
 fides. Wherefore we fhall fay thereof no other thing, but only that we muft ob- 
 ferve that there be as many fquares between the Objeds fartheft off, as between thofe 
 that are nearer : for although that the Objeds which are remoteft do clofe thera- 
 felves, the more far they are off : yet they ceafenot to keep their faid diftance, as 
 we may fee between B C D E, which is the Interval of the Pilafters, there are fix- 
 teen fquares. There are alfo fifteen between the moft diftant KL MN. 
 
9 
 
 P R A C >n C A ’U 
 
to PERSPECTIVE 
 
 I T follows th on that which we were fpeaking of, that if one joyn 
 together two Triangles, asinthelaft, butoneforthe fidesj and 
 two of the l ift for the top and the bottom, that all four together 
 
 will bound themfelves in one only ppint A, which is the point of 
 fight where all the vifual Rays come to joyn together 5 and by this 
 means it ccmcthto prove that which we are fpeaking of. That ac- 
 cording to tbemeafure of thediftanceof the Obje&s, they come to 
 clofe together 5 thofe which are below raife themfelves, and thofe 
 which are above abafe themfelves, and thofe of the fides clofe them- 
 lelvs,as we may fee in the firftFigure,the which maketh us fee by the 
 Eye the hollowings which flie from, and feem to be'far diftant fr om 
 us, although we have them all near to our Eye. 
 
 The Trees being produced by the fame caufe, bring forth the fame 
 efted that the columns do .♦ for being all comprifed under the fame 
 Angle, and the two ranks having each a Triangle, the Triangles joyn 
 themfelves in one point A, and frame a third, which is the Earthjand 
 the fourth, if you will, fliall be the Air : and fo affordeth us a delight 
 which rejoyceth us, and recreateth the fight. We will now begin to 
 fliew, how it muft be proceeded to bring into Perfpe&iye, any; plane* 
 body and figure whatsoever.- 
 
perspective. 
 
 Of the Horizon. 
 
 f-w— ^ H E Horizon in the Art of Perfpedlive, is no other thing 
 then a line which giveth us the height of our Eye, in fuch 
 1 manner, as, if we be rais’d as the fin’t man, our Horizon fhall 
 be high : if we be but of our own height, as the fecond man: 
 it will be but of our height: and if we be lying orfet, as the third, our. 
 Horizon will be low : fo that the Horizon fheweth how much the Eye 
 is elevated from the Earth. 
 
 This is the principal Piece of the Picture, and which ought to give 
 ti e Rule to all the reft, as well fcr the bending of the Buildings and Ar- 
 chitectures, as for the Meafures and heights of the Figures. The which 
 hath caufed a petty difpute between the beft Painters j for the one fay, 
 that it muft needs be that all Pictures have their Horizon within the 
 w< rk, and that the Perfpedtive l'uffereth that a Pidlure elevated above 
 the Eye, beareth its particular Horizon. Others will not havt this 
 fecond Horizon, and ufe always the Natural, in what place foever the 
 Picture be placed, imagining that all the height and breath which they 
 have before them is as a great Piece or Picture, of which that which is 
 elevated in efifedf ought to take its Meafures The honour that 1 bear 
 to the one and the other, fuffereth me not to determine upon it, feeing 
 that many good Authors have fuffered them both. But if any one fhould 
 prefs me to fpeak my opinion, I would fay freely that I am of the opini- 
 on of the latter, by reafon that all that is in the Picture would appear 
 there more natural. 
 
 This line beareth always the Points of fight, of diftancc, and fome- 
 times the Contingents or Accidental : in brief, this is that which fepa- 
 rateth the Heaven from the Earth, and which limiteth the - fight : it is 
 always Parallel to the bottom of the Picture or Plane, upon the which 
 the Object is placed : whence it appeareth.that one cannot fet any thing 
 above the Horizon, which furpafleth not the height of the Eye. But if 
 the Object be fo high, that it paffeth this Horizon, it muft be then, that 
 the Plane of the lame Obj;Ct be above : as for example, a Tree or 
 a Mountain may well have its Top above the Horizon j but neverthelefs 
 the foot thereof is far on this fide. 
 
 All that is below the Horizon, maketh its upper part appear, and as 
 foon as one is part it, one can fee it no more. For example, the two Pie- 
 ces placed upon the foundation of the firft figure A B Ihew their Top, 
 becaufe that the Horizon is above that of the lecond figure D C, do not 
 Ihew it : and if they be as it were in the fame line, by greater reafon, thofe 
 of the third E F ought lefs to ihew it, feeing that they exceed it very 
 much : they are neverthelefs as high the one as the other, it is then the 
 Horizon that caufeth this difference. 
 
•PERSPEC.TIV i 
 
 of the Bafe. 
 
 T H E Bafe of the Plane. This is the line upon the which the Object ought 
 to be, and every Objed hath its own, the which is always Parallel to the Ho* 
 rizon; as is A B of the firft Figure : F G of the fecond : N O of the 
 
 third: This line ferveth fometimes to give the lengths and the bredths, as we fhall 
 fee afterwards® It is always the bottom of the Pidure which muft give all the Mea- 
 sures. 
 
 of the Point of fight^ Point of Perfpeffive, Point Ocular y or Point Principal* 
 
 T HE Point of Sight, of Perfpedive, Principal or Ocular. This is a Point 
 which maketh the Axis of the Eye, or the Centrical Ray above the Horizon- 
 tal line, as E of the firft Figure is the point Ocular above the Horizon C D, 
 at which all the lines or viiual Rayes ought to joyn themfelves : It is called alfo the 
 
 point of the Eye, by reafon that it is oppofite to him which looketh upon it. 
 
 of the Points of Difiance: 
 
 T HE Point of diftance, or Points of diftances. Is a point or points (for they 
 make two, although it be not neceffary)which are to be fet equally diftant from 
 the point of fight: They call them points of diftance : becaufe that the Perfon 
 muft be as much diftant from the Figure, or Pidure, and from the bafe, as thefe points 
 are diftant from the Point Ocular, and they muft always be within the horizontal line, 
 as H I is the Horizon : K, the point of fight : L and M are the points of diftance, 
 
 which ferve to afford all the Abridgements. As for example, if from the ends of the 
 line F G, one draw two lines to the point K, and from the fame points F G, one draw 
 two lines to the points of diftances M and L, where thefe two lines G L and F K fhall 
 be divided at the point X, and G K, and F M, at the point Y, this fhall be the line of 
 finking or hollowing, and the abridgment of the fquare, whereof F G is a fide and thi 
 bafe : the lines that go to the point of fight are all vifual Rays, and thofe which go to 
 the points of diftance are Diagonals. 
 
 of Points Accidental. 
 
 P oints Contingent or Accidental. Are certain. Points where the Objeds do end, 
 which may be caft negligently, and without order, under the Plane : it is be- 
 caufe they are not drawn to the Point ocular, nor to the points of Diftances : 
 but by chance and at adventure, where they meet ea.ch other in the Horizon : as for 
 example, thefe two pieces of wood X and Y, do make the points V, V,V, V, above the 
 Horizon P and Q, and go not to the point of fight which is R, nor to the points of di- 
 ftance S and T : And fometimes the Bodies or Objeds are fo ill ordered, that one muft 
 make thefe points without the Horizon, as we fhall caufe to befeen in its place. They 
 ferve alfo for the Openings of doors, of windows, of ftairs, and fuch like things. 
 The which fhall be feea hereafter. 
 
f 
 
 P R A C T I C A L 
 
 I 2 
 
 Honzsrt-tal 
 
 Line 
 
 M Tomb o -f Thftance 
 
 'Bant K 
 
 The Haft 
 
 Q, 'T Point acdientaU- 
 bift&ncc 
 
*3 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 of the Point of the Front . 
 
 T HE point of fight diredtj or of the front s it is when we have 
 the Ohjeft whole before us, without being more -on the one fide 
 then the other, and then one hath the Qbjedt wholly right y that 
 is to fay, that it fheweth nothing but the fore- part, when it is elevated, 
 and a little above, if it be under the Horizon, but it never fheweth its 
 fides, if the Objects be not a Polygone. For example, the Plane A B 
 C Dis wholly the front, fo that one can fee nothing of the fides A B 
 nor C D if it were elevated, but only the fore-part A D. The reafon 
 is, for that the point of fight E, being dire&ly oppofite to it, it caufeth 
 the diminution of the one fide and the othery this ought to be underflood 
 if the Object were an Elevation; for when there is nothing but the 
 Plane, it fheweth all, as A BG D« 
 
 of the Feint of the fide . 
 
 T H E oblique point of fight, or on the fide.' Is when we fee the 
 Object on the fide of us, and that we fee it not but athwart,or with 
 '-the corner of the Eye, our Eye being neverthelefs always over 
 againfl the point of fight : for then we fee the Object on the fide, and 
 it fheweth us two faces : for example, if the Eye be in F, the point of 
 fight the Object G HIK, will appear to it athwart, and will fhew to it 
 two faces G K and G H, and then it will be a point of the fide. We ought 
 to do altogether the fame in the points of the fides, as in the points of 
 the front, fetting a point of fight, and thofeof distances briefl y^ 
 the fame is to be done, as at the view of the front. 
 
 » 
 
PRACTICAL. i 
 
 Km 
 
of the vijual Rayes . 
 
 T HIS is a general Maxi me, That all the lines which are Perpendicular to the 
 bafe, within a G comet rai Plane, ought always to be drawn at the point of 
 light, when one would fet the fame Planes in Pcrfpe<ftive- 5 for example,in thelittle 
 Plane of the firft figure the bafe isAB,upon which all the lines Z arePerpendicular to it, 
 Thisbeing fup po fed, that if one give a lefs or a greater line then that of the Plane, 
 as the great line A B, which hath the fame number of divifions with the little one, and 
 from all thefe divifions Z, one draw to the point of fight all thefe lines ofZ to E, they 
 will all be perpendicular to the bafe, according to the Reafons of Perfpe&ive, we 
 may alfo name them Radial, and properly vifual Rayes : the laft of which are called 
 Extremes, by reafen that they are at the end of the bafe, as are thefe A B* 
 
 Of the Diagonals or Diawetrals, and of their fett ions. 
 
 I T is alfo a Max ime, that all the Diagonals of fquares in Perfpe&ive, are drawn 
 at the Point of diftance. For example, at the little Plane of the fecond Figure, the 
 Diagonals D O, F O, are drawn at the points of diflances in the Plane in Perfpe- 
 eftive, the which maketh that the points of diflances do give us the Abridgements of the 
 Objects, that the point of fight doth remove from us : in fucb manner (as we have al- 
 ready faid) that if one draw from the ends of the line of the bafe F G to the points of 
 diflances LM, they fh all be Diagonals ^ and where the lines fhall divide the outmofl 
 Rayes F K and G K, at the points O • this fhall be the Abridgment of the fquare, 
 whereof F G is one fide : and where the fame lines fhall divide the lines Z at the 
 point Q^one mull draw Parallels which fhall give the Abridgement of all the fquares, 
 and a like number cf all the fides, as in the little Plane, And the more thefe points of 
 diflances are removed from the point of fight, the more the Obje&s do abridge them- 
 felves aud clofe together. And this is it, why all the Beauty of the Pesfpe&ive depend- 
 eth on the points of diflances, which ought nether to be too near, nor too far off from 
 the point of fight ; the which made me fet this third figure, with diverfity of removals, 
 for to caufe a belief of the verity of that which I am fpeaking. Let us fuppofe then 
 that R is the point of fight, and S S the outmofl: Rays ^ if one fets the point of diftance 
 at T, he fhall divide the Radius S R, at the point V, which fhall be the abridgement 
 of the fquare, whereof S S is one fide, the which is ridiculous to fee a fquare which 
 fhould appear three times more hollow then it ought to be, by reafon that the point of 
 the diftance T is too near to the point of the fight R, for it muft be at the neareft, that 
 the point of diftance be as far removed from the point of fight, as the half of the Pi- 
 dure, or of the Perfpe&ive, which one would have feen, as is X, removed from R, 
 by reafon that ihefe Removals do always give a right Angle to the Eye of iheBeholder. 
 In V it would be more pleafing, dividing the fquare at 2, and at it would be better, 
 dividing it at a . At 5 it would be far enough removed, and would make the fquare more 
 fhort in 6, as we fhall give the reafon in the figure following. 
 
 Some one may fay to me, why have I then fet in all the Figures of this Book, the 
 points of diflances fo near, feeing that being removed farther, the whole would have 
 been more pleafing : And he might by reafon, if I had made the book only to have bin 
 feen for curiofity : but it being made for to teach, there was need that all fhould be 
 feen, the better to underftand our Orders : this is the caufe, that I have put into the 
 works as much as I .could. if one anfwer me,, that it were better to make the book 
 longer : I muft then have made it much bigger, and have fet but one figure in every 
 page : the which I would avoid and make a book , convenient for carriage 
 and it will fuffice to advertife that amongft the works that one fhall make,he ought 
 10 enlarge them : the which is eafie, keeping the Rules which we have given. 
 
-XT: r - 
 
 P K A C 1 1 c A ! • 1 1 
 
35 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 of the Difiance , or Removal and Setting. 
 
 W E have faid, fpeakingf of far off vifual Rayes, that the Eye could not conve- 
 niently difeover more, then that which may be compri fed within one right 
 vifual Angle. That is to fay, that the fight receiveth not clearly nor en- 
 tirely the Objeds, when the Rayes go beyond the right Angle ; And behold the rea- 
 , fon, The apple of the eye being near to the center of the eye, cannot receive clearly 
 more then a*quarter of a circle, fo that the Rayes which are beyond that have but a 
 confufed and troubled fight, when the Angle is more then 90 degrees : this is the caufe 
 that it is better to make it rather leffer then greater, as it may be of two thirds, which 
 are 60 degrees, but not lefs : becaufe that the Rayes being fo ftreightned or retrained, 
 would not give Contentment to the Eye, becaufe that the Angles being fo little, make 
 it were but one point between the Apple of the Eye : let us fee this difference by fi- 
 gures. Suppofing that thefe Planes and thefe Squares were the fame that are in the lafi 
 figure. Thediflance of the point T to R, will give us the di fiance of T to the Bafe, 
 where being, it would be neceffary that the Angle openitfelf much more- for to fee 
 the Extremes Y, Y : for if it open but as a right Angle, the Eye fhall not be able to fee 
 all, as T the right Angle, cannot fee but the points Y, V, the which would make the 
 Perfpedive wholly faulty, by reafon that that which fhould give us a fquare, would 
 frame us a Parallelogramme. The neareft that one can fet it is at the point X, which is, 
 as I faid even now, the true Meafureof the right Angle, which containeth all the 
 Piece Y, Y : If one withdraw it yet further from the point of fight, it will be yet more 
 pleafing, as in I, which hath but an Angle of 72 degrees. But if one withdraw it unto 
 % it will be the perfection, becaufe that the Rayes being not fo much dilated, have the 
 more force, and conteine better the Objects ; but I would never goe any farther then 5. 
 for the reafon whereof we are fpeaking that the Angles are but as one point within the 
 Eye,- and a confufion within the Object. The which ought to oblige us to take good 
 heed, where we fet the Points, feeing that they are fo important and neceflary . And to 
 hold for a general Maxime, that it muft be at leaft, that the diftance be equall to the 
 fpace, which is from the right Radius, unto theCorner of Perfpective.Eor xample R, 
 is the right Radius and X the leffer difiance which is equall to Hh Y, whereof having 
 taken the Meafure, we muft Carry it on the one and other fide of the Point fight as here 
 R S S. Or of one fide onely,as fhall be feen in the Leaf following. 
 
 Behold what may be faid herein, by the reafons of the Eye, but the Fradice giveth 
 this Excellent Rule, which may be Generali, fo that one ufe it with diferetion. That 
 having chofen the place, where you would make the Perfpedive, you rpay determine on 
 what fide it will be the better in fight, and whence it ought to be looked on : and then 
 you muft take the meafure of this lafi place unto the former, and fet this Interval by 
 a little fcale from the point of fight unto the point ofdiftance : provided that it be not 
 
 too far removed *. and it is in this, that the diferetion is requifite, that one do not fet it 
 coo near, and to avoid that which we are fpeaking of, nor too far off, for fear that we 
 finde no returns where one would have it fet ; for Qbjeds fo far removed from the 
 fight, do yield no return. This is why we ought to give but the draught to Buildings far 
 defiant, as we (hall fay hereafter. 
 
1 
 
P RESPECTIVE 
 
 The fir ft Advice About the Foint jdfi the fide. 
 
 rjF^ Hey never change the Rules of thePoint of the Front for the points of the fides- . 
 
 I for chey have all for a- principle one & the fame caufe, which produceth always 
 the like effe&s ; Wherefore I fhali not fpeak thereof in particular feeing that 
 the Ord.r of the point of the fide, is the fame with the Point of the Front as one may 
 fee in the firft figure where the Safe A B, hath as many, and the fame divifions, as the 
 foregoing. Let die Point of fight be in C, and the point of diftance in D, from which 
 if you draw the line A D, you fhali have the fe&ions which give the abridgement of 
 the fquares in the fame Number with the odier. The reft fhalbe known in the Orders 
 following. 
 
 111111 ; 
 
 jj& iH Wi 11 §1 si 
 
 . *&» »%* 
 
 The Second Advice of the Hollowing or deefe finktngs. 
 
 O Ne may fink or hollow the Perfpedives, afmuch as one would, by the Means 
 of the Bafe E F, if one draw lines to the points of diftances H I - 5 for which 
 they lhall divide the Vifuals E G and F G at the point K, it fhali be theA- 
 bridgementof the firft fquare, as we have already faid twice or thrice. Now if we 
 take this line K K for the bafe, and from the ends K K, we draw lines to the points of the 
 diftances where they fhali divide the fame line E G and F G at thepoint L L,that fhali 
 be the Abridgment of the fecond fquare, which fhali have as many divifions and fquares 
 as the former- if we fhali take further this line L L,and fhali make the fame Operations, 
 we fhali have the Abridgment of the third fquare at the pointM. And if we fhali begin a- 
 gain further by that, we fhali have a fourth, and fo wefiiall go unto a Point : the which 
 would be a length which would appear infinite-. And by this means it is eafie to fink 
 and to abrid^e°the Perfpetftives : for if you would have the double of its bredth, do as 
 we tell you -,°if you would have but the half, draw a line where the lines of the points 
 of the diftances crofs themfelves, as in N, and you fhali h^ve that which you de- 
 fire. 
 
 Seeing that this is fo infallible, that as many vifual Kayes as divide the Diagonal line 
 drawn from the points at the diftances to the bafe, fo many fquares one hath of fink- 
 inas ; we may, as I faid, give as many hotlowings as we would to the Perfpedive • for 
 if°in 'ftead of taking from the poiut of diftance O, at the Ray F, you draw it from 
 the Ray Q^_ There will want two fquares, but that you have abridged the whole fquare 
 R, as wefee in S, which is that which you have fail d to take of the whole fquare. 
 And if befides the fquare, you would have yet two little fquares, make a line from 
 the fame point O, which divideth two Rays as V, you lhall have that which you delire. 
 If you would have four, takeX : if fix N. If the fquare whole Z, the which is a great 
 eafinefs, when one underftands it well. 
 
P 11 A C t I © A L, xf 
 
*7 
 
 P 
 
 ERSPECTIVE 
 
 
 <v* rta rN «>N. rta ./■*» --t-» .t-» et» 
 
 
 
 7/;^ third Ad vice of the Measures upon the Bafe 
 
 T H E Raft only may ferve for t© give fuch a finking as one would hare and in 
 what place they would, without ufing any little fquares, this is a means very 
 ready* but it is fomewhat hard to underftand •, Neverthelefs I will endeavour 
 to make it be underftood, the beft that I (hall be able, for we do often ufe it. For ex- 
 ample, let the Bafe be B S, the point of fight A, the points of diftances D E : If you 
 would make the Plane of a Cube B C, you muft draw to the points of fight two Occult 
 lines, or pointed from the ends B C,then for to give it its bredth take the famemeafure 
 B C, which you fhall tranfport upon the Bafe C F,equal to B C, from which point you 
 ihaii draw a line to the point of diftance D,and where this line fhall divide the firft Ray 
 C at the point G, this fhallbe the Abridgement of the plane of the Cube B H G C. 
 
 If you would have an Objed more forward towards the midft, you muft take the 
 bredth of it and the diftance above the Bafe, as I K. Now for to have the finking, ftt 
 fuch as you would have upon the fame Bafe, as it might be L M, becaufe that it is broad 
 at that point L, and afmuch for the largenes at the point M. Then from thefe Points 
 L M, draw an occult line to the point of diftance D, and where thefe lines fhall divide 
 the Raye K, at the points N O, you muft draw Parallels to the Bafe and you fhall have 
 the fquare QJ> O N. 
 
 By this manner, you may tranfport on the other fide the fquare, which would be 
 above the Bafe, as B H G C, is tranfported to V, and the Points M and T, which are^ 
 removed but 2 feet from the point S, do give a figure very narrow, becaufe that they 
 are very near, and the fame diftance, which they are removed, as we fee X. 
 
 The fourth Advice. of the Bafe and of one only point of diftance* 
 
 S Eeing that one may have the bredths and the depths, by the means of this Bafe, one 
 fhall neede no more to take the Paines to make the little fquares, the which I 
 would make appear to the fight in this example. Let us fuppofe, that you 
 would make a Ranke of Pillars, or Trees on each fide : You muft fet upon the Bafe 
 the place and diftance that you would have, with their bredth or Diameter, as A B <5> 
 D E F G. Then placing the Rule upon the point of the diftance O, unto each of 
 thefe Points ABCDEF G, where it fhall marke the ftdions upon the vifuall Raye 
 AH, it fhallbe the Termes of the Objeds which you defire. For to tranfport them on 
 the other fide, upon the Raye G H, Set one leg of the Compafs at the Ocular Point H, 
 and with the other take the fame without ftirring the leg from the Point H, make an 
 Arch with the other, where it fhall divide the Raye G H,this fhall be the fame Terme - y 
 2 $ M is the fame with N. And fo of others, by the which you fhall draw Parallells, 
 which will give you the bredths. And for the length, give it fuch, as you would have 
 it, and fet it from A, as it might be P, then draw from the point P, tq the point H, and 
 where it fhall divide the other Parallells, it fhall be the Planes that you defire, which 
 you may make rounds or fquares. 
 
 The fifth Advice ^not to deceive ones felf in the Meafures • 
 
 O 11 muft never fet on the fide of the point of diftance where one would draw 
 for to give the finking, the Objeds which one defireth to produce within the 
 ^ Plane. Example, The vifuall Ray, upon the which one muft mark, let it be 
 If you would produce there the point C, and D, it cannot be drawn from the 
 point of diftance E, but well from that which is oppofite to it F. If C and D, were 
 within, as G H, k ought to be drawn from the point E : becaufe that the line of the 
 kdion meeteth between both, and not from the point E ; and fo both the one, and the 
 ofh er tin J divide them ft lyes in the fame point I K* 
 
8 * AC T I e 4 l* 
 
 E i 
 
*8 > 'I R S P E C T I V E 
 
 The fixth Advice , 0/ ^ Point of dijlance inly. 
 
 S ometimes otie is at fuch a ftreight for the fmalnefs of the placethat one hath* 
 be it againft a wall, or cloth, or paper ^ that it is impofiible to make more then 
 one point of diftance, and then thofe that are always accuftomed to have two of 
 them are much troubled : We muft draw them, andcaufe them to underftand, that 
 one Point only fufficeth for this Pradice. Let us fuppofe that we would make a Pave- 
 ment of fmall fquares, and that we have already drawn all the vifual Rays ar the point 
 A, for to have the Abridgement thereof, we ought to draw at the points of diftance^ 
 and the fedions will give us the points where we ought to draw* as we have already 
 faid : but if there be but one as B, we muft draw this one draught Diagonal G B, 
 which will divide all the vifual Rays. Now for to mark the fame fedions upon the 
 Rays oppofite, for to draw Parallels there : We muft, as I faid but now, feta leg of 
 the Compafs at the po$t A, and with the other to run through; all the fedions, as I P : 
 But this is not good, but only for that which is viewed in front : Whence there is need 
 of one, which ferveth likewise for that of the fide : behold it here, Take a Compafs^ 
 and fet one leg upon the bafe, with the other • take the moft perpendicularly that you 
 fhali be able, the fedion that you defire to tranfport as D, and carry it upon this line 
 Perpendicular, as E O, and mark your meafure F, then draw from D to F, and you 
 fhali have the fame as if there were two points of diftances And fo 0 / $11 other 
 fedions. 
 
 'The feventh Advice , that we fhould not ufe the Diagonal. 
 
 W H E N one would ufe the outmoft Ray for the line or fedion, as it might 
 be G H - He ought to fet the Objeds upon the bafe, as are K LM N 
 and from thence to draw them to the point of diftance I , which ought to 
 be drawn back as far as fhali be poflible, to the end that the Abridgement of the Perv 
 fpedive, may be the more pleafing thereby : for if the point were nearer to the point 
 of fight G, the Objeds would have too much hollownefs/I mean, for example, that a 
 fquare would appear a Parallelogram) And from this point I, toi run through all the 
 Objeds XL MN O, and to mark the fedion of the Ray G H : And from thefe points 
 to draw Parallels to the bafe, or of the Horizon, as is here PQ^ This Method is 
 the leaft in ufe, although fome do take it,. 
 
 The Eighth Advice, for tv abridge in divers manners % 
 
 I F fometimes one be taken in a ftrait, aud that one cannot remove the point of 
 diftance, : we muft elevate from the foot of the Ray SR- a fmall Perpendicular, as 
 T S, which fhali receive the fedions, and give a lefler Abridgement- and if one 
 would have it yet more little, he fhali but only bend aline, as is X, the which by rea- 
 fpn of its inclination, caufeth that the fedions are clofer together. Then for to draw 
 the Parallels, he hath only to tranfport this line X or T,upon the foot of the other Ray 
 as i s V, and from all thefe points to draw lines Parallels to the bafe, _ and you fhali 
 have that which you defir e, . 
 
PRACTICAL. x8 
 
-\ 
 
 ') 
 
 /,rs 
 
THE 
 
 ORDERS 
 
 P L AN E S 
 
 I H 
 
 Pejrfpeftive. 
 
PERSPECTIVE. 
 
 
 ,<#», Ml Mk M% -4*, <4». /fo. t\ j#%. 
 
 
 fl* 
 
 of PhnC'S 'ihnyl directly or in front. 
 
 N E may have feen at the third and founh Advice, and the Elevations fol- 
 lowing will caufetoknow, that it is not my purpofe that one fhouid ufe 
 Planes Geometrical, for to make Perfpedives ; for this would be to double 
 the labour •, and no Painter would take this pains, feeing that I teach him to make the 
 fame thing by means of the bafe. But as there is no Rule fo general, which hath not its 
 exception; fo there are certain Figures, which one cannot fet into Perfpe&ive, but by 
 the help of thefe Planes : further alfo one fhouid be troubled, if one fhouid give one 
 of Tefe Planes to be fet into Perfpe&ive, and that one had not learned how he ought to 
 pr* ce:d.Thefe Reafons have obliged me to fet thefe which follow,the which will fuffice 
 to learn to fet int& Perfpedive all thofe, which may be prefented and alfo be ima- 
 gin d. 
 
 i . To contrad or abridge a fquare ABCD. One muft draw A B at the point of 
 fight E, and from the fame Angles A B, two Diagonals, F B, AG, and where they 
 fhall divide die Rays A E and B E, at the points H and I. This fhall be the fquare A 
 BCD, abridged into A H I B-,for to: make it without the Geometrical Plane, we muft 
 draw from B to F, or from A to G, or elfe tranfport A B upon the bafe, as B K, and 
 from the point K to draw to the point F, it will give the fame fe&ion I upon the Ray 
 B F. I ' | ' 
 
 2 * To abridge a fquare viewed by the Angle D, having made the Plane ABCD. 
 We muft draw a line which toucheth the Angle B, and it muft be in right Angle upon 
 the line B D. This bafe being produced, we muft fet the Rule upon the fides of the 
 fcuare, as A D, and D C, and where this Rule fhall divide the bafe, there to make the 
 points H I, then to draw H and B, to the points of diftances P and B I, to the other 
 point of diftance G. And at the fe&ion of thefe lines to make the points which fhall 
 give you the fquare K L M B h for to make it without the Plane, you muft fet the Di- 
 ameter on the one part, and the other of the middle B, as H and If But as well in the 
 one manner as the other, you muft not draw at the point of fight O. 
 
 3. To abridge a Circle. It muft be enclofed in a fquare ABCD: And from the 
 Angles A D and G B, to draw Diagonals, which fhall divide the Circle into eight 
 parts and where they fhall divide it at the point O, to draw upon the bafe the Per- 
 pendiculars E F, then to draw two lines Diametral QR S P, which divide themfelves 
 in right Angles at the Center G. The Plane being ordered in this manner, you muft 
 draw all the Perpendiculars at the point of fight H, and where they are divided, the 
 DiagonalsA K,and B I, to make points-, of the which the two latterM N,are the draughts 
 of the fquare, which are to be divided into four by the fe&ion of the Diagonals, at the 
 point P. Then from the ends of this Crofs they draw bended lines by thefe points,which 
 give the fhape of a Circle in Perfpe&ive. This manner may pafs for little ones : but we 
 fhall give one more exad for the greater. 
 
 4. This Figure is compofed of the two firft, wherefore I will fay nothing of it ; for 
 he that fhall have made one or two of them, fhall jse able to make it eafily. 
 
 5 . The fifth depends alfo upon the two firft : but there is alfo more a Border round 
 about, which they have not ; for to fet this Border into Perfpedive, we muft draw thefe 
 four Rays ABCD,at the point of fight G, and where the inward Rays B and C are 
 divided by the Diagonals A F and D E, we muft draw Parallels to the bafe, and you 
 fhall have that which you demand. 
 
 6. It is the fame with the fecond, except that it is compared about with two Borders: 
 wherefore I will fpeak no more of it. 
 
PR A C T I C A l. 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Planes viewed Obliquely or on the fide. 
 
 H E SB Planes being thofe, that we will 
 
 foone diipatch ought to be made all in the 
 fame manner: which maketh me believe, that it 
 would be lofs of time to repeat, hoW one ought to a* 
 bridge them in Perfpedtive • for it feemeth to me, 
 that the Figures do fuffice to makeit appear, that 
 there is no other difference from them that went be* 
 fore, but the Situation of the Object, which is here 
 feen on the fide, and the other is view'd in front. 
 
 All the A A A are Points of fights^and theB B B 
 points of difiances. 
 
2.0 
 
 PRACTICAL. 
 
ii PERSPECTIVE. 
 
 jtU 
 
 .V/ V.^ v,i- - 
 
 fca8KS42St»S 
 
 */ 
 
 4 Triangle. 
 
 A ' tl'T H E Triangles, according to the Numbers, ought to prccedethe 
 
 I fquares : but according to reafon, th- y ought to go after in this 
 work, becaufe they are harder to fet into Perfpe<ftive,not becaufe 
 of the Plane, which is ea fie enough, feeing that it is competed and framed 
 of 3 equal lines joyn d together v but becaufe of the obliquity of itf 
 fides. 
 
 Let us now fee the Practice of the Advice that we have given of Mea- 
 fures upon the bafe AB, for to make this Triangle in Perfpedtive, we 
 mu ft from all thefe Angles 1,2, and 5, draw Perpendiculars upon AB, and 
 fe t one leg of the Compafs in their fedtion, and with the other take the 
 Removal of the Obj-dt from the bafe, and fet alfo this Removal upon 
 the fame bafe, by making a quarter of a Round, as i,i,and 1, the fame 
 at 2, 2, and 2, and the fame at 3,3, and 3. Then having made another bafe 
 in another place, as is this here under E F, we muft ttanfport there the 
 Meafures, which are upon that A B, and draw at the point of fight C, the 
 points 1, t , and 3, Perpendiculars. Then having taken a point of diftance 
 D, there to draw the other points of finking i,2,and 3 : and at thefe&ion of 
 the vifualRay s: by this we muft produce the lines, which fhall give you the 
 Triangle. 
 
 If you would give to it this Border, you need but do the fame again,re- 
 peatingthat which we are doing, fetting down other cyphers, that no- 
 thing be confounded, as over againft 1,4, and 2 a 5. and to 3 a 6 . Then 
 draw the Perpendiculars at the point C, and where the others fhall divide 
 them, there to draw the lines as you fee. 
 
 The Triangle equilateral, as this is circular 5 that is to fay, which 
 they enclofe within a circle, whereof each fide hath 120 degrees. 
 
 There is no need to know the degrees of the Angles, for to frame all 
 thefe Polygones, fo as we may fee at the4.fide : but I have not omitted 
 to fet them for the contentment of thole which here take notice of 
 them. 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 of the Fentagone or five- Angles. 
 
 HE Order of framing a Pentagoneis, chat we mail make a 
 § Circle, and divide ic into 5 equalParts,of 72 degrees on each fide. 
 
 Now for tofedtin Perfpe&ive, ids altogether the fame thing 
 with the Triangles, as one may fee by this figure, except that it is 
 with a Border > and I have marked it upon the bafe : but fingle, by 
 reafon that one may have learned by the Triangle, how it ought to be 
 made. The point of fight, as well on the front as the fide, is A, the 
 point of diftance B ; the vifual Rayes which are the Perpendiculars of 
 the Angles of the Plane upon the bafe, are drawn at the point of fight 
 A- And the others which give the Abridgement, and the place of the 
 Angles at the point of diftance B. As as divideth the Ray marked 3, 
 which giveth the fecond Angie, 4 giveth the fourth Angle, and fo of 
 others. All the reft is dear enough, we muft take heed of one thing, 1 
 which is, that all the Angles ought to draw to the center 6 . It is there- 
 fore, that it muft be fet in the Planes in Perfpe&ive, as in the Geome- 
 trical Plane, for to draw there all the Angles^ 
 
 /, 
 
PRACTICAL? 
 
 %Z 
 
 * 
 
 \ 
 
 t 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 > 
 i 
 
 
 \ ' 
 
 ' ' i 
 
 A - 
 
 \ 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 3 , 
 
 i 
 
 * 
 
 ■iJr i 
 
 s 
 
 4 , 
 
*3 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 rU r>t-» ,t$V v *&. 
 
 
 iSs & : -Sfe & 4> <fe A -rfe & A i*s A .sfc & 
 
 liiiiiiiii * 
 
 £>/ rtf H cx aronc, or fix Angles. 
 
 T i HE Hexagone is a Plan? which hath fix Angles, and fix faces- 
 or Tides. It is the eafieft of all the Poligones”, that is to fay, of 
 all the figures of many fides : for the fame openin'* of the 
 Compafs wherewith thefe ufe to make the circle, which is its 
 half Diameter 5 giveth the fides of the Hexagone of to degrees for each 
 fide. As for the fetting of it into Perfpe&ive, there is nodifference in 
 it from the Triangle and the Pentagone, as well for the fin°le Plane as 
 with the Border or T.hicknefs, Ais the point of fight, B that of the di- 
 ftance. 
 
 Seeing that we have more fpace in this leaf then in others-, we will cjve 
 a fmall Practifeof fetting into Perfpective the Borders or ThickndfJs.of 
 any Poligones that may be, whether regular or irregular : Let us ufe 
 this Hexagone- for to give an example of our Propofition, fuppofin» 
 that the Plane of the front of the third Figure hath but a fingle drau<*h t ^ 
 and that it fhould have a Thicknefs or Border, which turneth round about 
 it - for to fet it into Perfpective, you muft lay the Rule the length of the 
 fides of the fingle draught, and make a point upon the Horizon, where 
 it fhallbe divided, as laying the Rule along the fide A B, it will divide 
 the Horizon atthe point C 5 then laying itagainupon the Plane B D, it 
 will give the point E, and likewife of all the other fides. Before that 
 you do any more, you mull from all thefe Angles draw lings, which pafs 
 "by the center F, and thefe lines which ought to be occult, (hall ferve for 
 to receive the feccions which give the ditmnution. All thefe Orderings be- 
 ing done, you mull fet the bredth or largenefs if you would give To the 
 “ Border or Lift upon the bafe as A H 5 and draw this firft bredth at the 
 point of diftanceGi and where this line G H, {ball divide I, it fhallbe the 
 '**’ Terme or bound of the thicknefr of the firft fide : and which fhali give it 
 t© all the others. For from this point, you muft draw to the point of the 
 fide C, andac the fedion of the line K, it fhallbe the diminution, from 
 the which drawing to the point of the fide B D, which is E, you fhali 
 have the other diminution at the point L, which fhali ferve for the laft 
 fide L M Then tranfporting all thefe Meafures on the other fide, you 
 ihall have the figure Compleat. 
 
 We will drew hereafter another Manner. 
 
» r a c 1 1 c a :h 
 
 n 
 
 & 
 
4 ? 
 
 $ 
 
 PERSP E C T I V E 
 
 ©/ Heptgone or f tven-Angks. 
 
 T He lUpAgom taketh its Ihape within a Circle, as the otherPo'li- 
 gon- s.Theydivideit into 7 parts: that is to fay,that one give 5ide- 
 gvees, 15 Minutes and a little more, for every fide,theOrder of fet- 
 tingit into Perfpe&ive, is alike to the fore-going;As concerning 
 the Perpendiculars* which fall from the Angles upon the Bafe, the which 
 are drawn all at the point of fight A : But as Concerning the Abridge- 
 ment, and the lines that give the Place of the Angles, it is of another 
 manner and according to the 7th. advice that we have given: although 
 we do not approve it the pradlife of the 8 th. advice being the better: but 
 for to Condefcend to thole that do ule it, and to caule them to fee, that it 
 doth not abridge enough. 
 
 Having drawn Perpendiculars from the Angles of the Plane upon the 
 Bafe as in the former ; We muft on fome fide, on the right, or the left,' 
 make a Perpendicular, as A B, which {hall receive the fe&ions of the Pa- 
 rallells, which one {hall draw by all the Angles; as here the firft Angle 
 let upon the Bafe, of 2 and 7, I draw a Parallell, which marketh thena 
 both, and is divided at the Point C. The 3 and the tf, will give the fe&ioit 
 at the point D. And the 4 and 5 will give the- laft at the point E: This 
 Fine A B, being fo divided, we muft tranfport it upon the Bafe, of the 
 Plane, which one would abridge beginning to fet the point B,at the point 
 F. as he « : and then to mark the other divifions C DE, from the which 
 one lhall draw to the point of diftance O, and from the fections of the out- 
 mo ft Ray to drawParallells to theBafe:and where they {hall divide theRays 
 which beare the Numbers of the Angles, there we muft make Points, the 
 which being conjoyn’d by right lines, will give the figure, which we 
 defire. For the thicknefs or Border, it fhallbe made by one of the two 
 orders afore-going. 
 
2J 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 of the oBogcne^ or Eight* Angles. 
 
 He Oliogone is made of aCirde divided into eightParts,of 45 degrees 
 
 for each fide 5 from the which divifions drawing lines, we have 
 the fhape of the Odtogone that is to to fay a figure that hath eight Angles, 
 and as many fides. The fore going Orders do caufe fufficiently to know, 
 how one ought to fet it into Perfpe&ive, either on the front, or on the fide, 1 
 I will only Advertize that the Plane abridged ©n the front, is made accord^ 
 lag to the eighth advice j And that of the fide, according to the feventh.' 
 The point of the fight is A, and that of the difiance B# , Th e reft is fifj 
 feciently feen without an Expoficion, 1 
 
f> St A € T I C A L 
 
 *2 
 
 u: 
 
 h-x 
 
 jr* W | 
 
 ~zV“ 
 
 $ ii$ 
 
Of the oft agent after another Order* 
 
 T He manner oE making this otfogone, hath bin Invented by Rerih z 
 Ic is made in this fafhion. Having framed a Square by the 
 Ordinary way, as is A B C D* we muft divide the bafe 
 C D in ten parts* and leave 3 thereof on each fide 5 and from the 
 thirddivifion of one part and the other E F* to draw lines to the points of 
 fightG, and at the fections of thefelines by the Diagonalls O, we muft 
 draw Parallelis to the bafe* which touch the fides of the Square 
 at the points H I K L, then joynjng together by the lines of the points 
 EH, I E,F K, L F^you Hull have an Odogonejasmay be feen by thefirft 
 figure. 
 
 
 of the Hexagons or fix- Angles 
 
 The fame Serlio hath made alfo the Hexagone after the fame falhionf 
 Let a Square be drawn as this before ABC D, and that the 
 AD, be divided into four Parts, fromoneof the which on eachfide 
 E F, let lines be drawn to the Point of fight H i Then from the fedion of 
 the Diagonalls, which is the midft of the Square G* to draw a Paral- 
 lel! to ths bafe which touchefh the fides of the fquare at the points 
 IK,, Then draw lines by the points E I E, and FKF* there will be 
 framed an Hexagone. The fecondfigure. 
 
 I will fay nothing of this Qctogone view'd On the fide* feeing that ( as 
 we have air ady laid fo many times)it is the fame Order* with tnat of the 
 light of the front. Thethird figure. 
 
P R A C | 1C A L: 
 
 25 ' 
 
 Cr 
 
 '<• *** 
 
 i'4 S# 
 L** 5v’< 
 
 
 H 
 
 IT 
 
s 7 
 
 P E R S PECTIV'B 
 
 <r*/» 
 
 Of the O&ogoite duthle. 
 
 S Uppofing that we have already made an ©&ogone fingle .* for 
 ina ke it double, or to give ic a thicknefs or Border, you muft proce 
 in this manner. Set fuch a bredch or thicknefs, as you would gi 
 to it,within the fqu are which containeth theO&ogone fingle, as hi 
 A B, on one fide and the other, and draw from thefe points to the poi 
 of fight C. And where thefe lines Ihall Crafs the diagonalls at the poi 
 O, draw the Paiallells D ; The which will make a welt oc guard ab< 
 the fquare 5 Then draw from Angles unto Angles occult lines, or paii 
 palling by the Center N ; And where thefe fhall Crofs or divide the lii 
 of this inward fquare at the points E F G H I K L M, itfhallbe the Bout 
 of the Odtogone of the Infide, 
 
 Of the Hextigont double. 
 
 O Ne may do the fame with the Uexugtnt figured within a Squas 
 The which maketh me beleeve, that there is no need to ufea 
 repetition feing that one may fee by the figure that whereof 
 might any ways doubt. 
 
 The G&ogone view’d on the fide, is all of the fame frame with tl 
 of the from. The point of fight is A, and that of the diftancS B. 
 
i8 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 «** <A» V ntv .efr, A A A A Av *t» A A* 
 
 $$ SfeiSfr vM ii$ 51? M ■!£ M. f!$k ^ M:%& iSM ^ 
 
 
 ©/ the: Circle , 
 
 T He more that any Circular forme (hall have parts, the foone rand 
 more eafily fhall it be converted into a Round : hence it is, that 
 Sertio faith, that we muft frame a Demi-Circle, and of this cir- 
 cumference, one may make as many equal Parts as they would: 
 for the more that it fhall have of them, the more this Rotundity will be 
 perfedl : for example, the Demi-circle, a Plomb or Down-right is divided 
 into eight Parts, which will givefixteen for the whole Round : and from 
 thefe divifions Z, to elevate Lines Perpendicular, upon the bafe, at the 
 point E. Then we muft draw two Diagonals at the points of Diftances, 
 which are here farther removed then the Plate is broad 5 but which ©ne 
 ought to fuppofe within the horizon ordinarily 5 which will give a fquare 
 A H I B ; now the fquare being framed, we muft draw all the points E, at 
 the point of fight F, unto the line H I, and at the fedtions of thefe lines to 
 draw Parallels throughout. Then.we muft begin at the midft of one of the 
 fides of the fquare, to make a point, as a, 8c another point at theAngle oppo- 
 fite, as if one would draw a Diagonal, as ^continuing fo to do from points 
 of Angles to Angles, following the Diagonal lines, as abed Efg h i Kim 
 ziofq. Thefe points will frame a perfedt Rotundity .-then you muft bring 
 with the hand bended lines, or circular, andyou fhall have^your round in 
 Perfpedtive. The Perfpedlive muft have this Rule and Odder to abridge 
 the Rounds, very familiar and ufual, for it is oftentimes ufed, as well 
 •for Columns, bending Roofs, Arches, openingof G0k and Windo wSj 
 as for many other Rotundities, e -» » '• 
 
 y * 
 
P R ACT I 5 A S §1 
 
u 19 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Of the Circle double. 
 
 W E muft fuppofe that the firft Circle A B, is that which 
 we are now to make, and that we would give it a thicknefs 
 or border, by making another more inward, in this manner: 
 We fhall give it fnch a bredth as (hall pleafe us, as A C, and from 
 the center of the great Demy-circle G we will draw the little one 
 C D, which we will divide as the other great one, by drawing oc- 
 cult lines from the divifions of the Great unto the center G. And 
 at the fe&ion of thefe lines of points of the Great, upon the lefs de- 
 mi-circle at the Points 1 , we muft draw Perpendiculars /,as thofe that 
 we have made in the great, upon the bafe 5 And to the end, that they 
 may confound nothing, we muft mark them with points from the 
 points /, of the bafe, wt (hall draw to the point of fight F, of lines oj 
 points unto the line H K, and at their fections by the Diagonals, 
 draw lines of points M N, which fhall give round about the fqu are the 
 thicknefs G Q, which ought to have the whole circle.' This done, we 
 mail draw lines from all the Angles of the great circle, reaching tc 
 the center, and where thefe (hallcrofs the lines of points »b c dtf gi. 
 i klmottf q, which go to the Horizon, thefe fhall be the Points, foi 
 to frame with the crooked lines the Circumference or round of th< 
 Infide. 
 
 He that would have a Plane of j. 4. 5 or* Rounds, or Circles, ir 
 Perfpedtive : He muft fet them in a Geometrical Plane, as the fecond 
 is fet there, and make all the fame Operations, 
 
j! perspective 
 
 A Pavement of Squares view' dbj the Andes, 
 
 S Eing that we are at thefe Squares view’d by the Angies, we will 
 ihew how they, make a Pavement of a Hall, of a Church, or of 
 any other place. Having taken the Horizon parallel to the bafe 
 A B, the point of light C, and the points of diftances D and E, 
 we muft divide the bafe into as many parts, as we would make little 
 fquare . Then from the Ends of this line, to draw to the point of 
 light C, as A C, and B C. And from the fame points A B, to draw 
 two Diagonals to the points of diftances DE, which {hall give the 
 Square of theHall at the points of the feitionsF G, by the which you 
 {hall draw the line of the finking H I, which we have already fpoke 
 of many times.- Then you muft draw from all the points which you 
 havedivided, the bafe at the point of diftance D and E, and you (hall 
 have between the Rays A B, that which you defire ; as the Figure 
 ilieweth you it. But behold a difficulty, which is to fill up the place 
 that remaineth BB and G I, AA.anl HF, of the fame fquares : 
 for /fuppofethat the bafe cannot reach out it felf farther. When this 
 {hall happen, take upon the line of the finking FG, oneofthe mea- 
 fures of the fquares, as it might be K G,and tranfport it upon the fame 
 line HI, as many times as it can be there, and you Iball have the 
 points L M N O P Q^and R, by the which drawing to the points of 
 the diftances you (hall make the fame fquares, as are the lines mark- 
 ed with points. This manner of tranfporting themeafures upon the 
 line of finking, Ihall be pra&i 'ed in other Pavements, which Ihall fol- 
 low hereafter. 
 
 of Squares comfajjing a Border or Fillet . 
 
 T He Order of making the fecond Pavement, with a border about 
 it, is the fame with, the ftngle fquares view’d at front. Where- 
 fore we Ihall not lofe the time in teaching it, feeing that we have 
 made already fo many Figures of it. Only / Ihall advife,that 
 you muft divide the bafe into unequalParts,asA B and C,and to draw 
 all thefe divifions to the point of fight D, and where they ihall be di- 
 vided by the Diagonals A Eand G F, then to draw lines Parallels to 
 theb3fe. as you may fee in the figure. 
 
.llACTlC.il, 3* 
 
3 * 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Pavements view'd by the Angle , C ompaffed with a land or Fillet. 
 
 F OR to make this fort of Pavement we mull divide the bate 
 A B, by unequal Parts, whereof the Largelt C lhall be for the 
 Squares, and the little ones D for the Band or Fillet. And from 
 all thefe divifions to draw to the points of Diftances E F : As 
 we have done heretofore in the lmgle Squares. 
 
 Pavements of Squares view'd by the Front , Compared with Fanis or For- 
 ders , which have Squares feen from the Angle in the mid/l • 
 
 F O R to make this fifth fort of Pavements, we mull ufe the fame 
 Order of thefecond Mauner, by dividing the bafe by unequal 
 Parts : but to make here this Square feen from the Angle which 
 is in the midil, we mull only divide the greatell into two, as A B C D 
 EFG} And from all thefe points to draw to the points of diftances, f 
 which will give you the Squares feen from the Angle or Lozenge 
 which is in the midft, 
 
 
■> ■> 
 
 5 > 
 
 P E R S P E C T I V f 
 
 
 A Pavement of Squares feen from the Angle , with Chains of Squares on 
 
 the Front. 
 
 I Suppofe, that one hath made the Perfpedtive, or Diminution of 
 the Square for to draw the line of finking, that we may not ufe f© 
 many Repetitions in the Pavements following.' 
 
 For to ma ke this fifth fort of Pavement, we mull divide the bafe 
 into equal parts, and to take fome thereof, which we (hall draw right 
 to the point of fight as ABC; and from all the other parts, we ought 
 to draw to the points of diftances, without palling over them which are 
 right : But after that all thefe which we fee from the Angle lhall be 
 drawn, we mull draw Parallels to the others, where they lhall touch 
 them on the fide. As from the Angles D and E, to draw the line F, 
 and fo by all the others, as the Figure Iheweth it. We mull take heed 
 to obferve always the fame number of fquares between the Chains, As 
 here of 3 between A B. 
 
 A Pavement of Squares in Front ^with chains of Squares [ten from 
 
 the Angle. 
 
 T HIS fixth fort of Pavements is made almoll as the former: by 
 dividing the bafe by equal parts, and drawing lines to the point 
 of fight, for to frame the bands or chains G H I ; yet neverthe- 
 lefs there is more ro do ; for we mull take heed to give to the 
 Chains that go acrofs , the fame largenefs, as to the others which go. 
 to the point of fight O, which is a fquare throughout all : and that 
 there be the fame number of Squares between the void ones. The reft: 
 isfeen fufficiently. 
 
practical. 
 
 n 
 
 Ll V/ V/ Xi _JZ \/ w 
 
 I- i 
 
 IhXL 
 
 B 
 
 • A 
 
 C 
 
 
 ■ h' 
 
 - . ■ 
 
 o 
 
 
 1 
 
W E B EBB ^ f SJ K 
 
 4 Pavement of little Square; Qffogenes-, mingled with the Squares,- 
 
 W E fliould never have done, if one would fet here aU the fa* ’ 
 ibions of Pavements, which might be made by the means of 
 the little Squares ? for an ingenious perfon would invent a© 
 Infinite Company, according to his fancies The fcventh fafljion is 
 plain enough, neither have I done it, but only to open the Ingenuity, 
 and to give means to eampofe others thereby. There is nothing to 
 do but to divide the bate into a quantity of Parts, of the which we 
 (hall frame the ljttlefquares» 8 i we have faid heretofore. And ofthefe 
 fquares to take a number, as her; nine, whereof there are five all full, 
 and four at the half t The full do give the infide of the figure i ? 3 4 
 And the Diagonals of others §j 8 p, give the Panes or Sides ,The reft 
 Is fuificiently feen» 
 
 "4 Pavmem ef fingh Squares view'd in Fmt» 
 
 1 Have fet this manner of Pavement the 1‘aft % not becaufe it is th§ 
 hardeft, feeing that it is the beginning of all Perfpective, andih® 
 mofteafieof all the Planes * but to caufetobe known, that it is 
 the ufeful and neceflary t for all the other may be made, and arg 
 made ordinarily, when all is done,ff rving only for ornament. And this 
 ferveth for a foundation, upon the which we ralfe that wh|ch we defire 
 Ea make appear. As we jhall fee hereafter, 
 
If 
 
 p I A e t i e a l, 
 
II PBBS&B&TIVB 
 
 The Plane eft Garden abridged. 
 
 T HAT which we are fpeaking of is confirmed by this Plane % 
 for drawing all thefe divifious which are upon the bafe, to the 
 point of fight, the Diagonals will give the depth of the whole 
 Plane, and the Abridgment of the little Squares. Then taking 
 the fame quantity, as well for the Alleys, as for the figures which the 
 Geometrical Plane takethup, you (hall have in Perfpe&ive the fame 
 Garden, which is upon the Plane* As the figure fheweth it. 
 
 What plane foever you have to abridge* And to fet into Perfpe- 
 &ive:The eafieft way is to Enclofe it into a Square, and to divide this 
 i’quare into many little fquares. For fetting the fquare and the quan- 
 tity of little fquares into Perfpe&ive by the ordinary wayes * You 
 have but to take heed, that you take the fame Number of little fquares 
 in the Plane abridged, as in the Geometricall Plane * And you (hall 
 make in the one, the figure of the other. 
 
f» H A G 
 
 ^ 1 G A 
 
 35 
 
3 S PERSPECTIVE 
 
 The Plane of a Building Abridged. 
 
 S Erlio in his Treatii’e of PefpeCt.ve, doth highly efteem this In- 
 vention of fetting the Planes into Per fpeCtive, as a thing very 
 ufeful to chief Builders or Archite&s, by the which they may 
 caufe to be feen all at once a part of the buildings elevated, and the reft 
 in Plac-form, and as upon the bale: But feeing that it is the fame Or- 
 der with that of the Garden, which w r e are making now, we will lay 
 nothing further of it. The Figure will caufe to underftand the reft, 
 and by this little to gather how the greater and more hard ihould be, 
 inthefecondpart, you fhall have the method to make to be feen in 
 PerfpeCtive a perfect Houfe, where you fhall fee the Building finifti- 
 ed and accompliihed y and by the fame means all the divifions of each 
 Story from the Carpenters Work unto the Cellar, and the only fpace 
 which the Geometrical Plane would take up. 
 
PRACTICAL* 
 
 2 ' 
 
 y 
 
 K/j ■ 
 
fh$ flm §f a Church Abridged* 
 
 His plane of a Church is made, according to that we have 
 * faid at the feventh Advice * That is to fay, that all the lides 
 
 which are Perpendicular to the Bafe, ought to be drawn upon 
 the Bafe, as are here the places of the Walls, and of the Pilafters 5 and 
 from the Bafe to draw them to the point of fight* And all the other 
 fides, which are Parallel to the Bafe, oughtto be drawn onthefide : 
 And to mark upon* a line as O P, all the bredths, as we fee A h c d e fg 
 hi k L And then to tranfport all thefe Meafures upon the Bafe, from 
 the which drawing to the point of diftance, the fedhons of the outmoft 
 Raye will give the Tenues for to draw the Parallels, which will give 
 the Abridgement of everything, the which is fhe wed by the Letters 
 a 4, b c c, &c . 
 
 This manner of Abridging upon the outmoft Radius, is practifed by 
 many; But he that would believe me, will leave it, for to take the 
 Orders of the Eighth Advice, where we fet a Perpendicular line at 
 the end of the Bafe, for to receive the fections, and to take away the 
 default of this prefent Practice, which doth not abridge it fufficlently, 
 if it be not that the points of cliftances are very far removed, for then 
 the effect is wholly alike to the other Methods. 
 
PRACTICAL 
 
 K ii 
 
The T lane of an Houfe wth a (garden* 
 
 HE Order of fetting this Plane of a 
 
 Houfe in Perfpedtive, is altogether the fame 
 with that of the Garden, whereof we were fpeak- 
 ing ; the which ought to fuffice for the one and 
 for the other,- that we may not repeat fo often. 
 It is fet here for to (hew that one may abridge alt 
 forts of Planes, whether they be compofed of e** 
 qual parts, or unequal. 
 
PRACTICAL. 
 
 S 8 
 
59 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 The Plane of a Fortification Abridged. 
 
 |~p 0 R to fet all Fortifications, and whatfoever other Piece it be 
 JW into Perlpe&ive •, we mail ufe the Sixth and the Eighth Advice* ' 
 It is the Order that we fpake of for the Church, and for the 
 Houfe. Which is to draw from all the Angles linesPerpendicular upon 
 the bafe, and from the bafe Rays to the point of fight $ and from the 
 fame Angles to draw alfo Parallels to the bafe, which {hall mark the 
 divifions upon the line on the fide, as A B: The which line A Boughe 
 to be fet upon the bafe : And from thefe Meafures to draw to the point 
 of difiance forto give us the line of the fe&ion C D : But becaufe that 
 the Place fuffereth us not to fet it upon the bafe, I have tranfported it 
 under the Figure, as is A B. Then having fet the point of Diftance 
 in E, of the height E F : there you muft draw from all the divifions of 
 A B, to the end to divide the line of the fection C D into fo many 
 parts: The which line C D, with its divifions, ought to be tranf- 
 
 ported to the foot of the outmofi Ray, or on the one fide and other D D»* 
 And from all thefe Points which are upon the line D C, to draw Paral- 
 lels: or elfe only to mark a point upon the Ray, which goeth from the 
 Angle of the Plane, which is proper to it 5 And all thefe Points being 
 joyned together of the lines, will give you that which you defire.* The 
 Figure will ferve to make one underftand the Order better. 
 
4 o 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 J c Piane and Figure Irregular abbreviated. 
 
 TIT E which (hall do well, that which we are 
 *** ■'*' about to leave, fhall not be much trou- 
 bled with all the reft ; for this is that which is 
 the hardeft of Planes in Perfpetftiye. I beleeved 
 neverthelefs, that it was good to fet yet further 
 fomething irregular; which appeared difficult at 
 the firft fight ; that I might make it known, that 
 there is nothing which one may not abbreviate, 
 ©f whatfoever view or Afpetft it may be. 
 
I> ii A G T I c A- L. 40 
 
Another Time of * Church abbreviated^ 
 
 J T feemech that this Order of Perfpedtive, is altogether another 
 then that which we haveufed, becaufe that the ordering thereof is 
 " not the fame. The which I have done on parpofe to give to under, 
 ftani, that there are many falhions and orders which all come but to 
 the fame j for this is the fame, with that which we hare ufed for to 
 abridge the Fortifications, the irregular Pieces, and other planes, ac- 
 cording to the eighth Advice : with this only difference,Thatwe have 
 marked the Parallels to the bafe, upon the line on the fide $ And hefe 
 we have marked them upon a line in the raidft of the Plane ; And as 
 well in the one manner as the other, we have always the fame ef- 
 fect : for drawing from all the divifions of this line of the midft to the 
 Eye A, you fhall have the line of the fedtion B C, which fhall be made 
 upon the line, which we may call the bafe D E. 
 
 For to fet it into Perfpedtive, tranfport into what place you would 
 all the length of the bafe as here above D E,and the height of theEye 
 AF.Then having fet on the one fide and other, or in the midft of the line 
 of thefe&ionB C, draw Parallels to the bafe, by all thefe divifions, 
 unto the oiitmoft Ray D A, E A *, you muft fet the bredth of the Pi- 
 lafters D K, upon the bafe, and draw a line at the point of fight A, and 
 the fe&ion of the lines Parallels by thefe K A, ftiall be the bredth of 
 thePilafters. 
 
41 
 
 f i R 5 J SC T I V -B 
 
O R D E R S 
 
 OF THE 
 
 ELEVATIONS- 
 
4* P IRiPI CTIY1 
 
 Some Neeefftrj Advise, for tie Orders feffmbg, 
 
 I T feemeth to me that I have given fufficiently to underftand that 
 which belongeth to the Ichnography, and Planigraphy, or de- 
 fcription of Planes, which isneceffary for the foundation of Or« 
 —thographyj and Scenography. The Orthography is the face, or 
 fore-part &c, As one may fee in the Definitions. Scenography, is 
 the Elevation of all that which anyone hath a defigne to make &c. 
 See theDefinitions which are at the beginning of this Book. 
 
 For to make this more clear to thofe that are not acquainted with 
 thefe words* we (hall Name hereafter(as l faid already in the Defini* 
 tions)the Ichnography, the Plane, and the Orthography, and Steno- 
 graphy, by a Word common to the one and the other, the Elevation ; 
 So that, in ftead of faying the Orthography, we fliall fay the Elevation 
 of the fore-part * And for Scenography, the Elevation of the whole. 
 
 Before we pafs any further it mu ft be obferved, that the Elevations 
 do never give to the eye all the Angles of the Plane, and the Qaan. 
 tity of faces depend on the Afpedfc , which caufech the obje& to be 
 feen •• for if it be feen on the front as the figure A, it will fhewbut one 
 face, although that the Plane have four * If it be view’d from the 
 Angle, although on the firont it will fhew two, asB, and never more, 
 with what Afpedt foever one look on it. This ought to be underftood 
 of a fquare, feeing that figures with divers Panes, may give thereof 
 3 4 j and more. Now it is, that if the objefts decline a little from 
 the point of fight, they are feen from the Angle, whence they ought to 
 fhew two faces* And the further they are removed from the point of 
 fight, the more they are difcovered. As K E are more difcovered then 
 C L, although their thicknefs be equal. 
 
 Another thing alfo that is further to be marked is, That which is 
 Parallel to the Horizon, when the objedl is view’d in front, although 
 in Perfpective, as C D E F from the Gate in the firft figure, becometh 
 a vifual Ray * when the fame object is view’d being in a Return, or 
 obliquely. As in the fecond figure, that C D i F, which is in the 
 front above, is made a vifual Ray to that which is under : And on the 
 contrary, that which is a Ray to that above, is made a Parallel to the 
 bafe to that below, as D G F H L. The Perpendiculars are always Per* 
 pendjcularSv 
 
43 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 
 Ak Am Am, ,*♦» Am y*+ A\ A*. Am 
 
 A*. Am A* An Am Am Am, Am, 
 
 A> Am A ,»*m 
 
 mwMM 
 
 of the Line of Elevation f w to give the Height* to all kinde of Bodies And Fi m 
 gnres , and in fuch a Place as one would within a Plane* 
 
 W E mu ft endeavor to under ft and well, and remember this Rule % which is of* 
 fuch importance, that he that fhall know it perfe&ly, will not be troubled 
 in the Elevations, whatsoever they be of*. 
 
 As for to make the Planes, we have ufed the bafe for the Elevations % we ought alfo 
 to ufe a line which fhall dired us, and fhall bring the Meafures of the Heights that are 
 needful ^everything which one would elevate. 
 
 This line of Elevation muft be,Perpendicular upon the bafe A B, which is always the 
 neareft to our fight, and the firft of the Plane: By confequence, capable of giving 
 and bearing the Meafures of all that one would make in the Pidure, and therefore the 
 line of Elevation C Displaced upon the line A B Perpendicularly, as all thofe muft 
 be upon the Plane which we fhall ufe henceforward. We muft then remember, that 
 when we fhall fpeak of Perpendicules, or Perpendicks, in the reft of our Orders, we 
 muft always underftand of Plumb-lines upon the Plane or bafe. 
 
 Seeing that this line of Elevation muft receive and give the Heights to all the Ob« 
 jeds that one would elevate from a Plane : it muft have the fame Horizon witfe the 
 Plane. Therefore we muft from the foot of this line, which one may fet ©n the left 
 or right fide, draw within the Horizon, as one would have it, that is to fay, that it is 
 no great matter where the Point be fet within the Horizon : for in what place foever 
 it be, it will always give the fame effed, as it is from the foot of the line C t© the point 
 E^-one may fet it it the point of fight, if one will* I have fet this line on the one fide 
 and other th the firft Figure, and tneir point different within the Horizon, for to give 
 to underftand that it is well throughout* 
 
 If from the point H, which is in the Plane of the fecond Figure, you would elevate 
 a, line of two foot high •, you mult fet upon the line of Elevation two equal Parts, 
 which you fhall make to ferve each for a foot, beginning at the point C, as are C F, 
 which is two foot high, to draw to the point E, and you fhall have an Elevation of two 
 feet, between the two lines C and F, drawn to the point E. 
 
 For to give the height of two feet to a line elevated from the point H: you muft 
 from the point H.draw a Parallel occult to the bafe,uatil that it divide the line below C 
 E, which fhall be .the point I. If from the point I one elevate a Perpendicule I K, between 
 C F, it fhall be the height that it ought for the line of the point H, which you muft 
 take with a Compafs and carry it to the point H, which will give H L of two feet high* 
 If from the point M, you would have one of the fame height of two feet, you muft 
 make the fame Operation, and you fhall have between CF the Perpendicule NO, 
 which fhall be the height that it ought at the point M* And making the fame Operati- 
 on from the point P, you fhall have the Perpendicule Qjl/or the height of the line of 
 the point P. 
 
 For to give them the height of 3,4,5,10, 2oand 30 feet. It is always the fame 
 Order • there is nothing but to fet thefe diftances and heights abovefaid upon the line 
 of the Elevation*, And from the point of the height, that you would give to draw to 
 the point of the line within the Horizon, which is here the point E,and to make all the 
 fame Operations, which, we are about making*, and you fhall have that which youdefire, . 
 
43 
 
 PRACTICAL. 
 
 Mij. 
 
44 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 The Elevation of a Cube in Perfyeffive* 
 
 H Aving made the Plane by the Orders foregoing, and having fet 
 the line of Elevation upon any fide of the Plane,as is F L upon 
 the bafe* We muft fee upon this line F L, the height of a Cube, 
 which is a Figure fquare on all the fides, asaDy, which fhallbeFM, 
 from which points F M we muft draw to the point of the line of Ele- 
 vation E. Then from all the Angles of the Plane A B C D, to bring 
 Parallels to the bafe, until that they meet with the line F E, which is 
 the bottom of the line of Elevation, and from their fe&ions F and H, 
 toraifethe Perpendiculars F M and H K, between the linesMF, which 
 are drawn at the point E. Then to take its Meafures with a Compafs, 
 and to bring them Perpendicularly upon the Angles for example, to 
 take with a Compafs the height F M, and to bear it Perpendicularly 
 upon the lines elevated from the Angles A B, which will be A G, BG, 
 Then to take alfo the height HK, and to carry it upon the Angles of the 
 bottom C D, which fhall give CO D O y then to foyn the right lines 
 GOOG, This (hall be the Cube elevated. 
 
 If you would have the Elevation of any Figure whatfoever, draw 
 always from the Angles of its Plane, Parallels to the^bafe, unto the 
 draught of the foot of the line of Elevation, and keep the fame Method 
 that we fpake of for the Cube, and you fhall fee, that there is not any 
 thing, how difficult aftfl unequal foever it be, but that you may put into 
 Perfpe&ive •„ as we fhall make to be feen in the Poligones fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 The fecond Figure is another Cube elevated, after a manner, very 
 little different from the former,which 1 fhall fpeak of in three words .* 
 And he that will may ufe it , not to be reje&ed* 
 
 Having ipade the Plane by the ordinary way, we mart from all its 
 Angles B C D E, elevate Perpendiculars % And upon the firft, fet the 
 height which one would give to it, as B A C A* And from the points 
 A A, to draw to the points of fight F, or to the points of diftances G H, 
 and where the Perpendiculars of the Angles D E fhall be divided at the 
 point I L, this (hall be the line of finking,and the top of the Cube whol- 
 ly elevated. 
 
 This laft Order is not fo univerfal as the former,' which hath always 
 been in ufe, and pra&ifed by the Ancient Authors.- It hath neverthe- 
 lefs fome benefits, which we fhall know in fome of the Orders fol 
 
 lowing, 
 
 a riU v 
 
^4 
 
4* 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 xf\ jJk. _*tv ,«$* .«& «& 4* *#*, #J^ 4* 4* 4f» 4*. 4^ •<• w 4v A • A .4». As » Hb 
 
 the triangle in Perfpefiive. 
 
 I N the firft Order I have promifed ta make the eafinefs of elevating 
 all Figures appear, whereof the moft difficult are the Poligones or 
 Figures with many fides; andto keep fome Order, we will begin 
 by the Triangle. 
 
 Having framed a Plane by the Orders foregoing fol. tu where we 
 teach to make it with a Lift or Border : we mall, as we were fpeaking, 
 fet-thelineof Elevation on the fide of fuch an height as we would have, 
 as is A B of three feet : Then from all the Angles of the Plane, to draw 
 Parallels to the bafe, unto the bottom of the line of Elevation B E % And 
 from their feftions elevate Perpendicules between the lines A B, and to 
 bring all thefe heights upon the Angles from whence the Parallels pro- 
 ceed 5 for example, the height A Bmuft be carried to the Angles CD, 
 which will give C R and D S. The other height F I, at the Angles G O, 
 which will give G T and O V 5 That of H L to the Angle K, which will 
 give K X 5 and the laft height N F to the Angle Q., which will give QY. 
 Then to joyn with right lines all thefe Points R S Y» then T V Xj for 
 the thicknefsof the ftone in the firft figure. 
 
 The Pentagone , or five- Angles in Perfpeffive. 
 
 T H E Pentagone is a figure with five faces or fides l and with five 
 Angles. We have given the Method of framing it, and fetting its 
 Plane in Perfpe&ive in the T reatife of the Planes/*/, a 2. It would 
 be lofs of time to give the manner of elevating it, feeing that the fecond 
 figure caufeth it to be known, that it is the fame Order, with that of the 
 Cube and the Triangle. 
 
 The Hex agon tor fix- Angles in Ftrfoeftive. 
 
 T H E Hexagoae is a figure with fix Angles, andEx faces or fides, 
 as is to be feen in two Manners in theTreatife of Planes, 
 and 17. where it isabbreviated.The Order for to elevate them is 
 to be feen fufficiently in chethird figure. 
 
45 
 
 PR AC T I CAL/ 
 

 pbrshctiv Iv 
 
 
 
 
 Q f the Heptagone , or Seven * ngles, in TerfpeBhe. 
 
 r-W^U E Heptagone is a figure with (even Tides or 
 JL faces and feven Angles. Of the which we 
 
 have fet heretefore, fol. 2 ^., how it ought to be made, 
 and to fet its Plane into Per fpeaive. Its elevation is 
 the fame O r ^ ers » with that of the Triangle, as one 
 may fee in the firft figure 
 
 
 Of the OBogone, or Eight - Jingles, in PerfpeBive. 
 r J 1 H B Q<5togone is a figure with eight angles,and 
 eight faces, as the fecond figure fhewethit,in the 
 Treaty of planes,fol. 25. and 16$ One may fee how 
 it ought to be fet in Perfpedive in two different 
 Manners. T he elevation is as in the foregoing . 1 
 
 ■>*. 
 
48 
 
 perspective 
 
 of Pilafters in Perfpective* 
 
 T T THEN one would mike fome Pieces, as Columns, Pilafters or Walls, 
 
 \f which fhall have the fame height. There is no need of the line of Ele- 
 
 V V vation : It fufficeth to do as in the fecond Order, which is, that having 
 elevated Perpendiculars from the Angles of the Plane, as is A B C D, of the firft figure ; 
 we muft fet the height that we would upon the firft or fecond Perpendicule,' as is A F^ 
 orDE. Then to draw the Ray E to the point of fight F- All the Perpendicules that 
 one fhall elevate, muft be unto this line E F, and then that the Pilafters GH, {hall be 
 equal to the firft. 
 
 If one would not ufe little fquares in the Plane, we muft fet upon the bafe the Meafures 
 and draw the Rays to the point of fight F, and that which ought to abbreviate at the 
 point of diftance K ; for example, L M is one fide of the Pilafter : We muft draw thefe 
 two Points L M, to the points of fight F for the bredth of all the Pilafters which one 
 fhall fet there • for the depth of each Pilafter, which we would make fquare, we muft 
 take the diftance L M, and fet it before L, as is N ; then to draw the line N K, which is 
 the diftance, and it fhall give the depth of the Pilafter at the point O, from which points 
 L M O, we muft elevate Perpendicules , and do the reft as we have laid. If one would 
 have the bredth of two Pilafters, between the one and the other • he muft fet them upon 
 the bafe, and after fet the depth of the fecond Pilafter equal to the firft, as is P and 
 from thefe two points P.Qj:o the diftance K, which fhall give the points R S,upon theRay 
 L from S; we muft draw alittle Parallel, which fhall divide the Ray M F, as is ST; then 
 from thefe points R S T, to elevate Perpendicules , and to do as in the firft : The’ third 
 and more, if one would have them, ought to do the fame, keeping always the Meafures 
 upon the bafe, as in the firft Figure. 
 
 of Pi Lifters viewed by the Angie* 
 
 Ӵ TT Y E have faid heretofore, that the Plane of fquares is made, hydrawing 
 
 %/ \j Meafures from the bafe to theDiftances.As concerning the Elevations it 
 
 V v is the fame that we are fpeaking of. For having fet the height A B,up- 
 m the firft Perpendicule, we muft draw from the point B to the diftanees C D which 
 ftiall divide and give the heights to the two other Perpendicules elevated on the fides : 
 Then having given the Diftanees, which one would, between the two Pilafters, which 
 are h.re two little fquares, you muft elevate the fecond^and by the fame Order the third : 
 Thfir height fhall be found drawing a vifuai Ray from the point B to the point of fight E 
 at the fe&ion, which this Ray fhall make of the firft Perpendicules, at the point F F, and 
 from the points F F, to the diftanees, as in the firft Pilafter. 
 
 Thofe which are made without a Plane, muft take their Meafures upon the bafe ♦ as if 
 one would give them the like bredth to thofe above viewed on the front ; It mufl be fet 
 as G H, and to draw the Ray G, to the point of fight E,for to have all the Middles or the 
 Diameters : Then to fet alfo the fame bredth of G at the point I ; and from thefe three 
 points G H I, to bring lines to the diftanees C D, for to frame the firft Plane : from this 
 Plane he muft elevate Perpendicules : And upon the firft to fet the height as is G K - and 
 from the point K to draw to the diftanees, for to have the Abridgement of the Perpendi- 
 <ules of the fides, for the fecond Pilafter. The fame fhallbe done from the Points L. M- 
 And the third, from the points N (X The reft is eafy enough to doe, viewing the fecond 
 figure. 
 

49 
 
 P E,R SPEC T 1 V E 
 
 
 The Effects of the divsrfrt] of Efori; 
 
 T H E more that any one is Elevated above any Objed, the 
 more hedifcovereth that which is above. By confequenr, if one 
 be lower, he fhall difcover le!s 5 and if one be under it, he can 
 fee but that which is under, and nothing of that which is above. 
 
 The firft Propofitionis verified by the firft Figure : The fecond, by 
 the fecond : and the third, by the la ft. 
 
 The firft and fecond Cube, is made as we have taught ; the third 
 is made alfo by the fame Orders, although they feem more hard, by 
 reafon that we fee the Objeds by the upper part. But if you turn up 
 the Paper, or the Pidure, and draw ‘at the point of fight,and at the di- 
 ftancesBC, as in other Orders you (hall have the fame facility. I fet 
 nothing of the Objeds viewed on the fide .• feting that l have Paid fo 
 many times that it is the fame with thofe on the front : And for to give 
 farther knowledge how to fet them in order ; There is one in a fingle 
 raught,and the other lludowed alfo. 
 
 Before we leave this third Figure 5 we muft obferve, that the lownefs 
 of the Horizon, is the caufe that we fee the bottom of the Objeds, 
 which are elevated above, as D E F 5 and of the two others, which 
 are G H, placed above the Horizon, one cannot fee neither above nor 
 below. Above, becaufe the Horizon is lower 5 nor below, it being pla- 
 ced upon the Horizon* 
 
 There are many Painters, that do fail in this , making the 
 upper part of many things appear, although that the Horizon be much 
 lower. 
 
z fU 
 J cJ 
 
 Horizon 
 
P 
 
 PERSPECTIVE. 
 
 rt*» . 
 
 3g- 
 
 The Elevation. of objects viewed hj the Angle. 
 
 W E have fnewed by die two Figures of the 19F1. and 20th. foh how the 
 Planes are made, drawing to the points of diftances, and never to the point 
 of light, if it be not for to finde the Diameter, We muft keep the fame rule 
 for the Elevations, as it is ealie to fee by the firft Figures • which have all their lines a- 
 butting at the points of diftances B C, and not one at that of the fight A. 
 
 The fall Figure D is for to Ih ew, that whensoever there Ih all be an infinitenefs of 
 Parts, in one and the fame Objed viewed by the Angle, we muft draw them all to the 
 points of diftances B and C. If you would make one of the fame, fee here the Or- 
 der : Flaving made a Plane, and elevated occult Perpendiculars, as we have faid, yoc 
 muft fet the height that you would give unto it, at the firft Angle E F, and draw from 
 the point F to the points B C, for to have the height of the fecond and third Angle at 
 the point G : Then from this point G, to draw again to the points B C, and you fhall 
 have the fourth Angle of the Platform. The other little Bodies are elevated in the 
 fame manner, by fetting the height that one would give them, upon the firft Perpen- 
 dicular, as fror# F to H, and from FI drawing to the points, as we faid but now from 
 the point F, we fhall have the heights of all the Angles- And the points I K fhall give 
 the thickneftes of all the little Bodies, and the Platform of that of the midft «. by draw- 
 ing always to the Points B and C : The reft is feen fufficiently by the Figure, which om 
 may make toferve for a Gaftle, defended with four fquare Towers, or for a Palact 
 quartered with four Pavilions. 
 
 The two other Bodies which are on either fide of the great one, are feen from the 
 fide, whereof the Ofder is alike to that which is feen from the front : for example, i: 
 you elevate Perpendiculars from all the Angles of the Plane L, and that you giv< 
 your height to the firft, as M N, by drawing from the point N, to the points of Di« 
 ftances B C, they will give the Angles 2 and 3 at the point O. Then from the pdm 
 O, drawing ftill to the points B C, you fhall have the fourth, which is the Elevatior 
 of the whole. This being pra&ifed by the firft, and by the fecond Order youfhal 
 have the fame. 
 
 The fecond Figure below is of the fame Order* There sYno difference, but of tfij 
 Horizon, which is lower* 
 
 The third fheweth the under-part of the Obje<Ss, but the order is altogether th< 
 fame with that above, drawing all to the points of diftances which is the 
 
 Horizontal line. 
 
practical 
 
? . E R S P E C T 1 E 
 
 iil 
 
 For to raife Bodies , And remove them as far off as one would. 
 
 I F you would have the firft Body of two feet high, and one foot deep, and one 
 broad, at two feet diftance one from another, of two feet deep, of one foot broad, 
 and three feet of height, and three feet diftance* Another of one foot broad, five 
 feet deep, and four feet high* 
 
 Thus you mu (l proceed. 
 
 Havin' 5 made a Plane of little fquares, which we ftiall make to a foot fquare (one 
 may make them of what fize he will) by the points of fight A- and diftances B C. You 
 fhafl raife from the firft Angle a Perpendicular, according to the fecond Order, which 
 ftiall bear the Meafures that you would give to the Objeds as this DE, upon the 
 which you fhall tranfport four times the Meafure D F, feeing that the higheft ought 
 to have but four feet. From all the Angles of this firft little fquare F I G D, you 
 muft raife occult Perpendiculars. And having given the Meafure to the firft diftance 
 D and 2, becaufe you would have it two feet high •, you muft draw from the point 2 to 
 the point of fight A, and it fhall divide the Perpendicule of the Angle G at the point H* 
 you muft draw Parallels to the bafe, which fhall divide the Perpendicule of the Angle I, 
 at the point K,and another Parallel from the point 2, which fhall divide the Perpendicu- 
 lar of the Angle F, at the point L- And joyning thefe 4 points HKL 2, of right lines, 
 you fhall have your firft Body .Then becaufe you would give 2 feet of fpace, between the 
 firft and the fecond Body, you muft leave two little fquares of the Pavement be- 
 tween the one and the other body, and upon the firft Angles of the third to raife Per- 
 pendicules, and to do all the fame as at the firft body, with thefe differences^ that the 
 height of this fecond, ought to be taken at the third point of the line D E, feeing that 
 it muft have three feet of height, and muft containe two little fquares, feeing that it 
 muft be of two feet deep.Be:ween this fecond and the third Body, you muft leave 3 little 
 fquares, feeing that you require it at three feet diftance the one from the other, and 
 from the firffAngles of the fourth, to raife Perpendiculars as at the firft and thelaft 
 after 5 little fquares, which is the depth of your body , and the Term of $ feet, 
 which the third Body ought to have of depth. The fourth point of the line D E, (half 
 give to it, its height, which ought to be of 4 feet, by dividing the Perpendiculars, as you 
 have done in the firft. Thofe which are fhadowed on the other fide, are made by the 
 lame Order, and of the fame Proportion* But the Wall of the midft is of Equal! 
 height four feet only, an Opening of 3 feet in the midft. < 
 
 f n the fecond figure is a Wall of equall heights. There being diftances of 3 foot,, 
 left for doores or windows ; The firft part of the Wall is but 2 foot deep. The other 
 two 3, foot in depth a peice,on the other fide there is*a Continued Wall of 14 feet of 
 depth, and of height like nnto the others. 
 
 The Order is the fame with that of thole above. 
 
 That which we have called a Wall, may alfo few for an Hedge s or Rowes for 
 
 Garden 0 . 
 
 « 
 
practical; 
 
 5 * 
 
 Oij. 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 5 V 
 
 of Walls viewed dire&ly. 
 
 B Y that which we have faid, one may make all forts of walls viewed obliquely* And 
 although this very Order may ferve for the fame walls viewed dire&ly, it hath 
 feemed neceffary to me to fet alfo this figure, for two Reafons s The firft, for 
 that they donor always make Planes, and in this cafe one (hould be troubled for thick- 
 nefies. The fecond, for to give the thicknefles to the doors and windows which may be 
 to be fet in thofe walls. 
 
 For to make walls Parallel tothebafe, or to the Horizon upon the Plane, youfhall 
 give them fuch a length as you fhall pleafe, upon the Parallels to the Horizon * for the 
 bredth, you may take that of one little fquare, from the Angles of which you (hall raife 
 the Perpendicules A B, which you fhall make as high as youfhall pleafe, as C* Then from 
 the point C draw unto the point of fight D - this Ray C D fhall give the diminution and 
 the perfection to the wall. 
 
 When one hath not a Plane, we mull fet ai? the firft corner of the wall, upon a Pa- 
 rallel to the bafe, or to the Horizon, the thicknefs that we would give to the wall, as E F* 1 
 Then from the point F to draw to the point of fight D, and from the point E to the point 
 of diftance G, from the fedion of thefe two lines at the point H, you muft raifeaj Per- 
 pendicular ^ and from the point F, another upon this laft : you muft take the height of 
 the Wall F I. Then from the point I to draw to the poiut of fight D, for to have the di- 
 minution of the wall at the fedion of the Perpendicule H •, for the length, you fhall give 
 it fuch as you pleafe, upon the firft Parallel E F ; for the doors and windows in the 
 fame walls • you muft mark the bredth and height, as here KLMN *, and to fet the 
 thicknefs that you would give them upon a Parallel, above or below the doors or win- 
 dows, at the neareft corner to the point of diftance, as here N O, or L.O. Then draw 
 from the points L and N to the point of fight D *, and from the points O to the point of 
 diftance G * And from the fedion of the lines P, you muft draw the thickndTes* ~ 
 
 Another Wall viewed from the Angle . 
 
 H Aving the Plane, you are only to raife Perpendicules from the Angles, which 
 ©ne hath refoived upon, and to mark the height, which one would give them up- 
 on the Perpendicule of the Angle that is neareft to you, as is QjL And from 
 the point R to draw to the points of diftances S T. The fedions which thefe lines fhall 
 make of the perpendicules, elevated from the Angles of the Plane, fhall give the length and 
 the thicknefs of the wall : If you have not a Plane, you muft fett the Meafures which 
 
 one would give, afwell to the bredth, depth of the doors and of the windows upon the 
 bafe, as here V X is -the bredth, X Y the depth, Z I the bredth of one Window : 
 Then to draw from all thefe points to the points of diftances S T : Firft XT, which is 
 the Radius of the bafe : Then from V T afmall line occult, which fhall divide the Ray 
 X S at the point 5, which is the thicknefs of the wall. For the depth, the Ray Y S fhall 
 give it at the fedion that it fhall make of that X T, at the point 6. and Z I, the bredth 
 of the window at the points 7,$. from which points X 5, 6, 7, 8. you muft raife Perpen- 
 dicules, and fet above the firft X the height 2. And drawing from the point 2 to the 
 points S T, youfhall have the height of all, at the fedions of the Perpendicules, from 
 the height of the window marked by 3,4, draw to T, and where it fhall divide the Per- 
 pendic-uhs 7,8, you muft draw right lines : Andfrom the Corners 910 S, for the depth 
 10, at the point T, and from the fedion 1 1* to draw a line Perpendicular. All this 
 may ferve for a Pallifxdoe as for a walk 
 
P R A G T I CAL? 
 
 on/. 
 
 
51 
 
 PE RSPECTIVE. 
 
 For to flace a door in what fine e one won Id of a WdL 
 
 W E muft raife a Wall, as we have faid, of i, or 2, or of 3 , feet thicknefs, 
 upon the Points H I, and to bring it to the bottom of the fame height, then 
 if you know near upon the meafure of the door that you would make •, fet 
 the breadth upon {he bafe, as here A, and B, of the Plane below, which 
 containeth 3 feet : and upon the fide of A, and B, the breadth of a Band C D. And 
 draw thefe 4 Letters A B C D, to the point of fight K, and where they fhall divide 
 this Parallel to the Horizon M N, at the point O, you muft raife Perpendiculars of 
 fuch height as one would : fee here already the breadth of the Door : for the height, 
 you muft trarifport D F E, of the Plane below to the Corner of the Wall I, and draw 
 thefe Points F E, to the Point K, and where they fhall divide the Perpendicular M P, 
 at the Point Q^draw QJft, Parallel to M N, which fhall give the height of the Door, 
 and the Band above. Its thicknefs, or depth fhall be the fame, with that of the Wall, 
 which is G F, and if you draw from the point G, to the point of fight K , it will di- 
 vide the Perpendlcule M P, at the point S, draw S T, parallel to Qjl, you fhall have 
 the bottom of the Door V, which is its thicknefs, and of the whole circuit of the 
 Door. 
 
 For to make the Door to the Wall on the fide * 5 you muft remember the Order of’ 
 fol. 17. which is, that one fet all the meafures upon the bafe , and 
 drawing from thefe meafures to the point of diftarice, one hath all the abridgements 
 that he defireth. Example, you would have a Door 4 feet within the Chamber, you 
 fhall fet 4 equal diftances I C. Then draw to the point of diftance L, the meafures 
 of the Door C A, and B D. And where the Ray I M, fhall be divided by the 
 points elevated of the Perpendiculars X Y,which fhall give the breadth of the Door* 
 For its height, you muft draw to the point of fight K, the points E F, and the fe&ions 
 of the Perpendiculars X Y, fhall give you it! For the thicknefs above and below 
 you muft draw the thicknefs the Wall G H, and F I to the point of fight K . then 
 drawing a little parallel to the bafe or to the Horizon, from the corner of the Door 
 X, and as much from the corner above, you fhall have X 2, the thicknefs above and 
 below, which you muft joyn with a Perpendicular, as you fee in the figure* 
 
 If you would alfo have a Door on the other fide, you have only to draw lines pa- 
 rallels to the bafe from the point X , * to the Ray I N , and then to elevate 
 them as we have faid, the reft is the fame with the fide fhadowed. The Door of the 
 bottom is not in the midft, that is to fay, a foot and half; the which I have made on 
 purpofe for to reprove the error of thofe, who without other meafures, draw two Di- 
 agonals from their Pifture, although it be of an enormous greatnefs , and would that 
 a \\ the Objects fhoutd be equally diftant from the fetftion of thefe lines : that is to fay, 
 from the midft of the Pkfture,fo that according to their account, it fhould be alwayes 
 mounted for to fee their work in. its perfedion, in which they deceive themfelves; for 
 when a Picture fhall have fourty foot of height, and that it fhould be for to be feen fet 
 upon the Ground, we fhould not fet the Horizon higher then five feet, and rather lefs 
 theg more, And according to their Rule this Horizon would be twenty foot high. 
 
54 
 
 P|E RSPECTIVE 
 
 
 For to frame Windows in Perfyetfive. 
 
 T HE Order for to make a window, is altogether the fame with that of a doo?* 
 for if you make an Afcent or a Crofs-bar within a door, it will be a window 
 and no more a door, fo that there is no more then to learn to make a fingle Crofs 
 or double, and you (hall know to make windows* If you would make one in the wall 
 A B of fuch largenefs as you fhall pleafe you muft fet its meafure upon the bafe, as D 
 E, and draw from thefe points DE, to the point of diftance F, and from the fe&ion 
 which the points G fhall make at the Ray A C, you muft raife the Perpendicules G H, 
 which fhall give the bredth of the window, which is here but of two little fquares i for 
 the height, they make them ordinarily the neareft that they can to the Plancner above j 
 But, the Reft or Stay ought not to be higher then of three feet, or three feet and an half. 
 Having then taken this Meafure, you muft fet it upon the Perpendicular A B, as A I, and 
 to draw IK. And where this line fhall divide G H, that fhall be the reft, a flay : And 
 likewife drawing L, which is above to the point of fight K, the feftion of G H fhall be the 
 upper part of the window, the which will give us a long fquare, or Parallelogramma, to 
 the which adding a Crofs, it will be a window • for to make this Crofs-bar, you muft 
 divide the fpace D E into two equal parts* And at this divifion to give fuch a bredth as 
 you fhall pleafe, ordinarily it is four inches, or at the moft halfe a foot. And to draw this 
 bredth M, to the point of diftance F, and from the fedion of the Ray A C, toelevatethe 
 Perpendicules N O, which fhallbe the afcent or Rifing of the midft of the window for 
 the Crofs-bars, you fhall fet therein as many as you pleafe • there is nothing but to ob» 
 ferve this, that they ought to have as much thicknefs as the rifing pillar • wherefore ha- 
 ving taken this Meafure M, you muft tranfport it upon the Perpendicuie A B, as is P, and 
 draw this Meafure to the point K, and the fedion that thefe Rays fhall make of the Per- 
 pendiculars G H, G FI, fhall be the Crofs-bars • and by confequent the window made, 
 for its thicknefs, it is not here but of the half of the wall- for to give it to this window, 
 you muft draw lines occult from the point Qjo the point K, and drawing little Parallels 
 to the bafe, from the corners of the window S, they fhall give the thicknefs at the point, 
 that they fhall divide the line QJX, as we have faid of the door. 
 
 This window is equal with the wall within fide which is not ordinary, becaufe there are 
 that make them with Chamfrettings or Scunches, that is to fay, that they enter within the 
 wall, fometimes a foot more or lefs. 
 
 The Order thereof is altogether the fame, except that in ftead of taking the fedions 
 upon the Ray ACK - we muft take it at that which entreth within the wall 5 as far as one 
 would caufe the windows to enter, as may be feen in the figure under the Ray O K, which 
 receiveth the Meafures which one hath fet upon the bafe ^ and that he muft draw at the 
 point of the diftance F all the reft, as at thofe above, taking the thicknefTes of the win- 
 dow, between the Perpendicuie O unto that F, which is the laft. Then when the win- 
 dow fhall be all finifhed upon the Ray O K, and of the bredth of the wall O F, we muft 
 raife the Perpendicuie A, and draw it to the point K. Then from the corner below the 
 window to the points P, to make a little Parallel, which divideth the Ray A K at the point 
 which fhall be the thicknefs of the wall, which fhall cover a little of the window, and 
 fhall make the thicknefs R P to be feen from the point R,you muft elevate the Perpendicuie 
 R V, which fhall divide the Ray T K at the point V, which fhall be the thicknefs above 
 the window. Of the Meafures of that, one fhall make as much as they will, keeping there- 
 in always the fame Order. 
 
45 
 
 P R A C T I C A L. 
 
 P. 
 
55 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Of the Pla/tchers above.' 
 
 ^“TT ' H E Perfpe&iff ("or Pradtifer of this Art) ought, as it w€re, 
 
 I to follow the fame Order which the Mafons keep, whichdo raife 
 
 -*> and caufe to come forth from the Earth, by little and little, very 
 fair Houfes. The Pavement or Plancher below, ferve him for 
 a Foundation, upon the which he raifeth the Walls, which hepier- 
 ceth in fo many places as he will( yet not without reafon) for to have 
 doors and windows, as we have faid. 
 
 Let the walls raifed be A B, upon the which we muft firft fet Beams 
 or Girders, and upon thefe Girders the Quarters or Joyfts. Having 
 taken theMeafareof the Square of its Piece (as it might be here on 
 foot) it muft be carried to the height of the wall, as C D, from the 
 which PointsC D, we muft draw occult lines to the point of fight E, 
 which (hall give the Rays C G D F. You muft alfo carry this Mea- 
 fureCD, upon the Parallel to the Horizon D H, which ought to bear 
 the Meafures and Quantity, of Beams, which you would fet upon the 
 wall, as we have fet thefe three IK L, and draw all thofe Meafures to 
 the point of diftanceM, and from the fedions of the Ray D F, at 
 the point O, tocaufe Perpendiculars to fall, which (hall divide the 
 Rayes C G, at the points P. Then drawing Parallels to the Horizon 
 from the Points O and P, unto the other fide, you (hall have the Beams 
 laid, as you fee in the firft figure. 
 
 Let us fet now Joyfts upon the Beams, ortodomore properly, let us 
 mortaife them there: The line Q.R (hall ferve for the bafe, 
 
 upon which you fhall fet your Joyfts, in fuch number, and fo near and 
 far from each other as you fhall pleafe .- thefe are diftant from each other 
 twice their thicknefs. Then when as we would embox them, we muft 
 take their thicknefs within that of the Beam QS, as is QJf, and draw 
 an occult line T V then between QR and T Y, to fet your Joyfts X, 
 an d from all their Angles which may be feen, to draw to the point of 
 fight Y ; and that you may not pafs the half of the other beams, you 
 muft draw from themidft of the firft, which is the point T, an occult 
 Ray to the point of fight Y, which iliall divide all the other beams by 
 the midft at the point Z. Then from the po nt Z to draw Parallels to 
 the Horizon, that one may not pafs them by drawing Joyfts to the point 
 Y. If you would not take fo much pains, fet your Joyfts Z, upon the 
 line QJR., as they are under : Then draw boldly from one beam to ano- 
 ther, from all the Angles X to the point Y, and you fhall have that you 
 demand 
 
U A (* : T I € A u 
 
 5 5 
 
 P 1 i 
 
5 6 
 
 P ERSPECTIVE 
 
 fV rfo rt\ v «rf> 
 
 H i S Figure is fet here only to caufe one to 
 fee the cffedt of the Order that We are about 
 to teach, where we (hall oblerve, that the Quantity 
 of ftories the one above the other, do not make 
 the Order more difficult. 
 
 The Joyfis are not Tenanted within the Beams 
 in the upper ftory, as in the under {lory. 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 5# 
 
p u.S fj q ti v & 
 
 iSfc A 
 
 S ? ! 
 
 Another Ordering of PUnchers in Perfpective. 
 
 T HIS fafhion ought to be ordered in the fame manner with 
 that which we are now leaving : We ought only to change 
 thefetting of the Pieces ? that is to fay, that we muft fet tne 
 beams at length, for to draw them to tne point of fight, and 
 the Toyft a crofs, which is contrary to the other. 
 
 The Walls fhall be A p,upon the which, or upon the Cattozes that 
 come from them, you (hall place the thicknefs of the beam C D, from 
 the which points C D, you muft draw Parallels to the Horizon C E D 
 F, between the which one (hail fet fuch a number of beams as he will, 
 as here three GH I, which he ought to draw to the point of fight K, and 
 to take heed where the Ray D P fhall divide the Perpendicular L P $ 
 Then from the point P, to draw a little Parallel to the Horizon PM, 
 which (hall be the term ot bound of the other Rays, as P N. And 
 from the point N to raife a Perpendicule N O, and fo to all the Pieces. 
 
 Here is that which is for the beams, for to fet the Joyfts acrofs upon 
 thefe beams, you muft fet their thicknefs upon the line Q,R, and 
 draw thefe Meafures V , to the point of diftance S,and from the fe&i- 
 on which the Angles V, fhall make at the Ray QJf ? you muft draw 
 Parallels to the Horizon, unto above the beam of the other fide. If 
 you would mortaife them within the beams? you muft take 
 the thicknefs of the Rafters within the beam, as is Q_X. And from X 
 to draw a Parallel to the feafe, unto the other fide X X. And between 
 thefe two lines QR and X X, to fet the divifions V, which fhall be Y. 
 And from all the points, to draw to the diftance S, for to have the 
 thicknelTes of the fide, and of below, which (hall be taken in the fe&i* 
 on of the Ray X T, at the point Z, from which drawing Parallels to 
 the Horizon, you fhall make the Plancher, as is feen in the fecond fi« 
 gure, / ' 
 
 You fee how you muft fet into Perfpe&ive fingle Planchers of Car- 
 penters work s If yet after, or in the ftead of thefe you would have 
 fome fair Plat- found of Pictures, or feme other Compartment % follow 
 that which we have faid in the 35 fol. fpeaking of the Compart- 
 ments of the Gardens, and you fhall ufe th$ line Qjl for the bafe. You 
 may make there whatsoever it fhall pleafe you. 
 
 For the Planchers below, there are of feme fafhions in the folio's 
 303132 33 and 34 of the Planes, for to give an open way to him that 
 ufech this Art to invent others by; You may fee hitherto, how to make 
 any Halls or Chambers perfectly, We will teach the moveables at 
 the end of this firft part. * 
 
r 
 
 PUS P ECTIVE 
 
 57 
 
PERSPECTIVE. 
 
 v 
 
 58 
 
 T HIS Figure jfiheweth clearly the Plan cher 
 which we are about to exprefs, and where 
 the lines do make the Figure a little eonfufed. 
 YVE will teach in another place to make this 
 
 Gate with Panes, 
 
50 
 
 P ERSPECTIViS 
 
 J Jingle Draught of Doers and round Arches view'd direlt Ij, 
 
 H Aving fpoken that which is neceflary for Halls, Chambers, 
 Windows and fquare Gates; We mud now know how the 
 round ones are made; for to fee fuch where one would have 
 
 them. 
 
 Suppofing that ABCDEF were Pilafters, or fmall Pillars elevated 
 upon fome Plane ; for to place there Arches, you muft divide the bredth 
 above G H, into two equal Parts, at the point I, upon the which having 
 fet one leg of the Compafs,y©u ftiall make with the other ademi-round 
 G H, which lhall give the firft Arch. 
 
 For to make all the others of the fame height and bredth, you muft 
 draw lines from the points H G, to the point of fight K, and thefe two 
 Rays {hall divide the Perpendicules CD E F, at the points L, from 
 the which points L, you muft draw Parallels to G H, the which Paral- 
 lels L L, you muft divide into two, for to make there demi-rounds, as 
 in the firft. For to finde the Center of thefe Parallels L, there is but 
 only to fet the Rule to the firft Center I, and to draw it to the point 
 K, it will divide them all juft at the midft MM, at the which points 
 you {hall fet one leg of the Compafs, and /hall make the faalf-Circle 
 as in the firft.Thofe which are view’d in front, and thofe which are 
 view’d on the fide, are ordered in the fame manner, as may be feen 
 in the firft Figure. 
 
 When one would make a thicknefs or a band equal throughout all, 
 t here is need but of one Center, asO, of which they have framed the 
 thickneffes N P, of the figures below .• All the reft is made, as we have 
 laid, drawing to the point of fight K ; Thefe two laft figures ihew how 
 all kind of fingle V aults, or bending Roofs Ihould be made, which have 
 but an half-round ; One may enrich them, as we lhall Ihew here- 
 after. 
 
PE AC X I < 5 . A V ' *2 
 
 . • . - Of 
 
 O.U 
 
do PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Round Arches &bov* the pilaflers view’d direftly. 
 
 f fl'1. H E fingle draught that we are about to pafs from, giveth the 
 I means to make this, being the fame Order, there area few more 
 “®- draughts, and not more difficulties, for having draWn from above 
 the Pilafters A B C D, Parallels to thebafe. We muft divide thefirft 
 into two, and from the center I, to make with a Compafs the firft half- 
 Round A B, and without fUrring it from the fame center, to make the 
 band A G F C : Then drawing from this center E, to the point of fight 
 H, the Ray E H, will give all the Middles of the Parallels for to make 
 half- Rounds above all, beginning at B D until the laft I. This is the 
 fame order for that on the fide* 
 
 of the third Point in the Arch* 
 
 T H E draught Isas eafie as of the Round: When one hath given 
 the bredth, as K L, fet a leg of the Compafs in K, and turn the 
 other.towards O, which will .frame the Arch L ©,' feta- 
 gain the compafs in L, and make the Arch K O, you fhall have one 
 Urchin the third point K OL, do as much with M N, you fhall have 
 the fecond Arch of the bottom MP N : Thefecond figure of the third 
 Point is with a Band or Border about it, which is made from the fame 
 Center ? for example, from the Center R, they make the Arch SX and 
 TV: And from the point S, the Arch Q^V, and R X. All the reft 
 draweth to the point of fight Y. , 
 
 The true third Point is the Figure they divide the Diameter dh 
 into three equal Parts, then they fet one" leg of the Compafs in one di-J . 
 vifion as c, and with the other leg they take the opening c h } for to make 
 the Arch b e i then fetting again the compafs in d,t hey make theArch i tt ef 
 which is an Arch in the third point as- well as the other, you may ufe 
 which you will. The Ancient Churches come nearer to the firft then 
 thefecond: there are alfo fome which are more clofer - 
 
<S© 
 
 P A AC T I C A l: 
 
ft PERSPECTIVE 
 
 fa further Furfuit of this Figure, 
 
 I Have fet an Arbour of a Garden, which is 
 made, as we have fpoken of, with Arches , 
 
 view’d directly. 
 
P E E S P E C\T I V fi. 
 
 For to frame and fet into Perfpefifive Doors and round Arches » 
 
 T H E Round being hard to fet into Perfpedive, hath need of lines and of points 
 which go before it, ere it can be framed : And for to finde thefe points the 
 
 more eafily, we muft underftand thefirft figure, by the which we fee, that he 
 Which would have a demi-round upon the Diameter A B, hath only to fet a kg of the 
 Compafs at themidft of A B, at the point C, and with the other leg of the Compafs 
 to draw a crooked line from A to B, and fo to carry his demi-round upon the Elevation 
 D E for to have a Door or round Arch, as in the fecond Figure, fo as we have 
 
 fa id/ ...... 
 
 But for to fet it into Ferfpe&ive, we are to divide it into as many parts as we will : 
 the more that one can make is always the b eft, as we havefaid and fhewed at the 28th. 
 fol.and as we fhallfliew, fpeaking of crofs vaulted Roofs. We will divide this into 
 eight Parts only, four for the half : Having made the half Circle, as we have faid, we 
 
 muft upon the demi-round draw a Parallel to A B, which toucheth it at the 1 point F,and 
 this point F fliall be the midft above the Circle : Then to elevate from A B two Per- 
 pendiculars, which divide this Parallel F, at the points G H. And from the Corners A 
 B G H, to draw two Diagonals A H G B, which /hail divide themfelves in I, and from 
 this point I, to elevate a Perpendicule C I F, which fhall divide the Circl e into two, 
 and the Diagonals fliall divide it into two other Parts at the points K, by the which we 
 muft draw a Parallel to the bafe KL. Let us tranfport all thefe divifions and meafures 
 upon the third Figure, for to fet them into Perfpedive. 
 
 ‘ Firft, draw the Corner E to the point of fight M : Then from the point N equal 
 to D E at the point of diftance P, which fhall divide the Ray E M, at the point 
 Whereby E Qjviil be the bredth of the firft Arch D E, in Perfpedive. Draw alfo O 
 to the point P, it will divide the fecond Arch at the Ray E M, or point R, not having 
 more (pace upon the bafe for to take the third Arch, you muft draw from the point H 
 to the point of fight M ♦, and from the point R a Parallel to the bafe R S. Seeing 
 that R S is under the fame Angle with E N, it is then of the fame bredth as we have 
 proved from the beginning 1 Drawing then from S to P, it will divide the Ray E M, at 
 the point T, which fhall be the third Arch. 
 
 We muft then elevate the Perpendiculars V, from thefe three Points Q_R T, the 
 which fhall be divided by the Ray H M, which fhall be the higheft of the Arches. Then 
 from the Ray B M, which fhall give the lower part of the demi-round, draw Diagonals 
 fr om the points B V H X, which crofting themfelves, . fhall give the place of the Perpen- 
 dicular Y F, which divideth the Arch into two : And drawing the Ray L M, it fhall di- 
 vide the Diagonals into two, and the Arch into four. If you joyn thefe points B Z 
 F Z X, with crooked lines, you fhall have the firft Arch, and the means to make an in- 
 fill :e Company of the fame fafhion. This Order ferveth for Vaults, Arches, Doors, 
 B.iiges, and every other thing that requireth the demi-round. And therefore I let a- 
 lone making the two others, fpeaking no more. 
 
 This Order may alfo ferve for the Windows of a Church ^ There is nothing elfe to 
 do, tut to make one or two Afcents, to fallen the Glafs. 
 
ft 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 ^3 
 
 rt* <A> »Av A jrfb. jhV v nS. A/ A. 
 
 For to frame and put into Perfpe&ive Doors, and Arches round , , double, 
 
 [hewing their thicknejjes . 
 
 T HAT which we are about to fay, is only for the (ingle 
 draught, the which being doubled, giveth the bredths and 
 thicknefles of the Arches, and of that which beareth them, 
 joyning thereto right lines at all the fe&ions of the one to the 
 
 other 5 as for example. 
 
 Having made the firft draught D E, as we newly fpoke of,and drawn 
 D E to the point of fight A, we muft fet the thicknefs upon the bafe E 
 C, by drawing C to the point of diftance B, it will divide the Ray C 
 A at the point F, and fromthis point F, todraw the Parallel to the 
 bafe G F, which (hall divide the Ray D A at the point G. And from 
 F aadG which (hall be the thicknefles, to elevate the Perpendicules I 
 F G : If from the point H, you fhall draw to the point A, this Ray (hall 
 give the height of the Perpendicular HI, upon the which you muft take 
 the line of the Center of the demi-round K, by drawing K to the point 
 A, which (hall give the point L, from which draw the Parallel L M,' 
 and thisParallel fhall be the line which muft bear the center of the demi- 
 round behinde .• As N, is the line of the center of th? demi-circle be- 
 fore : you muft divide this line M L, into two equal parts, by drawing 
 fr om the point N, to the point A, by the point Q,and upon this point O 
 you muft fet a leg of theCompafs, and make the half- Circle ML, the 
 w ffchflialibe divided as the firft, as we have faid in the figure fore- 
 g oing • then to draw right lines from the divifions of the one to the o- 
 ther $ that is to fay, from the demi-round before to that behind, for of 
 the two to make but one. as the figure fhewethic, joyning Mto P Q*to 
 R SF to T V, to X L, to K. 
 
 or to make the Arches or round doors feen on the front, as fe E F 
 G, there is no need to make all thefe divifions, feeing that it is fufficient 
 to have found the line M L,for to make the demi-round, which is car- 
 ried again to the fir ft N P K. But I have made them there on purpofe, 
 for fear of confounding the letters with the lines in this Figure below, 
 where the Arches are view’d obliquely, or at return, by drawing to 
 the point of the fight Y,thefeArches fhall give their thicknefs^by doub- 
 ling the order, which we have fpoken of in the figure preceding, and 
 joyning the divifion from the one to the other, as we fpake but now, 
 and the which is feen in this fecond figure : to the which having given 
 the thicknefs EZJ have framed the draught E of points, and Z of full 
 lines, thereby to avoid confufion:and to make to underftand,that all that 
 which is made of Points ought not to befeen,thePi<fture being finifhed. 
 
PRACTICAL H 
 

 6&t 
 
 PERSPECTIVE. 
 
 jlh. erta, .el* 
 
 
 Of Figures in Arches of another fajhion. 
 
 rfl H E Arches view’d in front, that we have fet heretofore, are 
 1 made exadtly: but they are fomewhat long in the Practice. 
 
 -J- Behold another falhion as right, and more Ihort then the other. 
 
 Having made from the Center A the demi-round, or the 
 whole Circle BH I. You mull from the Center A, and from ?the end 
 of the Diameter B, draw Rays to the point of light C, then fet upon 
 B I the bredth or thicknefs that you would give, as is DA. And from 
 this point D to draw to the diltance E, and at the fedionof this line 
 D E, upon the Ray A C to the point F, you mull draw a Parallel to 
 the bafe, until that it divide the Ray B C, at the point G, then to fet 
 one leg of the Compafs at the point F, and with the other leg to take 
 the diltance G, for to make the demi- round or the whole round, which 
 fhallbethe thicknefs of the Arch, or of the Round, asmaybefeen 
 in the Figures. All the lines K, ought to be drawn at the Center A, and 
 the other L, at the point of fight C. This may ferve for round windows 
 made of ilone ; and thefe liaes lhall make the points, as alfo for great 
 VelTels, Pipes, bathing Tubs, &c. 
 
 Arches view'd obliquely in Perfpeclive. 
 
 T His Order may ferve when one lhall be in hade, and that one 
 would notbefoexad, and alfo to avoid a multitude of lines, 
 which the other Order doth oblige to make; 
 
 I fay then, that having framed the firll Arch NO, as we have 
 faid heretofore, we mull make upon the firll draught little Parallels to 
 the bafe, in fuch number as you lhall pleafe, as are thefe then to take 
 with a Compafs the bredth, where the Arch beginneth, as is P O, and 
 to bring it upon all thefe little Parallels Q, which lhall give the points 
 R, by the which we lhall bring a crooked line, which lhall frame the 
 thicknefs of the Arch. 
 
 It is certain, that according to Pcrfpedtive, the Obje<5ls are enlarged, 
 when they come near to us, and that the line O P ought to be fmaller : 
 but in this, the difference of thefe bredths is fo fmall,that it fignifies no- 
 thing. And yet I give not this for a Rule, but foraneafetothofe that 
 are in halte.- 
 
65 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 I 
 
 Of Arches fat, or 'inmanner of an Handle of a Basket , or demi-circles. 
 
 '"i" 'HE Order to fet them into Perfpedfcive,is the fame with the de- 
 I mi- Round, and of the third points, as we fee in the Figure A B. 
 All the difficulty is to finde the draught which is made in two 
 Manners. 
 
 Thefirft, by two centers, and a line or thread, as we have faid in 
 £ he Orders before fpeaking of the Oval, byreafon that the Handle of 
 a basket is properly an half-oval. 
 
 The fecond is pradtifed thus .• If one give you the line CD, for to 
 make thefe a low Arch, which may have the height E F: you muft from 
 the center F, make the demi- round C G D, and to divide it into as 
 many equal Parts as one would, as this here into twelve 5 and from all 
 thofe divifions to draw to the Center F : then again from all chefe di- 
 vifions to draw Perpendiculars upon the line, or Diameter C D, as are 
 the lines L. After thefe works, we muft of the height,which one would 
 have the Arch of, make alfo a circle, as from E F, the demi-round H E 
 Kj and from the fedlions which this little circle (hall make upon the 
 divifions of the great, we muft draw little Parallels ,until that they touch 
 the Plumb-lines, or Perpendiculars, which fall from the fame divifions ; 
 as for example L O, and from all thefe points O, frame the Arch, as 
 we fee it here made of Points. 
 
 The other Figure maketh yet theiArch lower, and one might make 
 it yet more couching, keeping the fame Rules and Orders. 
 
 The Figure below maketh one of thefe Arches to be in PerfpedHve, 
 view'd in front, as it ought to appear, being finilhed. 1 will fetnothing 
 of the Pradfice, having already faid, that it is the fame with that of 
 the demi-Rounds, 
 
p 1. A C TIC A L 
 
o N E may fee in this Figure the good e£- 
 fed of the Arches, when one giveth them 
 well the Center, or the draught of the Rounds 
 nefs that they ought to have. 
 
 For the Degrees and the Figures we (hall have 
 here after the manner of giving theqg their juft Mea- 
 fures. 
 
5 
 
For to fet Arches or holf- Circles upon Pihfters or Columns, 
 
 O NE might fay that in the Figure, which we are about to be* 
 hold, there are Pilafters, which are not in the draught which 
 ooeth before, the which hath made me refolve to fet this here, 
 which (hall ferve to make it known that it is the fame Order, and that 
 we have only to leave the place and bredth of the Pilafter, which we 
 would give them between two Arches, the which is done by the 
 means of the Plane or of the Bafe, even as we have feen the demi- 
 rounds, which are between each Pilafter, the which are made as we 
 have faid in the laft Order. 
 
 T 
 
 HE Arches, and the Vaults or bending Roofs in the third 
 point, are ordered in the fame manner with the demi- round 5 
 wherefore, having made one of them, we may very well make 
 the other: it fufficethonly to know the draught, feeing that the 
 Figure (heweth fufficiently the reft 5 for the draught, we have already 
 faid that there is nothing foeafie. The bredth A B being given for to 
 make there an Arch in the third point • we mu ft open the Compafs for 
 all this bredth $. and holding firm one leg at the point A, with the o- 
 ther to make the Arch B C, then to bring back the leg toB, and with 
 the other to make theArch A G, where they (hall divide themfelves, it 
 (hall be the point of the Arch C : The other fort of the third point is 
 the true, which we have fet heretofore marked ^ 
 
 Seeing that all the reft is ordered, as in the demi- round, we will not 
 make any repetitions thereof : there are only here Pilafters between 
 two, which are not in the others, that we may c£ufe the better to un- 
 derftand that which I have faid here above, that we have only to draw 
 thefeMeafures from the bafe to the point of diftance O, which fliall di- 
 vide theRayD Eat- the pointF, for to elevate thePerpendicules before: 
 then having fet the thicknefsG,to draw the RayGE,forthe bredth of 
 the Pilafters H, from this point Hthey elevate Perpendicules, which 
 bear the fame divifions with thofe on the fore- pare, the which are 
 join’d with right lines s ,and as in the demi' rounds 
 
i 
 
 PRACTIC k/Li 
 
 67 
 
 Si f 
 
f 8' P E R S P E C tI VE 
 
 -r *< <*■*•* -rtf'! ft* • ft,* fit firt 
 
 SS $4 $2$ : §M §S€ §14 
 
 «st» fit rft r-it ,et» 
 
 JK* ShS c5il(j 
 
 jt$n ■rt 1 ' <3o <r*» <r»<v fifcv .fit*, iptv rfci <ntv <rfr» 
 
 
 For to fet into Perfptcfzve Vaults or Crefs Arches . 
 
 W E mud remember, or fee it anew, that which we have faid at the 28. foL 
 fpeaking of fetting the great Round into Terfpedive, by reafon that we 
 have divided the Circle into many Parts, for to make it the mod exadly 
 ihatmay be, and by confequence the Vaults or Arches more round and more juft. 
 But as there are a great Company of lines in thfs divifion of 1 6 parts • I thought 
 that it would be better to begin by a divifion of 8, although it be notfo exad, fo wiH 
 it alfo be lefs confufed. We will take again the other jn the following leaf. 
 
 Having then made the Plane of a Round divided into eight parts, 1,253,4,5,6,7,8. 
 We mud draw from all its divifions, Parallels to the bafe, unto the Ray B A, which 
 fhall give the points C, upon the which we mud elevate the Perpendiculars C 
 We mud tranfport upon the firft Perpendicular B and D, which is the line of elevati- 
 on, the Meafures of the half-Circle B E F, which fhall give the points D H G- from 
 the which we mud draw Rays to the point A, and at the fedions of the Perpendicu- 
 lars CD, we fhall have the fame divifions as in the Plane, 1,253,4,5. for an half- 
 Circle we mud draw crooked lines, as may be feen in the Arch of the firft fide,the mea- 
 fures of which we mud tranfport to the other for to have the two Arches collateral, 
 from the rifings of which we fhall make twoCircles with theCompafiyhe one beforeG K 
 from the Center M ; the other at the bottom 5 L, from the Center N, and fo we fhall 
 lavethe four Arches, which do meet ordinarily in the crofs Vaults, attheoutmoft 
 Mouldings,Ogees oi Circlets- ? There remaineth nothing but to make theCrofs, or the 
 crooked Diagonals, which ought to reft and bear upon the corners G, 5 K I, pad 
 fing by the knot or fcutcheon O. 
 
 Seeing that the Circle is divided into eight Parts, the Arches which are but the 
 half of the Circle, ought to have but four, as have thofeof the fides : whence we 
 ought alfo to divide into four the half-Circle before G K, at the points G P Qjl K, 
 the which ought to be drawn to the point of fight A, unto the Circle of the bottom 5.^ 
 L •, Now that which followeth, is the fecret of the Crofs • it is that we muft draw 
 Parallels to the Horizon, or to the bafe, from all thefedionsof the Circle on the 
 fide 1, 2, 3, 4- 5. at the divifions of the Circle before, in fuch manner as G, which is 
 the firft divifion of the Circle, touch in a point the firft fedion 1. from 2 to draw a 
 Parallel to the fecond divifion P, and to make a point S,from 3 to the third divifion Q, 
 which fhall give O, the place of the Knot ^ from 4 to the fourth divifion R at the point 
 T, then to joyn the crooked lines GSOTL, and you fhall have already a Diagonal* 
 a d do as much on the other fide, and you fhall have the Crofs entire, and your 
 > auk compleat. 
 
H PERSPECTIVE.. 
 
 For to maty the fame Vault more exactly. 
 
 H E that fliall underftand well the foregoing 
 Order, will not be much troubled to do this, 
 feeing there is nothing but to double the lines, and 
 to take heed to the fedtions which are in a greater 
 Number, by reafon the Circle is divided into more 
 Parts, * 
 
 One may learn to make the plane at the 28, fol* 
 youmuft draw parallels from all the divifions of 
 this plane,from i unto f d.or the half only to the Ray 
 B A, which will give the points O,upon which you 
 muft elevate perpendiculars, &c. All the reft is 
 done, as we have faid in the foregoing Order. But 
 this is the more exadt, and doth make the Vault 
 more eafiiy, becaufe the divifions are more near the 
 one to the other. 
 
PRACTICAL. 
 
 

 7 0 
 
 P E R SPEC T IV E 
 
 jf'H .4, ^ A '**’ y-» . -?-V «^V .rtf* .^r* fN /£> v rtc rfo rt- '*'> e*y t *+ r *, ft- { t» A -t* ,Jl ,t- 
 
 . X.-. 
 
 Fir to make toe Fun Its more freight then Urge. 
 
 T Here are two Orders in this Figure • the one for to ftreighten the Vaults oil 
 the fides, the other for to give a I hlcknefs to the Crofs. We will begin with 
 the former. The two Qrders of Vaults, which we are about leaving, fup- 
 poling that they are all fquare • that is to fay, that the diftance and bredih of the Arch- 
 es is equal, as well on the fides as thofe on the front • and he that cannot make but of 
 this fafliion, fhall finde fome trouble, if he were to fet up a Church, where ordinarily 
 the Arches of the fides are much clofer then thofe of the front. 
 
 See here a fair Invention, by the which you fhall give fuch Meafure as you pieafe, to 
 thofe of the fides, by the means of the bale A Q. Suppofe then that the Arch before 
 it Qjs 40 feet broad, and that in that of the fides, you would allow but 1 5, 20,* or fo 
 much or little as you pieafe : you mull (according to the fourth advice in fol .17.) fet 
 this Meafure upon the bafe, and draw to the point of diftance, which will give the fink- 
 ing of the fame Meafure in AE •, as by example, we have fet here A C of 20 feet, 
 drawing from the point C-, to the point of diftance, which is a little farther off here 
 where our Paper is too narrow for to caufe it to be feen • it will divide the finking of 
 20 feet, upon the Ray A D, at the point E •, then coming back to the Bale, you mu ft 
 make an half-Circle of this diftance A C,and divide it into as many parts as the great- 
 er Arcade F G fhall have of divifion, as here 8 • and from all thefe divifions I, to ele- 
 vate Perpendiculars I H, and from the points I H, being drawn to the point of diftance 
 they will divide the Ray AE, at the point O, which you mull alfo elevate into the 
 Perpendicular O P, you muft make in fome place feparate the Plane of this demi- 
 round F G. Suppofing that it hath not been made, for to take the divifion9 thereof, 
 and to carry them from E unto B : And feeing that the Plane of the Figure foregoing 
 is equal to F G, take the Meafuresof the half B CD E F, and carry them upon the 
 Perpendiculcs A F, and from thefe poiuts E F D C B, draw to the point of fight D, 
 and from the fedions which thefe Rays B C D E F, fhall make at the Perpendici les O 
 P * you muft draw crooked lines, which fhall frame the Arch of the fide, and draw- 
 ing Parallels from the fedions 1,2,3,4,5,657,8,9, to the divifions of the Arch F G, 
 you fhall have the points F R S T V X Y Z, for to frame the Crofs, even as we have 
 air aiyfaid heretofore. 
 
 For the Thickneffes of the Joynts of the Crofs, you are only to make a little line 
 of Elevation a b, wh.xh I have fet at the top of the Perpendicule elevated from the point 
 O : and this line a b being drawn to the point of fight D, divideth ail the other Per- 
 pendicules at the points c 5 , for to give the heights Proportionate to every.PerpendicuIe 
 elevated from the fedions of the Crofs • that is to fay, from the fedions which muft 
 be made for to finde the draught of the Crofs, following their Order ; for example, 
 the firft Elevation a b fhall be given at the firft Perpendicule G : The fecond Ele- 
 
 vation c d , at the fecond Perpendicule F, c •, and fo following for all Lhe others, which 
 fhall give the points C-, by the which making a crooked line for to joyn them together, 
 we fhall have the thicknefs of the Joynts of the Crofs of the Vault, as one may fee at 
 half of the left fide of the Figure aforegoing. 
 
R A C TIC A L 
 
7 1 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Vault made by the Orders aforegoing* 
 
 A L L the Orders aforegoing; do {hew fuffi^ 
 cient eafinefs for to make a perfect Vault, as 
 this here : except wh& concerned! the Pillars or Go- 
 lumns, which we will (hew hereafter* 
 
 « 
 
72 PERSPECTIVE. 
 
 of Arches and Dcors with three futures. 
 
 T Here is another kind of fretted cieling, which holdeth the place 
 of a Roof for Gates and Galleries, and alfo in Churches, which 
 maketh well alfo in Perfpedtive-, and is very eafie to pra&ife: 
 I have fee it after the Round, becaufe that it is framed of a demi- 
 Circle, as a round door, which after is to be divided. 
 
 Having elevated the walls A B, we mud make a demi- Circle, which 
 containeth all the bredth C D, then holding the Compafs open of the 
 bredthof the half Diameter EC, you mail hold one leg firm at the 
 point C, and with the other E to draw an Arch on high, which divideth 
 the demi-round at the point G, and to make likewife from the point D 
 the Arch E H. Then to joyn thefe four Letters C D G Hi with right 
 lines, which will give you the Arch half-Hexagone, or with three 
 fquares. You muft alfo make a demi-round, upon the bredth IK: for 
 the bottom, and for to divide it, you have only to draw from the 
 Angles of the firft C D G H, to the point of fight F, -at the fedfions 
 that it lhall make of the demi-round at the point L M : you muft draw 
 right lines, which will frame the Arch of the hollow. 
 
 Of another Arch Half- Becagone^er of five fquares. 
 
 T HIS Arch is ordered altogether as the former, and there is no 
 difference, but in the divifion of the Circle : The firft is divi- 
 ded into three, and this into five j fo if you divide the demi- 
 Cirde L M, into five Parts NOP Q>and that you draw from all thefe 
 points to the point R, you lhall divide the demi-Circle of the hollow : 
 fo as we have faid, in that above of three fquares.; 
 
75 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 •Ik 4k ? 
 
 Elevation of round Figures in Pcrfpeffii e. 
 
 P’“ _ S 1 HE defire that I have to drew the eafinefs of fettirg ail 
 things into PeifpedUve, hath made me fet here alfo, how 
 1 one ought to elevate from a Round or Circle, fuch an height 
 as one would have % and this Order (hall ferve for all round 
 Figures! as Tops of a Church, Amphithearers, Towers, &c. 
 
 Having made the Plane of the Round in Perspective, as it is ordered 
 heretofoie, and feton the fide of the Plane, the line of Elevation A B, 
 according to the height that one would give it: We mult from the 
 Angles of the Plane which are here, the Points of which they have 
 framed the Round, asare 1,2.3,4,5 6.7,8 9, to draw Parallels^ the 
 bottom of the line of Elevation A B, and to elevate them as we have 
 faid, and with a Compafs to tranfport them upon the Perpendiculars 
 elevated from the points 1,2, 3,4;5,6,7, 8,9, &c. as in the former Or- 
 ders. 
 
 The demi-round before, hathbuthalf of the Elevationof thacbe- 
 hinde •, andtheoneand the other, but the fingle draught without 
 thicknefs. 
 
 By this Orderthereis no round thing, which one may not fet into 
 Peri'pe&ive ; I mean Rounds, Parallels to the Horizon; The other 
 Rounds which are Perpendiculars to the Horizon, are taught in the 
 Orders of Vaults* 
 
 The Elevation of Filafters fet into a Round. 
 
 W E muft double the Round, asis taught in the Plane, fol. 29. 
 and between the two Circular lines fet the Plane of the Pie- 
 ces, which one would elevate, as we fee the Places before A 
 BCD, the which do draw to the Center E > Then from all the Angles 
 of thefe Planes to raife Perpendiculars, and to give them their height, 
 according to the line f Elevation F G, by the ordinary Rule, as is 
 fufficiently feenby the fecond figure. 
 
% R A e T ! Q A ^ ) 7 5 
 
J» B RSPECT IV E 
 
 Vault l fa a Scallop- fall fit into <p er/peBive . 
 
 T HIS Figure may ferve for the hollow of a 
 Church, foraGrotteorCave,for an hollow 
 fs[eft in a Wall, and the like Pieces; the Elevation 
 is made in the fime manner, and by the Orders 
 that we have fpoke n of. 
 
 For this flat Band A B which may ferve for a 
 Corniftyts diminution muft be taken upon the line 
 of Elevation in C D, and to carry it upon the Pi- 
 1 afters. 
 
 For the Vault, we muft make the firft Arch E_F> 
 in the manner that We have faid, and in the midft 
 within to make a dcmhCircle O, to the which we 
 {hall draw crooked lines, which fhafl rife above the 
 Pilafters, and (hall make the fides or Nerves of the 
 Vault, as we fee G H I K, the heights of the Win- 
 dows {hall be taken upon the line of elevation, be- 
 tween L and M. The figure will help for the 
 refti 
 
 
WM " a 
 
 PRACTICE U 
 
 i 
 
 ,v 
 
d it vj v i) "R r r r i v Ik 
 
 of op: n Rett nds in Steeples , or Faults pierced in Perspective. 
 
 H Hving made the Plane of the double Round, fd.24. and marked 
 between the two Circles, the places and the numbers of the Pi- 
 lafters which one would have there, the which ought to draw 
 towards the Center A : we mu ft mark the height, which we would 
 give from the ground unto the hollow of the Lovure, as here the line D 
 ana E on high : the which muft ferve for the bafe, where we fball tran- 
 fpOrt the fame Meafures, which are upon the line BG. And from the 
 lame point of fightG,to make aPlane on high as that below>whenceall 
 the places of the Pilafters fhall draw towards the Center H, for to 
 frame the Pilafters, we are only to draw lines from the places, which 
 are oppofite the one to the ether, and which fhall give their bredth 
 and their thicknefs. I have not drawn lints to the three Pilafters be- 
 fore $ as well to caufe thefe of the bottom to be feen, asalfo to make 
 it known, that there needs on high, as below. 
 
 For to give the thicknefs of the Round from I unto H, and from K 
 unto L, we muft fet the height, which we would have upon the line of 
 the Elevation D M, drawing to the Horizon at the point F 5 And from 
 all the points whence -we have framed the Round, to draw to this line 
 D, upon the which we fhall elevate Plumb-lines, as D M, which we 
 take with a Compafs, for to tranfport all thefe heights upon the Per- 
 pendicules, which fhall beraifed from the points, asKLNOP Qsand 
 fo of the others* 
 
 He that in the place of the Round, would have a fquareor a Poly- 
 gone, hath need only to keep the fameMethod ; and he fhall do all that 
 he would, with the fame facility, feeing that this, which is the hard? 
 I s not difficult. 
 
PRACTICAL* 
 
 li 
 
 •j»T 
 
.PE;RSPICI!YE. 
 
 *That the multitude of OhjetU and the 'Plurality of Jlo - 
 ries, ought to have hut one point of fight. 
 
 I Have already faid elfewhere, that one never 
 ought to fet more then one point of fight in one 
 Pidture^ and that hence we may know the great 
 ignorance ©f Painters, which do give as it were as 
 many points of fight,and of Horizons,as they make 
 lines* I remember I have feen a Pi&ure, where there 
 were many ChamberSjthe one above the others,and 
 each had t wo or three points of fight* and after that 
 the Mailer thought he had done a Miracle. The 
 prelent Figure is to correct this Frrour, and caufe 
 us to know, that there ought to be but one point of 
 fight only, as is A, to the which all the Objects 
 ought to draw, and all the Chambers, if there 
 fbould be fifty, one above the other,or on the one 
 fide and the other jas we fee thefe three here, which 
 draw all to the point of fight Ai All the rellis 
 m ade, a s we ha vefai d heretofore. 
 
77 
 
 P EirSPECTlVE 
 
 For to jet Chimneys into Ferjpcffive. 
 
 W E muft take the Meafures upon the bafe A B, which muft 
 be divided into equal Parts. Y ou may make the divifions of 
 what quantity you will. This A B isinto eighteen, of each one 
 foot } for to make a Chimney at the Wall A, three feet within the 
 Chamber, we muft take three Parts, as A C, and draw from the point 
 C to the point of diftance D, which will give the finking of three feet, 
 dividing the Ray A E at the point F, you muff fet the thicknefs of the 
 Jaumbsof the Chimney beyond the point C, asisG, then drawing 
 from G to D, it will give this thicknefs at the point H. Youmuft alfo 
 fet the bredth of the Chimney from G unto I, which is of four feet 
 and an half : and for the thicknefs of thefecondjaumbs an half foot, as 
 at the other: Beginning at the point I unto K, then to draw from IK 
 to the point of diftance D, which will give their Meafure upon the Ray 
 A E, at the points L M, from which four points FHLM, you muft: 
 draw little Parallels to the bafe,as F N H O L P M Q,v for to give the 
 bredth tothejaumbs, you muft take a foot and half A R, and the 
 Ray A E {hall divide the little Parallels at the points NOP from 
 which, and from F L,you muftraife Perpendicules 5 for the height of 
 the Mantle- tree of the Chimney, you muft take five feet upon the 
 bafe, and carry them to the corner of the wall A unto S, and from S to 
 T for Cornifh, all the reft is feen clearly in the firft figure. 
 
 The otherChimney which is oppofite to it, is made of the fame man- 
 lier, for we ought always to make the Jaumbs as in the firft s and of 
 thefe Jaumbs, to make Columns, Termes, and all that one would. I 
 have made Brackets to this. 
 
 The Chimney of the bottom muft alfo take its Meafures upon the 
 bafe j,2, 3, 4, drawn to the point of fight E, for to finde the hollow of 
 the Chimney, oj the bredthsofthe Jaumbs, you muft draw from 7 to 
 1$, and divide the lines of finking at the point 5, which {hall be a foot 
 and half: then from the point of diftance V, to ’draw the Diagonal 
 •pafling by 5 , which {hall divide the Ray 2 .E. at the point 6 , and from 
 this point to draw a Parallel which ftiall divide the four Rays £,2,3,4. 
 at the points 9, 6,9, 9, from which you muft raife Perpendiculars, and 
 make all the reft as in the others. 
 
 The fecond figurelheweth plainly, and without lines, thatwhich we 
 arefpeaking of. / 
 
P R A C T ? 
 
 
 7 7 
 
of Stairs in P erfpeffive. 
 
 T Here k nothing thatgiveth fo great a grace to a Perfpe&ive, nor which 
 more eafily deceiveth the eye, there is a muititude of Returns, by reafon that 
 there is need of many lights and divers fhadows, which give fuch force to the 
 €)bjeds^ that they feem to call them out of the w r ork. Now flairs have this advan- 
 tage, that in what fafhion foever one fet them, they have always lights and fhadows, 
 and by confequence they are pleafing to the fight. I will fet down fome here. If one 
 fhall ufe little fquares, they will have the more eafinefs, having only to raife Perpen- 
 dicules, from fo many fquares, as he would have fleps : then to fet at the firfl fquare 
 the line of Elevation, divided into as many Parts as one would, and fro m thefe divifi- 
 ons to draw to the point of fight, and they fhall divide th e Perpendicules where the 
 fleps ought to be. 
 
 For example, you would have a flair-cafe, of eight fleps, and that the laflmay have 
 the bredch of 3, you mull take upon the Plane the number of little fquares, beginnin g 
 at B, as are 1,2,354,5,6,7.0. And 3 for the lafl marked 1 1, from all thefe Angles we 
 mull raife Perpendicules, which we fhall divide, according to thedivifions of the line 
 of El evation B D in this manner. 
 
 The firfl divifion (four inches high, fuppofing the fquare of one foot) fhall divide 
 the firfl Perpendicule, and it mufl be coutinued unto the fecond, for that maketh alfo 
 r he upper part of the flep, as is E F, and fo of the others. You fhall make thefe fleps # 
 as long as you would :as thele are of three feet taking, as I have faid,the fquare for one 
 foot, fo as is B G at this diflance. You mull alfo raife Perpendicules, as we have done 
 on the fide B^ but for to fave this pains, it were better to take the height of the lafl 
 flep H, and that of the firfl I. Then to draw the line H I, which mull ' grate upon 
 the Angles, or the outward edge of the Steps, as E K, grateth upon them on the fide 
 B : for this being, there is but onely to draw parallells to the Bafe from all the Steps on 
 the fide B, until! that they divide the line H I, as we fee L M N O P Q^&c. without 
 making fquares^ we need only to fet theMeafures upon theBafe,and to draw them to the 
 point of diflance. We may have the fame Meafures upon the line A B. 
 
 X fet no other figures, feeing that this fu&ceth for to Underftand them all,an4 for to 
 make them. 
 
7 % 
 
 PR ACTIC A U 
 
 / 
 
 7 & 
 
79 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 ,f*V fh A jfe. 
 
 A *fe ife: jjfe • ,jfe ifc 
 
 ,fV jft.» jtv v ^>. Jtfr* v fV jrtv A .ft* jr#% jirt •**, 
 
 £ : ^ii ; i & M 
 
 Other fiefs hollowed underneath in Perspective* 
 
 T HIS manner of fteps is made as thofe which we are now lea ve- 
 ing. As for the hollowaefs, there is need only to fee the Fi- 
 gure, for to know the manner of fetcing them into Perfpedtive: 
 Thefe two that I prefent /hall give an open way to the Pra&ifer of this 
 Art, to invent others by. 
 
 Steps in front in Perfpeclive . 
 
 T his manner of fteps is according to the Order of the line of 
 Elevation 5 you muft raiie as many Perpendicules from the 
 Angles of the fquares of the Plane, as you would have of 
 fteps, as are C D E F, and from the fame Angles to draw little Paral- 
 lels unto the bottom of the line of elevation A, which (hall be the 
 points O O O O, which you muft raife until that they divide the oc- 
 cult Rays of the divisions of the line of Elevation A: Then to take 
 thefe Meafures with a Compafs, and carry them upon the Perpendi- 
 cules elevated from the Angles of the Plane, each according to their 
 Order. The firft, for the firft ftep $ the fecond, for the fe- 
 cond* See. 
 
 For to finde thefe Returns P 5 you muft from the fame Corners P 
 draw to the diftance Q, and to take heed, where that dividech the line 
 of the Plane, or the under-part of the ftep * for example, above the 
 fourth ftep I have made the Plane of the fifth ftep 5 Now to have 
 its Return P, we muft from the fame points P, draw to the diftance Q, 
 and take notice where it fliall divide the Ray R, which fhall be at the 
 point S', and this point S fhall be the point for to draw the line of Re- 
 turn S TV And fo of others* 
 
19 
 
 PRACTICE ht 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 
 For to make jl air s y . which one may jhetv from four \fidcs. 
 
 T Here are many wayes to make thefe Stairs, fee here are two , , which feem the 
 moft eafif . The hrft ^ Being about to make one of thefe Stairs, we mud take 
 the kng h of the fird Step, and fet ther. on the quantity of Steps, that you 
 would have, as upon the line A B, I have fet the points CCC, for four iteps : from 
 thefe points we mud make Rays to the point of fight D, the Rayes fhall. be divided by 
 the Diagonals A F, and B E, at the points I, from the which we mud raife Perpendi- 
 ailes, and draw little parallels unto the bottom of the line of Elevation G, w hich fhall 
 give the points H, which they (hall raife as H K, 
 
 We mid upon this line of Elevation G, fa as many equal parts, as we would have 
 Steps, as htre 4, from thefe four points 1 . 2 .3 . 4. We mud draw to the point D, 
 for to divide the Perpendiculars H K, and to give to each the height that it ought to 
 have, as that which is made of points fheweih it,. 
 
 We mud take thefe meafures wLh a Compafs, and tranfport them the one after die 
 other, beginning at the fird G, 1 . and carry it upon the fird Perpendicular , to the 
 corner A, as A L, then to draw a parallel unto the other fide B. (but here I have not 
 fee it but at the half, for to make the plane to be feen in the other)for the fecond Step, 
 you mud take the f cond meafure H, 2, and carry it upon the fecond Perpendicular 
 then to draw Parallels, as at the fird ; And fo of all the GLhers* 
 
 Another manner. 
 
 i he fide M N, being given-, we mud make a parallel above, for the thicknefs of the 
 fird Step, as O P, from which points O P, we draw 2 Rayes to the point of fight Q, 
 and alfo to the didances R S, And thefe Biagonalls (hall frame the fquare in the or^ 
 dinary manner and this {hall be the fird dep. For the fecond, we mud fet the mea- 
 fure of the breadth, which we would give it upon the line O P, as is O T, and from . 
 the point T, to draw to the point of fight Q^and this line or Ray T fhall divide 
 the Diagonals O, where we mud raife the fecond Step at the point V. The height 
 of this Step fhall be taken from the half of V X, as M O, is the half of O T. This 
 meafure being given at the point Y, we mud draw parallels unto the Diagonal of the 
 other fide, which is drawn from the comer P, then from the points Y Z. to draw to 
 the points of fight, and of didance^ for to frame the fquare as at the fird Step. For the 
 third Step, we are only to carry upon the line Y Z,the meafure V X, which fhall be Y 
 A, and from the point A, to draw to the point of fight Q,for to divide the Diagonal of 
 the point Y, which fhall be the point B, and the place of the third Step 0 Its height 
 ffall be the half of B C, which is aiwayes that of O T in Perfpe&iye. All the red is 
 the fame, as in the fird and fecond, if there fhould be an hundred , you mud work 
 always in the fame manner 
 
 1 he third figure caufeth thefe Steps to be feen clearly without the confufion of 
 Draughts, which we fhould make for to find their places : thefe Draughts fhould be 
 made in white- or in fuch manner, that nothing may be feen of them, when, the figure 
 is finifhedc 
 
p R A C Til CAL; 7 , J*f 
 
*■£ 
 
 P -E R 5 P ECTIVE 
 
 
 Stairs viewed on the fide in Perfpeffivc. 
 
 Y Ou muft fet upon the bafe, the number of fteps that you would have^ that is to 
 fay, as many points at an equal diftance, as here the three ABC, from thefe 
 points, you muft draw to the point of fight D. Then from the point A, to the 
 point of diftance E •, And this Diagonal A E, fhall give the plane, and the place of 
 the fteps at the fe&ion of the Rays B C, at the points I, and upon the Ray F , which 
 is the foot of the Wall, the point G, which is the midft of the plane of the fteps, from 
 ■this point G, you muft draw to the other diftance H, for to find the corner of the laft 
 ftep at the point K, and the place of others at the points I. Then from all thefe points 
 I, to raife Perpendiculars. 
 
 For to give them their height, you muft from the points ABC, which are upon the 
 bafe, raife little lines, for to ferve for the line of elevation, upon the which fhall be 
 fet the heights according to their number. For example, A, which is firft, fhall have 
 but one, B, which is the fecond, fhall have two. and C, which is the third fhall have 
 three. Draw from all thefe points i, 2, and 3, to the point of fight D, and you fhall 
 divide the Perpendiculars elevated from the plane, to the points O, which fhall be th e 
 height of each ftep. 
 
 That of the other fide is for to make it feem without points, and without lines. This 
 manner of fteps may ferve for many things, as for an Altar, for a Throne , for the 
 forepart of a Church, for a Gate, &c. 
 
 jrfk <E&* rtt 
 
 Stairs within a Wall in Perspective. 
 
 S Et as many divifions at the end of the Wall, as you would have fteps , as here, 
 for three, between A and B, and draw A B, to the point of fight C. Then having 
 determined the fpace, that you would give to the fteps, as D E, you fhall draw 
 the parallel to the bafe E F, which fhall receive at the points 1 1 , the fe&ions of the 
 lines drawn from the points G H, to the point of fight C, and from thefe points 1 1 , 
 you fhall raife Perpendiculars I K, I K, which fhall receive the heights of the fteps, 
 drawing from the points 1 . 2 . 3 > K> the point of fight C, as is to be feen in the fecond 
 figure. 
 
 

 P E R S P E C T I V E 
 
 
 For winding Sims with Refts in Perfpecfive* 
 
 W E muft remember the fore-going orders about Steps, and it will be eafie 
 
 frame thefe winding Stairs, but to avoid the pains of fearching, we will un- 
 fold the whole matter here 
 
 By reafon that the winding Stairs of this figure, have ordinarily twice as much at the 
 bottom, as they are broad : When one would raife then into Perlpe&ive, he fhall fir ft 
 fet the Horizon, where he would. Then he muff, make a fquare, according to the or- 
 dinary rules, and double it according to the fecond advice of FoL 16. and to divide 
 this fquare by an unequal number of little fquares, that the Walls which fhould be in 
 the midft, may be of the meafure of one little fquare. 
 
 In this figure each fquare hath 9 fides, or little fquares of each fide, the which being 
 doubled maketh 18. for all the hollow : Of thefe 18. you muft leave 4 at each end 
 for the Rcfts^ there remains 10 little fquares, which we will make to contain 1 foot e- 
 evry way, of which we fhall make ten Steps, or degrees, as followeth. 
 
 Having left 4 fquares A B, beginning at the point A, which holdeth the place of 
 ; the Wall, we will raife a good height the PerpetyJicule B, then the fecond C, and the 
 third D, and fo from the other Angles of the fquares, until that one have made the 10* 
 which we have here : This being done on the ond fide ^ you fiiali do as much on the 
 other, and all thefe Ferpendicules fhall give the depths of the fteps* 
 
 For the heights, if they have one foot of depth, or breadth, we fhall give them one 
 half foot of height, which is the half of the little fquare A O : this height being taken 
 wnh a compafs, we mull fet it upon the firfl corner, which fhall ferve as for the line of 
 eIeva:ion, beginning all below at the point A, and to mark it as many times , as we 
 would make Steps, as here 10 unto the firfl Reft, from which we begin to afcend again 
 on the other fide oppofite , where which we fhall take again the Reft of the numbers 
 following are marked there on the one fide, and other unto the 2 3 . 
 
 From all thefe 23 points, we muft draw to the point of fight E, and to take heed to 
 j' divide the Perpendicules, according to their order, that is to fay, that having placed the 
 cule upon the firfl point, and at the point of fight we muft divide the firfl Perpendi- 
 ci kr B, unto C, w i h a fmall draught for the firft Step For the fecond Step, we muft 
 from the Tcond point divide the fecond Perpendicular Cj unto D And fo of all as well 
 of one fide, as the other 
 
 From all the Angles of thefe fmall draughts between the Perpendiculars, we muft 
 draw parallels to the Hoiiion, unto the Wall F, which is raifed in the midft, as are the 
 fmall draughts 1 1 1 1 , which I have made only on one fide, for to avoid confufion. 
 It is only thefe parallels, which muft frame the Steps : Ail that is, made unto that, 
 ought to be of occult lines, which ought not to be feen, when the figure is finifhed. 
 
 The Refts ought to be taken from the defed of the laft Perpendiculars unto the Wall, 
 as from G, unto H, their thicknefs H K, is of one half foot, as of one Step 
 
 The figure below, is the fame wkh that above : but this is made, and the other 
 fneweth how it ought to be made. 
 
83 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Stairs winding uf right , in Perfpeffive- 
 
 Y O U muft fet upon the bafe one fide of the Afcent, and divide it into fo many 
 Parts, as you would fet fteps there : for example, the fide of the ft airs let be 
 the diftance A B, if you would have 1 6 fteps for the whole Circuit of the 
 fquare, each fide ihall have four : This is, why this Meafure A B being divided into 
 
 four, you muft make thereof a fquare divided into fixteen, according to the Orders si- 
 fore-going. 
 
 From all the outward divifions which divide into four the lines of each fide, you 
 muft raife Perpendicules which will give the bounds of the fteps. Let then the Per- 
 pendicules be A A, BB,CC,DD,E E. This E E made for three, by reafon that 
 the point is in the midft • for that it ferveth for the Nuell or Spindle, which is the Cen- 
 ter of all, and the half of the line before, and of that of the bottom , there follow 
 F F, G G, H H, 1 1, K K, L L, M M, N N, O O, PP. 
 
 You mull fet upon the firft Perpendicule A. which we will make to ferve for lines 
 of elevation, the height of one ftep or degree QA : And from the point Q^you muft 
 draw to the point of fight X, for to have the Meafures of all the fteps atthefeftions 
 of the Perpendiculars Q_R STY : A Qjs the height of the firft, F R of the fecond , 
 
 G S of the third, H T of the fourth, and I V of the fifth - 5 this of all thofe of the bot- 
 tom, as A is of all thofe before. 
 
 Seeing that G S is the meafure of the third, which is the midft of the fide • it muft 
 alfobethe meafure of the Center, and of the Nuell of the ftairs ^ therefore having 
 taken this Meafure G S, with the Cempafies, we muft carry it to the Center of the 
 fquare ^ and mark it in going upwards, as many times as we would fet fteps in the 
 whole Afcent, as I have fet it here eighteen times for eighteen fteps or degrees. 
 
 All being ordered in this manner, thereft iseafie enough, feeing that for to make 
 the firft ftep, we muft take the meafure A Q, and carry it upon the Perpendicular D, 
 to the point I . and from this point I to make a Parallel unto the other Perpendicule 
 B ^ then from thefe two points 1 1, upon the Perpendiculars to draw to the other I, 
 which is at the Center of the fquare • thefe three III will frame the firft ftep. For 
 the fecond, feeing that its Corner cometh to the Perpendicule B, which is on the fide 
 before, you muft give it the fame meafure A Q, which fhall be 1,2. And from the 
 point 2, to draw to the point of fight X, for todivide the Perpendicule P, or the point 
 2, from the which points 2, 2, Perpendiculars, you muft draw to 2 of the Center, 
 which will frame the fecond ftep. For the third, feeing that it meeteth upon the Per- 
 pendicular P, you muft take the meafure F R for its height, and do as at the fecond ^ 
 and fo of all the others. 
 
 He that would make them round, needeth but only to reduce the fquare into Round, 
 according to the Orders aforegoing, and he (ball have the fame facility wholly as m 
 the fquare, in whatfoever remaineth. 
 
 
PRACTICAL. 3$ 
 
Squares fet into Rounds in Perfpeffiv*. 
 
 T HIS Order is the fame that we have given in the Planes, for 
 to fet into Perfpe&ive y the Round divided into 8, as one may 
 fe e in the figure A, where the perfed Round of the forepart of 
 the Cube, giveth the draught how to abridge that above > And. that 
 above with that before, for to abridge all the other fides ; as we fee 
 the Figure B, where the Round is abridged on three fides, and at the 
 other C, where it is of all the faces of the Cube. . 
 
 The third. Figures D E F, are pierced or hollowed, each on two 
 fides, according to the Plane of the Figure, where the Round A, as we 
 fee the Cube D, pierced by the face before, and through that we fee 
 the bottom pierced • likewife Eis pierced by the files, and F by the up- 
 per part and the face, which lieth upon the Ground, which cannot be 
 feen, fuppofing that the Cube be ot matter, which is not tranfparent. 
 
 Thefe three Figures which are under, are as the Pieces which one 
 hathdrawn from each Cube ; this G fhould be drawn from the Cube 
 D, H is drawn from the cube E, and I is drawn from the cube V. 
 
 That which caufeth to underftand the eafinefs of fetting all fquare 
 Figures into Round, and that one fliall $ot be troubled to fet Columns 
 In what place foever he would. The reafon why I have fet none of 
 them heretofore, hath been for to render the Elevations more eafie to 
 conceive, and to facilitate the Orders > the which being well under- 
 flood and remembred,one (hall be able to make a round figure of what- 
 soever he will 5 This is the beginning of Columns. We fhall further 
 fpeak, how one ought to proceed for to make them perfed. 
 
PR A C T i C A L * 
 
fJ PERSPECTIVE 
 
 %ound Stairs, in <p erfpeBiye . 
 
 F OR to elevate thefe three Stairs, or round 
 S teps view'd by the front, which are in the firft 
 figure »we muft make a Plane of three Rounds the 
 one within the other,as it hath bin faid in the Plane*, 
 fol. *8. And from all the points that frame the round 
 to draw P arallels to the Bafe,unto the Ray A, which 
 is the foot of the line of Elevation A B, which fhall 
 give the elevations by the Ordinary Rule, 
 which mu ft be taken with the Com pafTes, and to 
 carry them upon the perpendicules elevated from 
 the Points of the Plane, as we have done at the Pi la- 
 fters,fet into Round* 
 
 ‘R'Ound flair s "viewed from the fide in PerfpeBive, 
 
 T H E Order of Figures or Objedts viewed 
 from the fide, is altogether the fame with that 
 of thole of the front; But that it may be known 
 that we are not always bound to follow the divi- 
 fion of the Circle into i6 . I have madethofe of 
 
 the fide into 8, as may be feen in the Circle made of 
 Points in the Figure, which is not lhadowed ; for 
 all the Reftj it is as in other Orders ; the line of ele- 
 vation C D, which is drawn to the point of fight E* 
 
% 
 
 practical# 
 
 — — — - — -T & l?„ — — — 
 
 H«Wxon 
 
 X 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 For the winding flairs , or turning Afcert. 
 
 rf^HIS Figure is the fame with that before-going, which' l 
 1 have not lhadowed, on purpofe to make the Order to be the bet- 
 ter underftood. And for this reafon I have referved for this, 
 the Tree* or theNuellof the Afcent, which one may finde by making 
 at the center A,aRoundin Perfpedtive, or rather a demi-round, feeing 
 that we can fee but the half as is BC, at which demi -circle w r e muft 
 draw lines to the Center A, from all the divifions of the fquare of the 
 firft Plane, which will give G E F G H I K, which will divide this Arch 
 B C into eight parts. And from the fe&ion O we muft raife Perpen- 
 dicules, and obferve that they lhall divide juftly at the point, where we 
 muft place the fteps or degrees, which we lhall have made : as for ex- 
 ample, the ftep I, lhall be divided by the Perpendicule elevated from 
 its point upon the demi-round, as we fee in A: the other ftep after 
 which is the fecond, lhall be divided by the Perpendicular of the point, 
 which K lhall have made at the demi-round ; and fo of all the others. 
 The reft which is in the figure, as the doors and the windows, lhall 
 be made according to the foregoing Orders* 
 
u 
 
8 7 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 
 of Columns or Pillars in Perfpetfive. 
 
 T Hat which we are freaking of, is not only for the Cube, but ic 
 ought alfo to ferve for all that we would make round. For ex- 
 ample, if from the fquare A you would elevate a round peice, 
 ycu muft make around within this fquare, according to the ordinary 
 Orders* and at the height, which one would give to this piece, to make 
 alfo another fquare, and a round within, asisB. For to know to give 
 the 2 lines D E, which make the thicknefs, or the Diameter of the 
 round: We mull take notice where the round divideth the Diagonal 
 of the fquare, and to hold for a general maxime,thatic ought always to 
 be caken at the round pieces feen from the fide, ^.s it is in the figure C, 
 that the Perpendicalesare elevated from the fe&ion of theroundj upon 
 the Diagonal of the fquare, at the points D E. 
 
 For the pieces viewed by the Front, as the figure F, they ought al- 
 ways to ponefs the Demy-round G H I, and to elevate the Perpendicu- 
 les of the Diameter right G H, and from the one and the other, as well 
 on Front, as on Side, we muft elevate a line from the Center, which 
 fhali ferve to give the Diminutions to the Columns. 
 
 For thefe three pieces below befides that they ferve to make the o- 
 thers feen clearly, and with their lhadows, they ferve alfo for to lhew 
 how we mull proceed for the Columns.This piece of the midftK, is ex- 
 actly round, without ornament, nor intentto make any thererThe fecond 
 marked L, caufeth to be feen, that when we defire to make a bafe 
 there, we ought upon the fquare, which muft ferve for a Plinthe, where- 
 of M N is the upper part to make a double round whereof the diftance 
 from one to the other, may be the Proje&or of the bafe, and the round 
 from within the plane of the feaft of the Column , from which they 
 fhall raife the Perpendicules. 
 
 The third marked Ojis a Column with its Ornaments which every 
 one may make at his pleafure, and we muft take notice that the upper- 
 moft fquare of the Capital anfwer to the Plint he or top of the bafie. 
 
practical; 
 
 87 
 
8S 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 
 tfo tto rsU A* A* ciV rV xt<* . A\ r$\ A* nV A* r?!v A* .rV 4* . *A» JW/ft /V jj-^v S%* A*. 4* 
 
 of Certifies And Mouldings in Perfpeffive. 
 
 I N purfuit of Columns, which are the principal Ornament of Architedure, we 
 will fet the Cornifhes or Mouldings, witli their Projedors, which we have not 
 let hitherto, for fear of giving confiifion to the Elevations, which it behoveth to 
 be underft ood with clearnefs and eafinefs. 
 
 It is true that there are not many .Buildings made, which have not fome few Mouldings 
 and Projedor for their Ornament, for to make them more pleafing to the eye; where- 
 I thought fit to fet here the manner, not of framing them, feeing that dependeth on 
 the pleasure of everyone, nor to give them their Meafures and Projedors, for that 
 were to oblige my felf to fit down here, the Orders of Architedure, and a thou- 
 fand other Inventions of Ornaments, which one may finde elfewhere, and which I 
 fuppofe are known. But only to fet them into Perfpedive, according to the Orders 
 following, when any /hall have occafion for fuch an Order. 
 
 For to fet then the Ornaments for a Pilafter in Perfpedive, we muft take the Mea- 
 fures upon the middle line of fome oftier with its Ornaments, as is A B, of which ha- 
 ving taken the bredth, and made a fquare Plane in the ordinary way • and from this 
 fquare to elevate from all the Angles Perpendiculars, we /hall frame the body or fo~ 
 lid part of the Pilafter. 
 
 Then we muft only take that which projeds it felf fronuhebody^ for example, 
 the bafe of the Pilafter C, and tran/port its meafures as in !>£ for to fet it in Per- 
 fpedive round about the Pilafter : weinuft from the point of diftance F draw a line 
 Diagonal, which pafteth forth ot the fquare to the point E unto G, it is no matter 
 for ihe length : Then from the point A to make a Ray palling to ih e lower part of the 
 Projcdor H j and at the point where this Ray ihall divide the Diagonal at I, it fhall be 
 the advancement of the whole bafe : the fame Ray A H /hall give the Projedor of the 
 bo.tom, by dividing the other Diagonal at the point K : Then for the Projedor be- 
 fore, we muft from the point I draw a Parallel to the bafe, until that it divide the Di- 
 agonal, which /hall give the other Corner of ihe Projedor before at the point L- } then 
 drawing lines of the height of the Bafe unto thefe points, as are M to L, from D to I, 
 from N to K, you /hall have the bredth and the hight of all the Bafe •, The Capital! 
 is made of the fame faihion. Here is for the firft figures above. 
 
 Thofe below /hall Caufe the reft to be known, and /hall avoid Confufion. For the 
 Pi lifters O, we muft obferve that above P, where the line D H, bereth all the fedions 
 of the ba e • Wherefore from the point of fight A, we muft draw Rays, the which 
 palling by thedi vifions ofD H, muft marke them upon the lines D I, and N K • And 
 drawing Parallels from the points of D I, to M L, there will be no more then to give 
 the Turnings about,; or wheelings as the /hape of the Colum. When you /hall meet 
 with fquares, or Flat-bands, either above or below they are made by Perpendicular. 
 A > for ,.o make the Plinth, you muft raife Perpendiculars from the Points L I the 
 from the point of fight A, to pafs by the Corner of the PiinthQ^ it will give the 
 height upon the Perpend icules I, and K. Then L muft be equall to L« 
 
 I beleeve that this Inftrudion for the Bafe, will fufike for to make the Capital! be- 
 ing the fame Oder. This laft Pilafter R, is only for to caufe one to be feen without 
 bring mingled .vfth lines. We have broken them, for to make the Bafes and Capital] 
 to be fee n, no., having had fpace Enough for to make them appeare whole. 
 
P R A C Tit C A l; - s§ 
 
A great CcrrJjh above the Horizon in Perfpective. 
 
 I T is the fame Order widi that which we have explained, but as it is fomewhat 
 difficult by the multitude of lines, I thought it convenient to fet it down again 
 here, for to avoid confufion. 
 
 I fay then, that having taken the pourfill of the Projector and the Cornifli, that one 
 would make, we muft fet it at the place, where one would make it, as C which is the 
 pourfill is at the corner of the Wall A B, for to find the height which it ought to have, 
 and to make thofe below feen, we mult from the point of fight D, draw a Ray paffing 
 by the end of the pourfill E, as is D F-, then to make a line Diagonal from the point 
 of diftance H, paffing by the corner of the Wall B, and to continue it until that it di- ' 
 vide the Ray D E at the point F, from which you fliall draw the line F G, which mud 
 be the Angle in Perfpedive, for to receive all the meafures F G, the corner of the o- 
 ther end of the Wall K L, is drawn from the other diftance I, as being the other Dia- 
 gonal. 
 
 In the figure marked 2 . we fliall fee, that all the figures which are upon the line M N, 
 muft be tranfported by vifual Rays from the point of fight D, upon the line N O, 
 for to draw Parallels to the Horizon from all thefe points, which (hall give the whole 
 Cornifli perfed. But before we pafs any further, we muft mark , as I have already 
 faid, that all the flat-bands and fquares are made by Perpendiculars. For example, for 
 to make this great fquare of the Cornifli, having made the Wave or Ogee, and the filet 
 under the filet, which muft be the height of the fquare, we muft abafe the Perpendicule, 
 P QfThen for to know where it muft be divided for to make the under part be feen, we 
 muft draw from the point of diftance I, by the point above the quarter of the round R, 
 unto the Perpendicule PQ^and you fliall have that which you leek. That which I 
 have faid of the great fquare, muft be underftood of little ones, as are fmall mouldings, 
 the filets, &c becaufe that they muft all make that below to be feen. 
 
 The third figure flieweth, that having found all the points, and drawn Rays upon 
 this line, from the Angle S T, we muft there trace out or fhape the mouldings out 
 proportionally; I mean, that when thefe fliall projed themfelves, as this here doth, be- 
 caufe that its point of diftance is near, we muft help the mouldings, that is to fay , a 
 little bend down the quarter of the Round, fet up the Ogee, enlarge the filets, and 
 mark at one end the fame that at the other • as at V X, the fame that at S T after that, 
 there is no more but to draw parallels to the bafe, and all fliall be done 
 
 The fourth figure flieweth the Cornifli wholly made : I have drawn parallels from 
 all the points of the line of the Angle Y 2^ I have made an end of the Wall to pafs upon 
 the Cornifli, for to give to underftand, that one hath liberty for to make it throughout, 
 and that our rule is general for to make it where they would. 
 
P R A C T I C A U 
 
 S P 
 
$o 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 f$r rU .A ##<• /» xfcr <rJlr «!v x*r ,*$r »^v x*» xH xK X*V 
 
 For to find the under parte of the Great Projectors 
 
 F OR to find the Projedor of the Crown of the Body, or of the 
 Wall A; We muft from the Corner of the quarter of the round 
 B, make as 1 mall line of the length that one would have that it 
 come forth, as is B C, then from che point of fight D, to draw a Ray, 
 E, paffing by the end of the Meafure C. After that you make a Di** 
 gonall from the diftance F, and make it to pafs by the quarter of th e 
 Round B, and thefedion that it (hall make at the Ray D E,at the point 
 G,that fhallbe the under part, aswellof thebottomeas of the fide, as is 
 BH, the whichone may fee more deerly in theoppofit, in the body 
 marked K 
 
 The Projector of the Body, or Wall marked L, is made as the firft 
 marked A: There is only this difference, that theBody L, hath the Pro- 
 jector M N, greater by one half, then that above B C, for to Shew that 
 by the fame Order, one may make as great, and asfhort, as one will. 
 
 One may obferve further in this fame Body L, how we mull find 
 the Return of theProjed. and of the Hollow •, we muft from a quarter 
 of the Round of the bottom of the wall at the point O, draw a Dia- 
 gonal to the diftance oppofite P > and the fedion of this line upon the 
 Ray E D, (hall be the point for to make a little Parallels to theHorizon 
 R Q^which fhall be th t which was demanded. 
 
 This may ferve forall the fquares, whichare met within Cornifhes 
 and Mouldings asjwell great, as little. 
 
 The Body, or Wall, marked S, maketh the Mouldings of the Body 
 L, to befeen cleerly. 
 
PRACTICAL; 
 
a Qf the Cortiijhes and Mouldings under the Horizon. 
 
 T HE Orders are the fame with the foregoing^ . 
 
 Butbecaufe of an Accident which hapneth 
 fometimesby the diverfity of Horizons one might 
 be in fome trouble, not knowing the reaion where- 
 fore that cometh to pafs, 
 
 I fay then, that when we fee Ccrnifties, which 
 are below our eyes, and by confequence below the 
 Horizon^theAdvancings which theProje^Qrscaufe, 
 do hide from us,fometimes the half, and fometimes 
 lefs or more, according as one is railed abovethem. 
 
 For to finde juftly that which (hould be covered, 
 and that which (hould not be, we muft fet, as we 
 have faid,the Pourfil or Mid-line of the Moulding 
 at the Corner of the Body which we would adorn, 
 and having found the line of the Angle, as we have 
 faid in the Orders aforegoing, there we muft draw 
 the divifions of the Pourfil • and we (ha'l finde that 
 the fquare or the flat-band, will wholly cover the 
 A ftragal or (mail J^pultel below,or t he demi-round, ' 
 and will fuffer but the half of the Filet to be feen,* 
 As is to be feen, th$ having drawn a line from th# " 
 po nt of fight A, by the Pourfil B C, it divideth the j 
 Perpendicular of the line of tbe^ngle at the point 
 Dj which maketh known that which ought to be 
 covered;for the moulding below,ic is the fame thing 
 with the O ders forego? n<r* 
 
Ts r U ** /*< i n > ® 
 
 For Cornijhes with many ‘Returns. 
 
 W HEN there are many Returns in the Cor- 
 nifhes or Mouldings, they muft always take 
 their under-parts from the points of the diftances,as 
 may be feen, that having drawn the Rays A and 
 B, at the point of fight E : We mu ft from the point 
 of diftance C or D, make a Diagonal paffing by the 
 corner of a quarter of the Round O, until that it di- 
 vide the Ray A or B at the point I, from the which 
 point I we muft make a Parallel to the bafe, for to 
 have the under-par^or theProje<5tor of the fquare, 
 even as 1 have fa id at fol,98. 
 
 I would willingly have made a greater Cornifh, 
 feeing that it would not have bin more difficult,but 
 the paper hath obliged me to content my felf with 
 this. 
 
 if one would make Returns by the Ground, as 
 thefe are upon the Horizon, he muft obferve the 
 fame Order And for proof of that which I fay,turn 
 this Paper upfidedow% and you fhall fee the feme 
 
 effects. 
 
 *.f i B A 
 
PR A C TIC A L 
 
 A a i 1 j 
 
93 
 
 P E R’S P E C T I Y E. 
 
 
 For the Openings of Doors in Perfpeffive. 
 
 S Eeing that hitherto we have followed very near the Order which they keep in 
 raifing of Buildings-, whatfoever they be, we ought to follow in teaching the man- 
 ner of Garniihing them, and making them fitting for to lodge in : I will begin 
 by the doors of wood • afterwards we will fpeak of other Openings, as of Windows , 
 Cupboards, Chefts, &r. Then of Moveables, Tables, Beds, Chairs, Coffers, Settles* 
 
 B nches, &c, 
 
 All the doors, which are made for to open and fhut, depend of the Will of every 
 one, who may open them more or le-fs, as hepleafeth ^ wherefore I will teaeh to fet 
 them into Perfpedtive, at fuch opening as one would have. 
 
 We muff obferve that the Doors, Windows, Cupboarps, Chefts, and infhort all 
 things hat may open and (hut, do make always a demi-round in their whole opening. 
 
 1 he reafon is, that the fide which is faftned by the hinges or hooks, doth not ftir from 
 i s p r ace*, and the other fide moveth and maketh a demi-Circle, as a pair of Compares 
 would do. 
 
 For example, in Lhe Plane under the Figure, if the fide faftned be at the point A, and 
 A z e other fide at B, if you would open the door fully, the fide B fhall make the demi- 
 round BCD, whereof the center fhall be A, as one may fee from whence one may 
 kno that if the door hath theee feet of bredih, as thefe have • it fhall have alfo three 
 fee: for its Diameter A C •, And 6 feet for the Diameter entire BAD, of which fix 
 feet in length, and 3 of bredth, we muft make a Plane of 18 little fquares, for which 
 we Fhall make the demi-round ABCD, for to give a facility to make the fame demi- 
 j^unds in the Perfpe&ive. by obferving where the demCro$iud of the Plane divideth q| 
 t ? e li tie fquares, for to divide in the fame proportion thole of the Perfpedive, and 
 there to make a demi-round, which fhall take up as many of the little fquare s, and 
 fhall divide them in the fame place, as we fee at the door E, where the fe&ions are 
 marked, as in the plane below 1,2,3 -,4,5, 6, 7. 
 
 When o le would make an open door in Perfpedive, he muft upon its Plane make a 
 demi-round then to fet the point of the opening in what place he will , upon this 
 djmi-round , as for the door E, the point of the opening is at the point 2 . from this *" 
 [ oin: 2, he muft elevate a Perpendicular 2.H. And again from the fame point 2, draw 
 a line paTng by the corner of the door F, and continue it until that it divide the Ho- 
 rizon which is at the point G, from which, he muft draw another line, making it to pafs 
 by the other corner of the door I, and to continue it till it divide the Perpendicule rai- 
 fed from the point 2, which fhall be at the point H, and you fhall have the door open, 
 as is F I H,2. 
 
 All the Openings are made by the fame Rules, as are feen by the doors K and L • 
 the door K fheweth its out -fide, and the door L fheweth its infide * neverthelefs', the 
 one and the other are ordered in the manner as the firft^ the point accidental of K is the 
 point M, within the Horizon. And that of the door L is O. If one make to thefe 
 doors, l arrs , locks, and fuch like things, they muftbe d rawn from the fame accidental 
 point, as the bands and the lock of the door L,draw to the point O.Thefe are the points 
 which they call Accidental, as I have exprefTed in the beginning of our Orders, and, 
 all the Openings make but one within the Horizon, except two forts of Openings. The 
 one when the door is wholly opened, for then it hath its point at the point of fight, be- 
 cacfe i: h at the walk The other, when it is Parallels to the Horizon, becaufe the Pa- 
 rallels never divide themfelves but aredrawn right, as is the door N. 
 

 For the Openings of Windows in Perfpeffive. 
 
 A LL the difference that there is in the openings of windows,from thofe 
 of the doors, is y that the doors have the demi-round of their opening 
 upon the Plane, and the windows have it in the Air: by reafon that the 
 windows make their Openings being elevated from the Ground, and the 
 doors do grate upon it : wherefore we muftmake this demi-round above or 
 below the windows^ and within this demi-round to take the point for t 6 open 
 them. 
 
 For example, if the fide of the window hath 2 fmall fquares of bredth,as A 
 B, and that one give it its whole opening, it will take up two more fquares 
 C A,whereof A is the middle, and the center of the demi-circle A B C. But 
 by reafon that the windows are elevated from the Ground, the demi-round al- 
 fo muff be elevated, as they are here above the windows from the corners D 
 and E, which are the centers of thefe demi- rounds, which fhall be eafily fra* 
 med,raifing Perpendiculars from the lquares, which are between C and B, 
 until that they divide the Rays, which pafsby the corners of the windows 
 D E. And from thefe fedtions you muft draw to the bafe, and give them the 
 meafures of the little fquares of the plane 1,2,3. from which points 1,2,3. on 
 high, you muft draw lines to the point of fight F, which fhall divide the Pa« 
 rail Is of points, and frame the little fquares, for to make the rounds of the 
 openingSjwhlch fhall be taken in the fame manner as at the doors ; as if one 
 give within the higheft demi-round the point G, for the point of the opening 
 from this point G,you muft draw 2 lines, the one which falleth plumbe G H, 
 the other which paffeth by the corner of the windowE,for to divide theHori- 
 zon where it can, which is here the point L,from this point I you muft alfo a 
 line by the corner of the window K, until that it divide the line plumb ^t the 
 point FI, which fhall give the window openK E G Hjwe muft do the fame of 
 all the others, and take the point within the Horizon ; as L is the point for 
 the window M i and N is that of the window O. The window P hath none, 
 being Parallel to the Horizon, 
 
 The windows which are oppofite are made by the fame method," without 
 the confufion of lines, the one and the other are equal with the wall, for te 
 iacili tate the ordering thereof. The door at the bottom is made as we have 
 laid, and the window followeth the Method of thefe. 
 
 For the Opening of the windows with Ch^mf ret tings. 
 
 T H E Order of this is as the others upon the fide of the wall, except 
 that thefe cannot be opened wholly, by reafon of the tiiicknefsof the 
 — Chamfring^which caufeth,that the whole demi-circle is not allowed, 
 but as much as the opening can have of it. They ought always to take their 
 point within the Horizon, as we fee Qand R, for the opening of the windows 
 oa high. that below is ParalUl to the Horizon. 
 
Bb 
 
s* MRS PECT I V E 
 
 of divers other Openings. 
 
 T HE Openings of Cupboards and of C hefts, are arleaft as He* 
 ceffary, as thofe of Doores,and Windows 5 and the fault would 
 not be lefs to forget thefe, then not to fet down thofe. Lee us 
 fee the Order in thefe two Figures* 
 
 The Cup- boards A, are opened according to the Orders of the Win- 
 dows, and it would be lofs of time to bufie Ones- LI f in repeating them 
 here, we are to obferve only, that one height is Parallel to theHorizon, 
 and the other below draweth tothe point of diftance B. 
 
 This Manner of Shop, which is on the otherfide, hath its O pening 
 with two Shuts, whereof one is lifted on high, and the other cometh 
 down below, and each maketh its demi-round from the CenterC and D 
 which one maketh with theCompaflesthen we may take theOpenings 
 where w r e will, as here at the point E, from which we draw a Rayto 
 the point of fight F, until! wediv-ide thedemi-roiinisof the other end, 
 atthepoint G, from^which points E G, wemuftdraw tothe Centers 
 G D, for to h'aye the Shuts, which clofe up the Shop as we fee. 
 
 In the figure below, there are 3 Cherts opened feveral ways for to open- 
 thefirft H,I have made the quarterof a round M,inPerfpedtive, follow- 
 ing the Meafure of the little fquares of the Plane, keeping the bredth 
 of the Cheft, as this is of 2 little fquares, from which we muft raifePer* 
 pendiculars, and thereof frame the halfor quarter of a Round, for the 
 opening which we may take at pleafure, as here the point N, from 
 which we muft draw a Parallel unto theother quarter of the round €>., 
 and from thefe i points N O, to draw to the Center P, If we would 
 open it wider, we muft make a demi-round inftead of a. quarter. 
 
 The Chert I, is the mofteafie of all the Openings ; for having taken 
 the bredth of the Cheft QR, we muft from the center R, make with 
 the Compaffes the demi-round Q^S. Then to take what opening you 
 will, as T, and to draw a Ray to the point of fight V, which lhall di- 
 vide the other demi-round at che-pointX, and fromchefe 2 points T X, 
 to the corners R. 
 
 He that would open them-furtfeer, hath but to fet the point of th e p- 
 pening higher, within the demi-rounds as Y,is to the Coffer K; All the 
 reft is ordered like as la the Coffer I, as one may fc e. 
 
BbH 
 
- ' 
 
 s S' PERSPECTIVE. 
 
 .eV A .<r$> A f|» 
 
 sxxxxkx 
 
 Of planes* And the frjl elevation s of moveables* 
 
 I Had fet thefe planes in their order, among the others, had there not been one 
 confideration, which made me defer them until now, which is, that if I had hand- 
 led them in the beginning, without making known the neceflity thereof , they 
 would have been alfo too foon forgot and held^as unufeful:they are now more feafon- 
 able, and without doubt they will be well received, pleafing, and learned with plea- 
 fure, feeing there are not only moveables, nor peices of houfhold-ftuff, which depend 
 not thereon*, 
 
 The fir ft plane A, ferveth for Beds, Tables, Chairs, Stools, low Stools, &c. The 
 other B, which beareth in length,, two times its breadth, ferveth for long Tables,, 
 Cabinet, Court Cup-boards, Coffers, Trunks, The third C, which is long and 
 narrow, ferveth for Benches or Forms, and other things which have need of fix Feet,, 
 or Pillars, as great Tables, and Cup-boards* 
 
 The knowledge that one hath of other planes, will give the facility of making 
 thefe, feeing there is nothing but to fet their meafures upon the bafe, to draw them to 
 the point of fight, and to abridge them by the points of diftances. 
 
 For example, for the plane A, you muft fet upon the bafe thefe two meafures D E, 
 and draw them to the point of fight F, then from one of the diftances, you muft draw 
 to one of thefe meafures, as. here E, to the diftance G, and where that ftiall divide the 
 Rayes at the points HT, you muft dratv parallels, for to frame the 4 little fquares, 
 whichone may make to be for as much, or as little as he will. Becaufe for a Table,, 
 they muft be of more bignefs then for a fettle or ftool, that is to fay.,* that they mull 
 have more breadth, for if for this we allow 2 inches, for that there muft be four. 
 
 The plane B, is made of the fame manner, except that by reafon of its length, which 
 as the double of the breadth, we muft draw from the point B, to one of the diftances* 
 for to find the half K, for if one Ihould draw from th^point L, he would divide at the 
 point M, which would be the whole fquare- and we would have but the half Where* 
 fore from the point K, we muft draw parallels to the fe&ions of the Ray ^ and from 
 the corner L, we (hall divide alfo the Ray for the firft fquares at the point N* 
 
 The other plane C, hath no need of explication- for we fee well, that it is made as 
 that A,’ and that you muft double the fquare for to have 6 little fquares 0 
 We fee at the figure below, that from all the Angles of thefe fquares, you muft raife 
 Perpendiculars for to begin to give the frame to thepi eces that we (hall make here- 
 after. , 
 
91 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 1 
 
 of the Eleva tien of Moveables* 
 
 H Aving raifed the Perpendiculars of the Plane, as aforefaid, we mull in fome 
 Place of the Pidure make the line of Elevation, upon the which we (hall 
 fet the crofs-lines or Travers, and the height that one would give them. 
 
 For example, the line C D fhall be the line of Elevation, and C E and D f fhall 
 be the bredths for the Travers • from all thefe four points, we muft draw in forae 
 place within the Horizon, as here at the point G. Then having from the Planes A 
 B, railed the Perpendiculars from all the Angles, we muft from the fame Angles draw 
 Parallels to the bafeunto the Ray C G, which is the bottom of the line of Elevation, 
 which will give the points i ,2,3,4. which we muft raife into Perpendiculars ; and the 
 fedions which thefe Perpendiculars fhall make, at the Ray C E, D F, fhall be the 
 points to divide the Perpendiculars of the Planes, whither we carry them with the 
 Compaffes, or that we divide them with Parallels, as we fee in the Figure. Tha c 
 drawing a Parallel from the point E, we fhall divide the firft Perpendicules of the 
 Planes A B, at the points O, from which drawing to the point of fight H, we fhall 
 divide the other Perpendiculars of the Planes at the points P-, and doing the fame 
 from the point F, we fhall frame a Cube pierced round on all fides, or compofed of 
 fquare pieces • the which being well under flood, we fhall eafily make all the Pieces 
 following, and whatfoever other may be. 
 
 It is eafie to fee that the two frames or feet of the Tables land K, are made by 
 the fame Order that thofe above A B, they having no difference but in the Barre be- 
 low, which is more elevated in the line of Elevation at the point L, which giveth the 
 Barre M, and that which is under may be made intoBowles, or to leave the feet fquare 
 as they are. 
 
 For the latter frame N and Q, there is no more then in I and K, except that they 
 are feen by the Angle, and the others are feen in front : the Planes of thefe I and K 
 draw to the point of fight R, and thefe draw to the diftances S T. 
 
 Thefe Figures fhews the ordering of all Pieces of Houfhold-ftuffe •, for ex- 
 ample, if of the Figures lor K, we would make a bed, there is nothing but to 
 give to it its bredth and height : for it is the fame Ord# in all the reft • and if one 
 would make a low ftool or Hat bafe for a Table • there is nothing but to make that a- 
 bove for a ftool • befides that above, we muft give it more height then bredth, but all 
 SiK reft is ordered in the fame manner* 
 
 ) 
 
*1 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 
 For to nuke the upper part of Fables , Stools, &c. 
 
 H Aving raifed the Perpendlcules from the plane , as we have 
 fpoken, and given the height , that we would they Ihould 
 have, we lhall have the frame, for to make there an upper 
 part wholly by the line, and which paffeth not the frame; we have only 
 to leave the upper part of the cube, without marking any thing there, 
 and this lhall be the uppermoft,be it of a Table, Stoolsjow-ftools, &c. 
 
 But if one would that the upper part ihould have any Proje&or or 
 Border, we muft from one of the corners of the Frame, or foot of the 
 Table, draw a little parallel as A B, and upon this parallel fet th mea- 
 fure of the Projedor one would give it, as we have fet here A B. Then 
 from the diftances Cand D, we muft from the corners of the fquare 
 made of points, which is the breadth of the Frame, or feet of the Table, 
 draw fmall occult lines, as are A E, Now for to know how this mea- 
 fure A B, lhall give in Perfpedive the breadth equal to all the fides, 
 and corners of the Table 5 We muft from the point of fight F, draw a 
 Ray, palling by the point B, and continue it until that it divide the 
 line CAE, which lhall be at the point G s from this point G we muft 
 make a parallel which lhall divide the other occult line at the point H. 
 Then drawing from the points G H, to the point of fight F, we lhall 
 divi le the other lines Diagonal of the corners a t the points L and K,and 
 then we lhall have the upper part of the Table , with the Projedor 
 which we have given to the line A B. 
 
 For the thicknefs of this upper part, we may give it at pleafpre. 
 
 This order may ferve for to make the upper parts in all whatfoever 
 We would, whether they be above or below the Horizon, whether they 
 be on the front, or fides : In Ihort, they make them all after the fame 
 manner. 
 
 1 
 
RRSPECTI-VE 
 
 ,*U rfa }$■* .«&» ?&-• fiV «l* 
 
 y <t>tv sh, , 
 
 -'*’- ife&ifc fe& k A A A •'*'- ■•*’■ 
 
 For to Elevate a Court-Cupboard and Cabinet-. 
 
 H Aving made the Plane* and Elevated Perpendiculars from all 
 the Angles, as we have faid, we (hall let upon the line AB, 
 which (hall ferve here for the line of Elevation, the Meafures 
 that we will give, as well to the diftance of the boards, as in their thick- 
 nefs,as are C D E, from the which points C D E, we muft draw Pa- 
 rallels to the Bafe,. unto the other Afcent or Column F G. Then from 
 the points which (hall be marked upon this Afcent G F,we mud draw 
 Rays to the point of fight H, unto the other Afcent of the Hollow I K. 
 This Hollow is given at pleafure, fetting upon the bafe,that which we 
 will give it 5 for example, for to have the hollow or bredth of this 
 Cupboard, I have fet the Meafure F L, from this point L, we muft 
 draw to the diftance M, and where the Ray F H (hall be divided at the 
 point L, that ftiall be the place of the lad Afcent. 
 
 The Cup-board which is over againft on the other fide, is ordered 
 in the fame manner, and for to finde the Meafure of this little Cabinet 
 which is in the midft, bore up by two little Columns? we muft take the 
 points L P, which are in the midft of QN, and the bredth of the little 
 Cabinet, and draw them to the diftance O 5 and where the Ray NH 
 fhall be divided, we muft draw Parallels to the bafe, which (hall rivide 
 the Ray T H at the point V, from which railing Perpendiculars, we 
 fhall have for the little Cabinet of the middle. 
 
 The great Cabinet of the fecond figure, are of the fame Order with 
 the Court Cup-boards above. There is none but that of the midft* 
 which is at the bottom, which we muft a little explain, by reafon that 
 it is of the front, and that one might be-in feme trouble for to deter- 
 mine its hollow, I fay then, we muft frame its Plane, as we have faid 
 heretofore, and as we fee it finilhed in the half ; for to give it the Tra- 
 verfes equal to the firft in the fore-part ; we muft from the firft Afcent 
 R, draw occult Rays to the firft Perpendicular of the hollow S,' and 
 there to make little fe&ions, from which we muft draw little Para lels 
 to the bafe j and wc fhall have that we defire, 
 
 N " 
 
 / 
 
IW 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 For the Elevations- of Chairs, 
 
 F O R to elevate a Chair, you muft of the Meafures A BC,make 
 a Plane by the ordinary Rules, and from the Angles of this. 
 Plane, elevate Perpendicules, and follow the fame Method that 
 wehavegiven, fpeaking of the feet of theTable, orof the frames 
 for windows, without the upper part i there is nothing more in this 
 then the Back of the Ghair, which one may make of fuch an height 
 as they will .• here it is the height of A, unto the feat K, and this height 
 is as well for the Angle Chairs, as. for thofe with Refts to lean on. We 
 feefufficiently by the Figure, that for to make them with backs, we 
 muft only-prolong the Perpendicules of the Afcentson the fid", that we 
 would make it, as is here the firft A E and from the point E drawing 
 to the point of fight G. We fliall divide where it ought the Afcent ele- 
 vated from the Plane, or from the foot H, which Rail be the point F. 
 The reft is dear enough by the Figure. 
 
 When we would have Refts there, we need only to prolong the j 
 cents before, as they have made thefe behind for the back. Then to 
 make there a Barr which ferveth for a Reft, asisLM. 
 
 In the fecond Figure below you fee a Form or a Bench garnilhed 
 with carving, and two little Couches to reft in, whereof one hath the 
 back turned on thisfide, and the other view’d obliquely : It would be 
 tolofe the time to inftrud how to make them, feeing that the Order to 
 elevate them, is the fame with the foregoing, which we have given for 
 the Moveables, which is, that having made the Plane^we muft elevate 
 Perpendicularsj&c. 
 
Gciij.i 
 
One other fajluons of Moveables in Perfpective. 
 
 C Ertain moveables, which clofe themfelves* Thofe which they make to ferve 
 for Seats, Tables, and Beds, &c» are Very eafie to fet into Perfpedive 
 
 We muft only make the elevation, as if for a Cub s as is A B, C D, or E F 
 G He Then to make there two Diagonals A C, and B D, for that of the midft of the 
 Tront, or E H, and F G, for that of the fide, which (hall ferve to bring in the 2 crofFes, 
 to take notice, that there be an half which entreth within the other, as G K, do pais 
 within H I* and the one and the other are faftned by the midlHbr to make them bend. 
 
 In this piece which is below, I have made a Table upon Trefiels, that we may have 
 the fmalleft moveables for to fet them into Perfpedive We muft from the meafures 
 A B, which is the interval for the Feet of the Treifels, draw to the point ol light C .• 
 Then having fet upon the bafe the thicknefs of the fame Feet, as are D and E, we muft 
 draw them to the point of diftance F, and obferve where we fhall divide the Ray B C 
 for to draw little parallels to the bafe, which fhall give the little fquares, or the planes 
 of the Feet, as we fee in A B, between this diftance D and E, we muft fet the breadth, 
 which we will give to the top of the TrelTel, and draw it to the diftance F, which fhall 
 divide the Ray B C, at the points G H, from the which points G H, we muft elevate 
 2 Perpendiculars, to fuch an height as we would have, as here at the point L Then 
 from the Angles of the fmall fquares of the plane, to draw lines bending unto the piece 
 L The fecond TrelTel is ordered all. alike with the firft 
 
 The form K, nor the Table, or high Stool L,' have no need of Explication , nor In» 
 ftrudion for to fet them into order, feeing that they have nothing, which is nor com* 
 mon to them, with the fore-faid pieces* 
 
ToT 
 
.£?■ I 
 
 F F R $ F E C T I V E, 
 
 Of Moveables fet x'ithoxt Order. 
 
 W Hen the moveables are fet in order along by the Wall, or according to 
 the Rays and the bafe, it is eaile to fet them into Perfpedive, by the Rides 
 that we have given^ but fuppofing that one fet them by chance, and wiihour 
 order, as thefe are, we muft do as I fhall fay. You mi ft make the Geometrical plane 
 R S T, for the plane of three Chairs, which you mull abridge by the Order that we 
 have fet at the irregular figure, Fol 40. and the planes (hall remain turned, as are the 
 Chairs, or rather the Chairs turned, as are the planes . 
 
 I fay then, that having fet thefe planes into Perfpedive, as it is taught, you muft fet 
 the Rule along by one of the fides, for to fee what accidental point , you fftall have 
 within the Horizon : For example, having fet the Rule along by the fide A B , I fnall 
 have within the Horizon the point C, for the accidental point, at which we ought to 
 draw all the lines of this fide, and of that which is oppofite to it, as we fee that A and 
 D, draw to the fame point C : It is true that every plane fet irregularly muft have 2 ^ 
 But they meet fometimefo far within the Horizon that it is a hazard when one can 
 find them both together Thefe have each one within the Horizon, as A B, giveth C» 
 A D, which is the other fide, fhould give another point, but our paper is not long e- 
 nough. E F, giveth G AndB I, giveth K, for thefe (mall fquares 1.2. 3. 4. they 
 are the plains of the Feet of thefe Chairs, which one may make more large , or more 
 ftreight, at the pleafure of the Artift. 
 
 Now from thefe planes, you muft elevate Perpendicules from all the Angles , and 
 fet on the fide a line of elevation M N, upon the which we muft fet the meafure for the 
 Travers, as O, fhal) be for the Bars below, P, for the bars of the feat. And Q^fhall 
 be for the backs of the Chairs, All being difpofed thus, we muft from the Angles of 
 the plane draw parallels to the bafe, unto the line of Elevation, and at the fedion to e- 
 Tvate Perpendicules, which fhall give the meafures, as we have faid of other figures 
 heretofore 
 
 All the lines of the fides ought to draw to the point accidental! of the plane : For 
 
 example, in the chair of the midft, all the fides ought to draw to the point G, which i s 
 the point of the plane, as I make it to be feen in the figure. 
 
 ♦ 
 
10Z . 
 
JO'S* 
 
 PE R S P E C T I V E 
 
 J;* r t* rfc- «U *lf* tUv v *V A A /'V .A. A j»V ^V\fV A/A • jf'H v *4\, v *tr> v 4»> *V 
 
 o/ Move al>les lying or thrown upon the Ground* 
 
 F Romthe fame Plane of the Chairs aforegoing, which are upon 
 their feet, it is eafie ta make thefe which are cart upon the 
 Ground, 
 
 We muftraife Perpendiculars from all the Angles of the Plane, and 
 give to the Side lying the fame Meafures, as to the fide upright : For 
 
 example, having raif’d Perpendiculars from all the Angles of the 
 Plane, we fhall have the bredth M, which is in the Chair lying upon 
 its fide, which draweth to the point K ; we mu ft doublethis Meafure 
 M, which will give O for the Barre below of the Chair, and the Per* 
 pendicules elevated from the Plane, will give the Barr of the Seat P. 
 from which drawing to the point K, we lhall divide the other Perpen- 
 diculars of the front at the place that it ought, for to make the fame 
 Barrs appear from all the fides whence they may be feen; for the height 
 of the back of the Chair, there is but only to give to It the fame Mea* 
 fare that the Seat hath of height; And for the back of that in the 
 rnidft, you muft double the Diagonal on the Plane, and take notice 
 where it divideth the Rays or Afcents lying R S. the reft is clear e- 
 nough. 
 
 The tw© other Pieces which areunder the feet upwards ate very eafie 
 to make s the one draweth to the point of fight T, theothertothe point 
 of diftance V X, the line of Elevation is Y Z. 
 
 The Order for to elevate thefe is the fame, as to make them upon 
 their feet, that is to fay, .that we muft raife thefe Perpendiculars from 
 she Angles of the Plane, and from the fame Angles to draw to the line 
 of Elevation, which will give the Meafures which we muft give to eve; 
 ry Afceat, and the place for the Travers * well above as below, . 
 
JJl.ACtlC A« 
 
 m " 
 
io 4 P E R S P E C T I V E 
 
 For to fet Altars into Perfpe stive a 
 
 T HE Order of Altars, is the fame with that of the frames of a long Table : that 
 which is more in this, is the Round of the midft, the Borders of the Table-cloth, 
 and the Laces which (hall be found in their place, doing that which folioweth. 
 Firft, for the body of the Altar, w.hich we fee in front there is no difficulty : for ha- 
 ving given to it the height and length, there is nothing but to draw from all the points 
 above th? bafe, to the point of fight E, and from the fedions that thefe points fhali 
 give to the line of the bottom of the Altar,you muft raife Perpendicules for the Round 
 of the midft, it is made with the Compafs. The reft is clear enough within the Figure. 
 
 For to make an Altar on the fide, we muft fet the bredth and height, which we 
 ffiould give it at the place where we would begin it, as is A B the bredth, and B D 
 the height. Then from BD and C to draw to the point of fight E, feeing that B F is 
 the length of the body of the Altar, and that we would give the fame to this, we muft 
 from the point F draw to the diftance G, and take notice where we fhali divide the 
 Ray B E, and from the fedion elevate a little Perpendicular, until that it touch the 
 Ray D at the point H, and from H to make a little Parallel, which fhali give I at the 
 Ray C, and then we fhali have the upper part of the Altar CDHh for to have thefe 
 two laces which are on one part, and the other of the Round ; the points K L will give 
 them upon the Ray BE, by drawing them to the diftance G, and M will give the- 
 bredth of the Borders of the Table-cloth ^ and having taken the meafure B M, we 
 muft bring it to D, which will give O, for the bredth of the Border of the Table- 
 cloth on high As concerning the Round, I will not repeat that, for I have fpoke of 
 it elfewhere, where any may have learned, how it is fet into Perfpedive, it is enough ' 
 that we know, that from all the divifions we muft draw to the diftance G : And at the 
 iedions of the Ray B to raife Perpendicules > then to take thefe fame Meafures, and 
 tranlport them from Bunto O, as are P And from all thefe Meafures to draw to the 
 point of fight E, and to oblerve where they fhali divide the occult Perpendiculars, 
 tor to make by thefe points a crooked line, which fliall give the Rounds in PerfpecHve, 
 If in ftead of thefe laces, and of the Round, there were an Embroidery, we fhould ufe 
 the fame Order for to abbreviate it 
 
 In the Figure below I have made the fame Altar without line, and adorned with a 
 Crofs and two Candlefticks ^ for to finde the place of thefe Candlefticks, we muft 
 prolong the line of the comer of the Altar, as is QJ& • then from the diftance G 
 draw a line by the corner of the Altar T, and to continue it until that it divide that 
 R ; and this line QR fhali be the length of the Altar, equal to B F of the firft figure, 
 upon the which we fhali fet the Meafures of the Croft and of the Candlefticks, as are 
 V for the Crofs, and S for the Candlefticks - from all thefe points S V vve muft draw 
 to the diftance G, and take notice that at the fe&ions of the Ray (FE, we muft draw 
 little Parallels, which we fhali divide by the Ray S E, and will give thefquares above 
 the Altar X for the Croft We muft leave the fquare for the foot, and from the midft 
 of the fquare elevate the Crofs ^ for to finde the Meafure of the Arms of the Crofs, we 
 ipuft from the corners of the fquare raife the occult Perpendiculars, as it Is mark’d Y, 
 and draw to the point of fight E for the Candlefticks Of this fquare we muft make 
 a Round- and obferve where it fhali divide the Diagonal, for to elevate thefe Per- 
 pendicules, which fhali give the bredth of the Bafons, from the which we muft draw 
 tonhe point of fight E, from the middle fquare or round foot of the Candleftick, we* 
 muft elevate a Perpendicular for the Body of the Candleftick, and for the Taper which* 
 we fhali make as high as we will: for to proportion it, we muft from the top of the fiift 
 draw to the point of fight E, the refthath already been faid i the Figure will caufe us to 
 rememierrhe Orders, 
 
PERSPECTIVE. 
 
 ,4* A .A* all* A* ft* A. «4b - fJS* v *V 
 
 Of Merchants Shops in Perfective. 
 
 Rdinarily Merchants Shops are compaffed about with Shelves or 
 Boxes, for to lay there and keep their Merchandize. 
 
 The Rule or Order for to make thefe Boxes, is as it were the fame with 
 that of the doors and windows : For example, if inftead of the thicknefs of the Wall, 
 in the order of the windows ^ You fet in this the board A B from the point B ,. you 
 muft draw to the point of fight C : For the under part, or bottom of the Boards, 
 from the point B, having fet upon the bafe the dillances, and the tneafures of the 
 Boards, or afcents E F G, you muft from thefe 3 points draw to the points of diftance 
 D, which fhall give upon the Ray B, the fedion H I K, for to raife the Perpendicu- 
 lars there. 
 
 For to have the boards a crofs, we muft fet fuch a number, as we will give upon the 
 hoard A B, or only upon the firft Perpendicule B O, as are the tneafures L MN O, 
 from the which points we muft draw to the point of fight C, and we fhall have the 
 boxes in the fedion of the Perpendicules at the points P ^ Then from the fame fedion 
 P, we muft draw little parallels to the bafe, which fhall give the corner 0 1 the box, by 
 Separating the fide from the upper part, or the under. 
 
 For the boxes in the Front, there is nothing but to draw Rays from the points , or 
 meafures E F, and at the fedion of the line of the hollow K q,to raife Perpendicu- 
 lars R S • And for the Travers to draw parallels from all the divifions which fhall be 
 found upon the Perpendicule K, as are F« 1. P. 2. P« 3. P.4. 
 
 For the boxes of the other fide, where there are afcents in fquare for to uphold the 
 boards, we fhall have their breadth, drawing to the point of fight C, the meafures T 
 G, and for to have their plane, or fquare, we muft from the meafures A E F, draw to 
 the diftance V, which fhall give upon the Ray T C, the fedion, X Y by the which 
 we muft draw little parallels, until that we divide the Ray T G, at the point Z. and 
 from the Angles of thefe little fquares to raife Perpendicules which fhall be the afcents: 
 as we fee clearly in the figure. 
 
 The figure below fheweth a Shop- already to receive fuch moveables^ as one would 
 put there, and to furnifh the Boxes with that which you fhall pleafe. For a Library, 
 we muft fill them with Books. For an Apothecary with IittleBoxes,anl Pots. For a Mer- 
 cer, with bundles of fluffs. In fhort^for all that you would, according to their occafions® 
 
I©# PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Of the out 'fide of Buildings $ 
 
 H itherto we have fpoken of all that belongeth to the in fide of houfes, buildings 
 Churches, &c. Now we will give fome orders for the out-fide. 
 
 Many of the Rules and Orders, that we have given for the in-fide of Hou- 
 fes, may ferve for the out-fide. For example, the Rule which is for to fet the doors 
 and the windows, in what place one would within, the Wall is fufiicient alone for the 
 out-fide of all forts of buildings, feeing that on the out-fide of the houfe- there appear- 
 tth no other thing then doors and windows. But if they be enriched with Ornaments, 
 we have alfo given, how they ought to be fet into Perfpeftive,if any have forgot them 
 they may have recourfe thither. 
 
 When there are Windows in Front, as A, and that one would fet them in a return^ 
 which have the fame meafures, we n uft tranfport thefe meafures upon the bafe, 
 as are B B B, equal to A A A, to draw them to the point of diftance C, and to take 
 notice where they fhall divide the Ray D E,at the points F, and from thefe points to 
 raife Perpendiculars which fhall be the afcents of the windows in the Return. 
 
 For the Travers, we muft continue thofe of the window in Front, unto the Perpen- 
 dicular D, which fhall be the points I, which we muft draw to the point of fight E, 
 for to divide the Perpendicules F, and to give the crofs bars to the window of the Re- 
 turn. 
 
 When there fhall be a greater number of Windows, there fhall be nothing elfe to 
 4o,but to continue their Rays, for to give them the fame meafure and height of the 
 croifes, as is to be feen on the other fide, at the houfe which hath 2 windows, by the 
 means of the fame Rays For the breadth or thicknefs of the Jawmbs, and croffes of 
 the windows in Front, we muft fet it upon one of the Travers, as it is at that below K 
 H, and from the corner of the window K, draw to the point of fight E , and from 
 the point H to the diftance C, for the window A. And to the diftance L, for that of 
 the ether fide, and at the fedion of thefe two laft lines, we muft raife a Perpendicular 
 H M *. And then from all the corners of the window draw to the point of fight And 
 from the fe&ions or points which they fhall give upon this Perpendicuie FI M, 
 we muft draw parallels, which fhall be the thickneffes of the Croffes, or Travers: The 
 thicknefs of the Jawmbs of the midft N, fhall be taken drawing from the corner N, to 
 the poin: of fight : And where we fhall divide the thickneffes of the Travers at the 
 point Qj to raife a Perpendicular QJl. 
 
 For the thicknefs of the windows in Return, you muft fet it at the corner of the 
 Wall, upon the Perpendicuie D, as is the diftance I O, and from the points O , to 
 draw to the point of fight E Then to make little parallels from all the corners of 
 the windows as S T, which fhall divide the Ray O, and fhall give the thicknefs at the 
 point S. Thefe rules ferve for all forts of windows, be they high or low. 
 
 In the figure below, we may fee a door abridged by the order that we have given 
 elfewhere-.as alfo all that is there, is eafie enough to underftand and practice by the in- 
 ftrudions afore-going. 
 
g ft A C T I C h L| 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 For to fet the' Roofs of Houfe s in Perfective, 
 
 T H E Roofs are different in height, according to that whereof they are made: 
 thofe of llate are the moft right • their ordinary Meafure is the Triangle Equilate- 
 ral, that is to fay, that the bending of the Roof is equal to the bredth of the houfe, 
 as one may fee by the little Figure that I have fet the lowcft,that C A or C B is equal to A.B 
 Others fee this bredih A B, for the middle top D C, which is the higheft, but that is not to 
 ordinary, as this D C : for the fiat Tyle,they allow but the two thirds of the height of thofe 
 of Slate, or of the bredth of the houfe, as one may fee A E B: for the Tha;ch,which is a Co- 
 vering commonly ufed , they allow but the halt of the bredth, as if AFR And ior rbe 
 hollow Tyle,they allow only a third of the bredth for the defeent, as is A 9 B 
 
 Before we pafs any farther, we muft know that which I call the middle Top, are Pieces 
 elevated Perpendicularly upon the Beams which bear the Ridg where all the rafters do meet, 
 as is G H The rafters are pieces of wood that give the defeent of the Roof, as is H LThe other 
 Pieces which are fet in the corner, and which go unto the middle Top, are called Stays, and 
 are ordinarily longer then the Rafters, as is H K. 
 
 Three forts of Roofs are in ufe, Pavilions, Pynions, and Appends, or Pent-houfe like 
 The Pavillions have four fides, the Pinions have but two, and the Appends but one- 5 for to 
 make a Paviilion in Perfpe&ive, we muft know the place of the Balls or middle tops, for 
 to draw the ftays thither : the which hath made me make this Geometrical Plane LMNO, 
 for to fhew that of the bredth of the houfe L N, we mu ft make a fquare LMNP, from 
 which we fhall draw two D agonals, which fhall divide themfelves at the point Qj fome 
 fet the Bali at this point Q, but that is too much advanced, and’ maketli this bending of the 
 end lie too fiat : it harninore comelineis when it isftraighter •, wherefore we muft advance 
 
 it towards the wall L N, by the third part of the diftance QJR, which fhall be the point S, and 
 by this point S we muft draw a Perpendicule upon the line N P, which fhall be T, Then to 
 tranfport thefe Meafures L T and T M, upon the bafe, and draw them to the point of di- 
 ftance, which is here farther off then ordinary, and to obferve where they fhall divide 
 the Ray V and from the fe&ions to elevate Perpendicules unto the height of the wall, 
 which fhall give the points X, from which me muft draw Parallels to the bafe, unto the other 
 RayL Themirom the midft of the wall Y, to draw to the point of fight, for to divide 
 thofe Parallels at the point Z, and from thefe points to elevate the Balls ^ for to give the 
 height to thefe Balls, we muft know wherewith we would’cover them, and according to that 
 to give them the Meafure that we have fpoken of, fuppofing that it be of Slates ; we muft of 
 the bredth of the wall make a Triangle equilateral 1, 2, 3. And from the point 3 to draw 
 to the point of fight, a nd to divide the Ball at the point 4. At which point 4 we muft draw 
 lines from the corners of the Houfe, which will give the fhape to the Paviilion 
 
 For the Roofs with Pinions there is not fo much to order, we muft only of the bredth 
 of the wall 5,6, make aTriangle equilateral 5,6,7.and as much on the other end of the wall, 
 which /hall give the point 8. Then to joynthis 7 and 8, the Roof will have its fhape and 
 ks meafure.. 
 
 The Figures on the other fide db fhew the fame thing, without being confufed with lines: 
 This proje&ing which goeth beyond the Roof, is made according as one will. 
 
 This Houfe on the Floor is covered with a Paviilion, which is made by the fame Or- 
 ders as that on the fide. 
 
 In this Figure where are the Letters, I have fet the Horizon on very high, for to make 
 the upper part of the houfes to be feen,and to give the more eafinefs to underftand’the Order ^ 
 but as this is feldom met with, I have fet the oth^r Figure above, where the Horizon is low, 
 as it is ordinarily, which neverthelefs is not therefore any other Rule for to make the Roof, 
 then that below, as one may fee by the Figure 
 
So S' PERSPECTIVE 
 
 • W 
 
 The reft of the Roofs in Respective, 
 
 I N the figure aforegoing, we have fet the Roofs with fmall PInacles 
 view’d in front, to which we muft give the Triangle equilateral 
 for their height, when we do. make the m of flate:lf they make them 
 of other things, as of Tile or Thatch we muft take their meafures at 
 the little figure below. 
 
 For to fet this falhion of Roofs in return we muft fet upon the bafe 
 from the foundation of the houfe , the breadth that it hath as is A 
 B^and of this breadth to frame a Triangle according to the height that 
 we would give to the Roof, as to this, which hath a Triangle equilate- 
 ral, whereof C D, is the height ivhich muft be fet Perpendicularly at 
 the firft corner of the houfe, atthe whole height of the Wall as is E F. 
 Then to take the breadth of the houfe C, which is the midft of A B, 
 and to draw it to the diftance, and where it ihall divide the Ray A, at 
 the point G, to raife a Perpendicule-, then you muft from the point F 
 draw to the point of fight X, and the fed ion thatfhall be made of the 
 Perpendicule H, ihall be the point of the Pmacie, to which you muft; 
 draw from the corners of the houfe E I, if one would have there any 
 advancings , he may fet them there at his pleafure as we may fee on the 
 other fide K. 
 
 For the doping we muft only prolong the line where one would fet 
 the top of the Roof, as is here the line L M, and to give it fuch a bend- 
 ing as we would. To this, there is as much of the height M N, as the 
 houfe hath of breadth N O, if from the points M O, we draw to the 
 point of fight X, we fhall divide the Perpendicule of the Hollow at the 
 point P Q. which we muft joyn with a right line, which Ihall finifh the 
 framing of the Roof. The figures of the other fide make the houfe 
 covered to be feen after thefe faihions. 
 
 The figures above are only to make it feen, that we muft always 
 keep the fame order, although the Horizons change. 
 
 I have fet a Church within the floor, which is covered with Pina- 
 cles, and the wings of the two bendings, which have only the fimple 
 draught* 
 
 There is alfo a P^villion feen by one end, of which we have fpoken 
 in the figure preceeding* 
 
pi AC TIC A V ; to? 
 
 Beil].'. 
 
For to fet a Jlrest into PerfpeBive. 
 
 I r might fuffice to fee the figure, for to know the 
 order thereby which is very eafie, we mud only 
 make a plane offingle little fquares by the ordi- 
 nary way, and to take onefquare,on or $ for the 
 breath, or length of every houfe • And upon this 
 breadth which we fh all take, to fet the meafures of 
 the Dcors an'3 Windows* for to have thereby the 
 abridgement, by drawing to the point ofdiftance A, 
 as are the Meafures B C D E, and F* 
 
 The firft Angle, of every houfe may ferve for the 
 line of elev^idn^a^We at the firft houfe the Angle 
 G for tbe&qol^& ha\V faid already, how they 
 ought to ' 
 
 When we vftrnld have ftreets going a crofs, we 
 need only to leave 1. 2. or 5 little fquares, without e~ 
 levating any thing, oven as are H and I. 
 
 The fig ut c below is tofhew that when one would 
 advance, or draw back the houfesjWe ought only to 
 advance, or draw lMck their elevation , upon the 
 plane of the fquares, as L, is more advanced*by one 
 fquare then K, and M more advanced then L,and 
 fo of others, and for the rt ft to follow the Method 
 which we have given the figure above, to that be- 
 
i i@ PERSPECTIVE 
 
 *That the Obje&s afar off (hew not the fflicfyefs. 
 
 H E that pra&ifeth this Art (hall be advertifed, 
 that the objects neer to the Horizon, that i$ 
 to fay very much diftant,muftnot (hew the Thick- 
 nefs being view’d in the front. For example,the 
 houfes, ABCD, ought not to have thicknefs at 
 the Windows, and at the Door; But only a fingle 
 draught : The reafon of this is that the Rays which 
 .part from the Obje<5t, unite themfelves in the Eye 
 with thofe that are Collaterals* 
 
 I would have brought the demonftration of this, 
 ifl had beleeved that it would have ferved, but as it 
 is not Ncceflfary for my defign,and that it would be 
 unprofitable, 1 have let it alone, remembringmy 
 felf, that I promifed at the beginning of the Book 
 that I would not give any, feeing that l have to 
 do With many perfons, which would be in trouble 
 tounderftandthem* 
 
Iff f 1 R S P I C T I V 1 
 
 eV 
 
 t%i r?i 
 
 For the Buildings* vie wed by the Angle . 
 
 O F thefe two buildings view’d by the Angle,, that of theflrft figure is made in 
 the fame manner, as we have (aid of the litde fquar es, view'd by the Angle^ 
 and at the beginning of the elevations of other p ieces view'd in like manner! 
 But to avoid the trouble to run back to the one, and to the other w I will fay, that for 
 to make thefe 'buildings, we muft always fet the meafures upon the bafe, and draw them 
 to the point of diftance v and at their fedions to raife Perpendiculars , and the firft 
 Angle fhall ferve for the line of elevation : For example, this body of an houfe hath 
 for his breadth A B, and for its length B C, whkhis the double of its breadth A B, 
 from th fe points A B, we muft draw to the point of diftance D, and from B C, to the 
 point of diftance E, from their fedions B F, and G, wc muft raife Perpendicules 
 which fhall ferve for the corners of the houfe. For the meafures of the doors and the 
 windows they muft be let upon the bafe betweeruhe letters A B, and B C, and draw- 
 ing from all thefe points to the points' of diftances D E, we muft take notice , where 
 the B D, or B E, fhall be divided, for to elevate there the afcents of the windows. 
 The Perpendicule of the firft Angle B, muft ferve for the line of elevation , which 
 fhall pive the Travers and height of the windows, all the reft is intelligible enough. 
 
 For the figure below it is the fame order, with that of the Chairs without order 
 which is, that having made the plane Geometrical, we muft fet it into Perfpedive , as 
 .the irregular pieces Then to fet the Rule at every bending of the plane, and to ob- 
 ferve where the Horizon fhall be divided, for to make a point there, to which we muft 
 draw, as if it were the point of fight of each fide of the building, each fide having its 
 particular point : For example, the plane being fet in Perfpedive, the fide H I, giveth 
 upon the Horizon the point K, to which we muft draw all the Rays of this fide : The 
 other fide I L, muft alfo have its point within the Horizon, but our paper is too 
 fhort for to make it be feen. Thefe 2 points being found, we muft place there the 
 Rule, and make an occult line to pafs by the other fide of the building parallel upon , 
 the plane to that which hrth given the point within the Horizon - and to continue it 
 unto the bafe, as from the point K by the corner L,unto M-, and by the corner H, unto 
 N Then to fet between N I, the number of the windows which muft be on the fide 
 H I, and between I, and M, to fet the meafures of them that we would have on the fide 
 I L ; All thefe meafures being upon the bafe, we muft draw them to the points that 
 we have found, and do altogether the fame, as in the figure above* 
 
FT i( 
 

 P ERS P EC T IV i 
 
 per to fet Alleys of Trees in Perfyectiv?' 
 
 A Lthoughthat by the orders fore- going one might draw fuffichnt 
 inftrudtionsfor to fa Alleysof Trees in Perfpe< 3 ive,yet I did be- 
 lieve that it would not be unprofitable,^ give a particular or- 
 der therein, which mighunake the method more cafie. 
 
 If one would have but one Rank of Trees on each fide of the Per- 
 fpe&i ve, there will be no need to make a plane of little fquares, he may 
 only do, as I have faid in the fourth advice Foh 17, 
 
 But when one would make a Company of Alleys to appear, it feem- 
 eth.to me, that hefh lido very well to frame with occult lines a pave- 
 ment of little fquares with the Oaks-, even as it hath been taught in the 
 planes Fol. 31. And from the Diagonal of little fquares to raife Per- 
 pendicules, as one may fee A B 5 If one defire the Trees to be farther ofi^ 
 or nearer the one to the other, he muft encreafe or diminifh upon the 
 bafe the diftances of the fquares,. 
 
 When one lhall have given fuch height as he would to the trunk of 
 the firft Tree, as is A C, from the point C, he muft draw to the point 
 of fight D, to the end that all the Trunks of the other Trees may not 
 pafs the Ray C D, the firft Tree A B, maketh it to be feen , that be- 
 tween 2 right lines one may give to the Trees fuch compafsas he Ihall. 
 find good, and that they ought not to be drawn by the Rule. 
 
 The figure below is ordered as that above, there is no difference,buc 
 only that above giveth the fquares Right, or in Front, and this giveth 
 them view’d by the Angle, that is to fay, that from the meafures upon 
 the bafe we muft always draw 7 to the points of cliftances E F, and from 
 the little fquares to raife Perpendicules, and to do the reft as we have 
 faid heretofore. 
 
 One may within the fame Perfpective, where fome Alleys fhould be 
 drawn to the points of diftances, fet alfo thofe that ftiould draw to the 
 point of fight ^ as one may fee by this of the midft, which draweth to 
 the point G, which is the point of fight , and the others, draw to the 
 points E F, which are the points of diftances*. 
 
F fi ij 
 
For Gardens in Perfpeffive, 
 
 I Have given in the Treatife of Planes, the Method to abbreviate, 
 and fet into Perfpe&ive the Plane of a Garden with its Compart- 
 ments, by an Order fufficiently eafie ; fuppofing that you have the 
 Plane. But as I avoid thefe Geometrical Planes, becaufe there is need 
 of too much time for to make them, I have fet thefe here, by the 
 which we lhall know, that having made a Plane of fquares, we may 
 take as much or little as we will for the fquares of the Garden, as are 
 here A B, which have each three fquares 6 n every fide :and the fquares 
 that remain ftiall ferve for the Alleys C. He that would make feme 
 Compartment within the fquares of the Garden, he muft ufe the little 
 fquares of each fquare, dividing them, and giving them fuch a figure 
 as he would have, foas we may fee the little fquare A B : and on the 
 other fide D £: the hedge-Rows and Arbors are placed oppofite to 
 each other, and of the bredth of the Alleys. 
 
 The little Squares with Borders. 
 
 W HEN one would fet Borders to the fquares, he muft fet at 
 the corner the heights and bredths that he would give them. 
 And from thefe Meafures to draw to the point of fight I. For 
 example, in th ? figure below F G is the height and bredth of the Bor- 
 ders of the little fquare H, from the corners of this little fquare F 
 G, we muft draw to the point of fight I, and do all the reft as it hath 
 been faid feveral times. 
 
 For the Arbors, we muft from the Angles of the fquares of the Alley, 
 elevate the Afcents or Perpendiculars O. All the reft is done, as in the 
 Arches view’d by the fide, fol. 60 . 
 
 The little wood which is at bottom is made by elevating Perpendicu- 
 lars from all the Angles of a Pavement of little fquaresj&c. 
 
M4 
 
 P E R S PECTIVE 
 
 ,*&, A A ,<#(V *fe, v fV .fit* A v rt(* ,<A, 
 
 For to elevate and fit in TerfpeBive Fortifications. 
 
 I Will not repeat here the Order of Abridging, 
 and fetting the Planes of all forts of Fortificati- 
 ons in Perfpe&ive ; that which we have fpoken 
 t hereof fol.}9, is plain enough. 
 
 For to elevate them, there is no more difficulty 
 then in onefing'e wall ; but there needs more time 
 byreafonof the multitude of Angles, which we 
 muft always bring to the line of Elevation, for to 
 take there the heights, that they ought to have, fo 
 as we have faid elfevvhere many times, fpeakiug of 
 other Works. 
 
 The little line of elevation is divided into four 
 Parts; I he firft from i unto 2 is the height of the Pa- 
 rapet of the way covered,* from % unto 5 is the 
 height of the Rampart ; from 3 unto 4 is the height 
 of the Parapet ofche Rampart And from 5 unto 1 
 is the depth of the Trench. 
 
PRACTICAL* 1*9 
 
 G g 
 
 
U5 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 db sPE jfH jT§\ ^ S$> -A\ 
 
 For to make the defigns of Perspective. 
 
 T Here is not fo excellent a Mafter, which hath not feme defign in fuch pieces, as 
 he would willingly attain to ; If this be ordinary almoft in all fciences, it is 
 necefTary in this, more then in any other, by the great fubftitution of points 
 and of lines, which we muff therein exatftly obferve, and without which nothing can 
 be done, which may content thofe that have any undemanding therein. 
 
 Seeing that one is obliged in fome manner, to make defigns, we muft fear.ch out that 
 which pmay help to make them exadly, that may be poflible ; and as every on$ 
 knoweth that all the length of thefe works, is to draw lines parallel, and Perpendicu- 
 lars, having then fearched the Invention, as well by experience, as in the Authours, to 
 be able to make them readily : I have found nothing which can help us in that, but the 
 board and the fquare, which Viator hath left us in his Works. All thofe that would 
 pafs the time in deigning, ought to have one from the which they fhall draw the de- 
 light and benefit which experience will make them to underftand. 
 
 Although that the Figure giveth fufficient undemanding, how it ought to be, and 
 the manner of ufing it, I did believe that I ought to give a more clear undemanding 
 ihereof.This Plank or Board ABC Drought to be perfectly by the rule or fquare, of a 
 Foot and half long, of fifteen inches broad, and halt an inch thick, that the Wood be 
 good, very dry, and well united, one may paft* a fheet of Paper on it , for to make it 
 more (mooth and to help the Peru. The fquare E F, is a Rule of a foot and half long, 
 as the board, an inch broad, and of thickneis z lines, which is helved at the right Angle 
 within another frame of a Rule G H, eight inches long, one inch broad, and three 
 quarters of an inch thick- for to draw lines, they hold this latter Rule G H, clofed a* 
 gainft the board A B C D, and the other Rule E F is afiuredly ferak, if fo be the board 
 and the Rule be well ordered. 
 
 When one would work, we muft faften the leaf of Paper IKLM upon the board, 
 with q. little bks of Wax NOPQj and then from one only point, you may draw 
 lines, with afTurednefs that they will be right. And when you would have Perpendi- 
 culars, fet the handle of the Rule G FI, on the fide C D, the Rule E F (hall be Perpen- 
 dicular to C E> 
 
 For my part I find that this eafeth exceedingly, and that without this invention, 
 you muft always have the hand at the Compafs. There is no further need of fubftitu- 
 tion, but for the vifual Rays, and there are alfo thofe that ufe a Rule pierced at one 
 end, which they faften with a Needle to the point of fight, but this is too much in- 
 tangling, I would not counfel any to ufe it, one may as icon do it with the common 
 Rul ?, and fo is not in danger to fpoii any thing. 
 
 R. Is the common Rule. 
 
 T. A common Compafs. 
 
 V. Another Compafs which beareth the Ink, for to make circular Lines. 
 
 See here are all the Inftrutnents that one hath need .of, for to make the defigns of Pcr- 
 
 fp;.ctiye, „ “ o 
 
9 % A GTl G A Vl 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 !;♦ 
 
 U I 
 
 TTTTTTTTTT1 
 
 
 
 1 1 P|i III !j|| jiii 
 
 nr* 
 
 
 ii 
 
 G gH 
 
Li* PERSPECTIVE 
 
 For to draw little Perfoeflives into great, and great into little . 
 
 S Eeing that defigns are made in final I, with more facility thee in great, it is credible that they j 
 will be made therein always, the which hath made me refolvc to give the Method of fettieg j 
 [mail defigns into great upon Cloth. 
 
 The Painters ufe ordinarily Squares or Checquers, that is to fav, that they" divide the 
 fmali defignes and the clothes, where they muff be painted into the fame number of Iquares, and ! 
 fet proportionally ; that which is within one fquare of the dehgn, into the iquareef the Cloth | 
 tv hich anfwereth to it 9 tome do like well of this Order. 
 
 But here is another, which in my judgement, is more eafic, more facile, and more aflured; 
 we muft have a skale proportionate to the lefs defign, and another skale proportionate to the big- 
 ger. When one would make a defign, the firft thing that he refolveth on, is the ikale which mu/s' 
 give* all the Meafarcs of all the other pieces of the defign. For trample, lin the left defign A a 
 the skale B C, of five little parts, /"which one may take for feet RayaiJ hath been made the firft j 
 upon this skale; they have taken the Horizon, the height and diftance of the Trees, thebredthof 
 the Alleys, &c. 
 
 Fort*fet this fmali into great, obferve bow we mnft proceed. Firft, vr* ffluft know, if the j 
 Perfvcftive muft have the natural Horizon, that is to fay, that the bottom of the Figure feeing On 
 the Ground, the Horizontal line be at the height of our eye, which is about five feet Royal ; Thi* j 
 being, there muff be five little parts which are between b C, to make a skale of five feet Royal FG, ! 
 that having taken all the Meafurcs at the little one, we maytranfport them, and take upon the I 
 great one, as I am about to fay. 
 
 The two Meafurcs of Proportion or skalcf, being ordered, as I have now faid 5 the firft thing | 
 that cne doth, is to take upen the letter de£gn with a pair of Compattes; the diftance ofthe bafe 
 D unto the Horizon £, and to carry this opening of thcCompafs D E, upon the letter skale B C, 
 and to take notice what number of Parts it (hall give, as he doth give $, we tnuft then take as many 
 parts upon the great ska’c F G, and fet them on the one part and other ofthe Pifture, or great De- 
 fign, beginning at the bottom of the Cloth HH, and tluy fhall end in II , from thefepoints 1 1 j 
 we muft d> aw a Packthread whited or blacked, this line 1 1 fhall mark the Horizon in the great 
 Picture; Then to take the difiance or finking K L, of the lefler defign, which is the foot of the ! 
 HoufejaBd to carry it upon the IcfiTer skale R C, for to fee how many parts we fhall have,and to take 
 the fame number upon th: great skale FG, and to let that which we (hall find e upon the edge of i 
 the Clo'h H M, H M, which we muft cringle about, as the Horizon for to have the finking of the fe- ; 
 cerd Tree j In the lefs defign, we mufi take the difiance N O, and carry it upon the lefler skale i 
 B C, and take as many pirts upon the great fcale F G, as we fhall have found in the lefs. N O 
 giveth two parts ofthe litter, we muft take two of the gr at one, which will give H P, which we 
 muftt-t ingle, as we hive faid.* We (hill ufe in like manner all the Parallels tothebafe, as arethc 
 other Trees, the Windows, the-RoOf* ofthe HouIes,&s. 
 
 Forth? Piomb lines or Perpendiculars tothebafe, it i$ the fame Method, there is nothing bur 
 to change t he fide for to mark them, which is, that in ftcadof marking on the fide of tlfr Cloth, I 
 as we have done, we mufi mark above and below. For example, for to have the two Coffiers of 
 the houfe at bottom ; we mufi take with the Compafles upon the lefler defign QR, aad carry thi* 
 ppenmg Upon the fcale B C, we fbail finde about 7 parts and an half; we fisall take as many part*' I 
 upon the grezt fcale F G y which fhall give H S T 8 , which we mufi cringle and do fo with all the j 
 other Perpendiculars, whether building Tree?, Hedge- P.ows^&e. 
 
 For to findethe visual Rays, which are the lines that go to the point of fightV: at this point j 
 V we mutt fafien a pack-thread or thread, with a pin bended, for fear ofmaking the hole too great, ! 
 this thread or pack thread mufi be of the length of the Picture, for to be able to tringle and j 
 4i aw all the Ray* very exa$!y; For example, for ro have the two Rays of the bredth of the Trees, j 
 which are in the lefs defign D X,wc muft take this defign D X, and to carry it upon the lefser fcale ; 
 B C, and ro take upon the great F G, in proper rion to that which we fhall have found in the lefs ! 
 which wiil give'H Y, the which poin ts H Y we fhall tringle with the Pack-thread of the point V ; | 
 fort© have alfo the Ray of Hedge-Rows, we mufi take the 'diftance D Z, end carry it upon the ! 
 fcale B C, and t*ke as many parrs upon the great fcale F G, rcdiichwill give HI, svhichwe mufi j 
 tringle with the pack- thread from the point V, &c. 
 
 All that i s in P«rfp.t£t»ves fallethordinari’y under thc r e three forts oH/rcs, Parallels, Perpend!- ’ 
 c«!ar Si and Rays vifual, which having been made? eafic to make upon the cloth, we fhall jels fear' 
 the pains of letting the Ids defigns into great; f>rtofet the defign* ofgreat into fmali, wr muft on- : 
 ly change the Orders, that is to fay, that wc mufi take the meafurcs firfi upon the great fcale, and 
 dirsv i-.MT) than proportionally upon the lefs, as if the Horizon of the great defign were of 5 P*rts 
 (•f the great f ale. I would rake f psrts^f the lefser foile* for the height of the Horizon of the lefi 
 d'.&^snd fo of all the reft 
 

 PRACTICAL i irS 
 
 tltf 
 
 G o • .* 
 
 g i A 
 
Orders to facilitate the Vniverjal manner of the §h*r D. 
 
 A % tiljta'f Uvn*, **m mhwfi ft#l ?!sj|g gp^-f fop & '%* <?i«i f foa? ibit 
 
 ordfF, oFlIaiverfai m lunar } I bfiisvrd e'ue £ is Aufoar w uij permit it|$ to nuks it e§ff? 
 cothcai, as much is I hall be able, cue cijsy m i / draw b.*n:5t -thereby, Wherefore \ ill a U 
 Li thsfc taoijgares, which will ca-jfe m rein: nber ntc w lic’i i hue ilrca ty fail, in the %. §< 
 
 4. and advice, which are for the ua leritiudiag of this order, thers having (lfovve i to take all 
 riiemeafures uji 03 t’isbire 1 aa l tfut asminy Haysas d vide the Diagonal G, areas ouay (null 
 fq ures/a the (inking ofth.* pi&jrc,to which fqjares they give fiicti a greaensf* as they|will ? 
 
 Thu we may nor goto feek .0 fir, lec ns took 0 \ t ie fi d £g ire where ms bale is A B, the point 
 of fight G, the points of didinces e F, I divide this !ufe int o 1 1 cq u{ parts; cich of whic 1 l 
 (bail mike to he about i foot, and from ali t late d.'riii or?s, l iT| a ! I draw to the point of fight, which 
 (hilt be as miny Rays, whereof A an l b are the lad. N a v Ithy that he that wojld hi/ e a line, 
 i^hi^hlhoifd appear fnnk a foot Jn the Picture, that he .nut draw fro n theand iivifnn S 0 to the 
 jpaint of diftaocc and .where fhi> line D-F, (hill divide the Ray 8 G, that Hull be the point 
 for to draw the liaefank a foot in ch 1 p dtnrepf we mould hue one of 3 feet ft iking, we mufi take up* 
 oa the faafe 3 of ehefe parrs, an l from the third t > draw aifo to die di tance F$ J n 1 we Rnii hare at 
 the Mian of the Riy 8 G; the place for to draw this lin \ So chit if from the point C s we draw 
 to the point F, where this line C F, fhsll divide B G, this (fiill be a line (dak of 6 feet, 
 ffofiheother Spares chat remain A C, we mike ^4, dividing each into 4, and that we leave 
 rsQttomike each pare to avail a foot, there will be 1 4 feet from A* t3 C* In inch maaaer as if 
 we iequirea hne; which (hottld appear funk 1 8 feet in the Picture,! ihonld reckon from A ? i8 lifek 
 parts, and from the i§ i would draw to the didmee £, which would give me by the fcftioa o f 
 the Rsy A G,the point for to draw this line; sf arse wool i chit it HmU os (oak Z f feet , we miff 
 tike A C, and draw from C, to E, and where this line fhould divide A 3 , at the point 4 , we dull 
 draw h i, which will appear of 14 feet of linking in the picture. 
 
 According to the perfpeftive, this line H I, is equal to that AG, an i coauineth as many feat 
 or parts, fo that if one draw from the point I, to the paint E, the fe&iaa oft his line I E, at the Ray 
 A G, OuR be for to draw a line fC L f&nk of 4? foctj Iffrom this we draw further to the difhnce E, 
 wc (ha ! I hive the fcliion of the Rsy AG, yet a line real )vcd 24 feet mare then the others. And 
 if c n e would hive 3 line ibnk jo feet, we mud from the paint A, reckon 6 fulfil parrs, and from 
 rne fixth draw to the point of light G, a id cake notice where we iTjiil divide the line H I, as here 
 st the point M- Then from the point M, to draw to the di/ltoce ir and this line M E? (hall df* 
 fide the Ray A G, where we mail draw this line N s if it were of^o. We fhoqld f-om A, reckon i6 9 
 and do all rbefmieif, it were 6o, we fh^uld from a, reckon J2,andfrom 12, draw to the point 
 of fight G, unto the line K L, which fhau-ld be the point O, Then from 0 , to draw to the difUocy 
 E, and from the feftioo of the Ray AG, fiuli be for to draw this line. 
 
 For the feewd figure. 
 
 B Y rha? which I have fpoken, Ms eafie to find .1 pome for Rich a finking as one would bave,Tb re 
 r:maiR#H eo (hew how we m?y find it within, or without the Ray A G,or B C,for this the ling 
 B C, fhali ferve as a fcale offijr feet, the one of which i _fftal/ divide into twelve inches, that I may 
 these find the half, the third, is i the 4th of a foot. All Mng thus ordered. If one require of 
 me a point which appcaretli of iy feet long, and of a foot and hall within the Ray A G. I will draw 
 from the i vth p-H’f of the bafe to the point ofd ilia ace E, and where the Ray A G, (hall be divided 
 in P, I will draw a Use P Of, now when one required a foot mi half «rith-in the Ray AG, I will 
 take with a Qompsfs upon the fame line P Qs bacon the fide 8 C, a fooc 6 in ;hes, which l will car* 
 ry from p, unro R f Arid rhis paint R, (hill be the paint which hath hem® demanded. 
 
 And it one would have one yet at 19 feet difianee within the Pi£!ure, and'f-vtn sad m half be* 
 
 • ;yo id the Ray A G. We mad draw from C, to the paint E and tvh..-r« k tiad divide A G, to driw 
 j hne which I ha Jibe of *4 feet, then 'from A, taking gve irtle p^rrs, to draw them to the point of 
 G, until that we divide this. fine at the pci it S, a ad from dds point 5 , to draw to the 4 ft ?nc: 
 E /Where the Ray AG (Rail be divided, we mud draw a line TV, feeing they require 7 feet and 
 f'baT beyond foe Rjy A, we m id upon the feme hoe T V, but , on the fi ie B C, take 7 pa rs and 
 6 indie* wuth a C@ in pa §, sod can y th*m from the point T. r> the point X A^d this point jfo 
 fh?iib- foe-paint due one deftreth > And fo- of ill others, at fiich a'dift mcc an I removal, as ob* 
 
 WOU'd, ll/v^, 
 

 P R A C T I g A ti- 
 
 ny 
 
ri 8 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Of a general manner for to exertife Perfpeflive , without jetting the Point of diflance out t f the PiZInre, 
 
 errPield of the Wvr\b) the Sieur 0 D L. 
 
 HIS Order obligeth us to mike ^Geometrical plane, or at kali a device of Mcsfures, as well for tl 
 
 pktie, avforthe Elevation *, tf’iat by the one, cr by .the other, it maybe brought to ferfrro Pcrfpe&iv 
 I wirltafce for c'"c objett or fukje& the fame Example of the Author, which is a i age fquared, cove 
 rd with a Point c r a Building covered like a Pavillion or Tent, ro the which we frail give the Me 
 fu'res 'by the means efa Scale. 
 
 Msvmg then mide the plane of this Cag e.m, i, which ! have ct on the top of the figure, it mutt be, th 
 
 a •fuchadiftmce asoaevv u d have, that the Ob) d feeme recoyld wifrin thePi<h;ure,ss k is hereof 17 feer^we ma 1 
 
 a line a 
 
 b which (hail be .he bafe or the bottom ofri e Pi ft- re, which we frail place according to the afped, th 
 the obkd' ugktto be feea. Then from the two c ds of this line a, k K we muft draw rwolir.es Paiallels the 01 
 to the other, a d undetc: minate , thre is to fay, it is no matter if they divide the plane, Bor iu what place, 
 area* « pon the cne of thefe lints, as here chis a g, we muft make little Parallels to the lise 4 whichmi 
 go unto the Angies of the plane, and by the mesas of the fcale, to fee how far each Angle of the plane frail be r 
 moved from th.s line a g the which frail be marked near ro each Anef Now from the place which one ft 
 doofc lor to view the Pidure, which isle e the point q, at five fret near to b We mufl make a Perpendicular 
 a b which frail be rhe line c t, to this line c,t, wem-ft give as many little parts of the fcale as we would have 
 
 removed for ro view the Ptdure, which is for this 24 feet, and at the cad of thefe 24fctr, which ihthepoi 
 r to raife 3 (mail Perpetidicule of the height of the eye, which frill be the line c froffour feerand an half. 
 
 1 The Cloth, the Wall, or tho P per, being ordered for to fet the plane is pc, fpedive, and upon the plane 
 m kethc Ffcva ion •, We mult divide rhe bottom of the pifture, or the bale A E, imo as many; parts as that ab 
 th ’ p anc j 
 
 . .. 7 this having 1 2 thereof. We muff ( : iv dv thegicu A B iato »2, whichwill be of' value eacbafoi 
 Abovethepsints A B we mult fet the height of freliae /, f, which is of four feet andanhalf. Take then wiiht 
 Cotnpafses four parts and an half cf thole which arc upon rhe line A B, and cany them perpendicularly up 
 the to uts A i, which frail give the points E F r and dr&w rhe line E F parallel to A B, and this linefhah 
 th-Horirori. Seeing that in the plane the point C, which is the place for to view the Pidure. isremovedfi 
 liarts from b * we taufi; reckon as many pans from B,and from the fifth C, El . va;e a Perpt ndicule to AB, which fr 
 divide the Hot it on at the point G, which frail be rhe point of fight, to which we muft draw the Rays A G, B 
 *«hich frail reprefent the Parallels of the pane ag,bg, for the poim of dlfta cc, it frail bg the point F, an i by n 
 f b that the fine c,t» hith 24 feet, muft take fix pu ts of the / neA B, which fri// be AD, and divide them cj 
 into 4 and thefe parts fra// ferve for a fca/e, for the depths, orremo?a//i* befog fuffieiem for ro /et them cur j 
 finkc/v. And the fix parts that remains between B D, fra// be the Sc-jA which fra// furnifr the Meafures of the f 
 according as the Zincs drawn from the points found by the p/ane, frsi// divide the Rays drawn to the point of fij 
 G For as this Sca/e,is a pyramids whereofB D,i$ the Bafe thtMeafurcs diminifr in proportion as they arc fu.;k 
 feave divided the cne of thefe parts info Inches for tofinde there a// the Meafu cs, as they arc upon the p/ane. 
 
 With the Sca/e or Rcmov«//s we finde the points of the piancj and with that of the McTurcS the /ength that i 
 lines ought to have, afwcZ/Ftir the phne.ai for the E/evarfon. 
 
 How for tofinde the plane in Perfpeftive, we muft obferve all the Meafurcs of the Geometrical pA*ne tfeefi 
 Ang/eof the p r a^e r, m, is removed 7 feet from the point a, upon the /in? a,g\ Wherefore I wi// reckon 17 a 
 becinfrg at A ; and from thefcvcntecmb,I will to the poir t F, dividing the Rdv A G,a t the p int R.from this po 
 \\ we muftdr*w a parallel to the Bafc*,and bv re^fon that the Plane m y is within the Ray a g,a foot and an h 
 ’ mr }i upon he lame line R but on the fide B D , take part and an half fer to carr 
 
 tvithia the Riy A G, whi h fra// bet’ e poin- M, reprefentiag the An g/e of the p/me Mj for 
 Arg/e / which is removed a 6 feet from the point a* we mutt from the point D, which is 24 feet from the po 
 A dtiwir F, <fnd where fre Ray AG, frail be divided at the pointy, draw a Paralle/. Novvasft is about t 
 fet thatthis /iney, is enough removed \ we muft draw from the kcond part of the Sca/e to the point G, a 
 whereth's Ray frail divide the Para//el at the pointQ, we mufl draw Q, F, which fra// givs upon A G, t 
 point H, fom which point H, weraufldraw a parallel to A B,and upon theftra: /ineH , but on the fide E] 
 t4ke the McaW s for to g ve infect and an h*/hfrom tlie point H taro the point L. 
 
 For the p >im kj ^h'V.h is removed 2 9 feet from A, we msfi frem the fifthpa r t of theSca/e AD, dra-vrot 
 BohitG, tnd wheiethisR'y fra// vide the Para/E/y^rrhepointO, rod aw OF,forto have upon A G, 1 
 poiRrN. Then from the point N. todrawa Pa»alk/for to take on the fide B D, 7fcetandan ha If mh 
 we mull Carry obt of /he Bay A G, that is to fay, fr m N 10 K- 
 
 For th 
 
 Mpar/i, 
 
 point !• tf Moved 58 feet fi cm /he point 4, we jaufr upon the Scale AD, take 
 fro*m th ■ a draw a Ray to /he point G,which dull divide the parallel rhe point S-And from the point 5 , to dr 
 to F, which dull Mr dz the Bay _A G, at the point T, removed 9 5 fret from the point A: by region t 
 
 the Par a lid y is cf 24^ ro the which ha-ing j jyned 14. they m rt ke $9. at the point T. And by re^foa that 
 
 tak 
 
 \nglej is 4 fee? 4«d 4Q lu/fwiiliia the R,jy A G, w c murt up in tFi's ParaffdT&ut on the fileDB, 
 fret and art half ^nd C^rry them from the point T*, to the point T. 
 
 " For to frame t heu/^ne we mufijoyn by right lines, thefe 4 points M f, K r, ^nd from their Asg/e.s raife p 
 peudicu/es a% M, ft, L, Jf, K id T % fp. The wliieh (hall h^ve Each 17 feet, a s h m.r ked in the plane by 
 ] neX, an.l from the ends of thefe perpendiculars, rod aw two Di agon ate JJp,f f\ which frail divide rhemfe/ 
 in Z, and upon this poi n f Z, tne/evatea perpendicu/ar Z AS, of 1 g fer t and anhs/fr Then to draw lines fr 
 all th ■ fo rr earners ft fffp 9 tnd fr y to the point M, and the C*ge \Aa\l be fi lmed in peifp-fi/ve. If one would t 
 it Je‘c:nd within fhe ground one foot, we mull ddjoyn one foot under every point of the p/ase} ^nd )oyn tl 
 together with lines. 
 
P E R S P E C T I V £. 
 
 ? ¥or tigiii)uftp th$ difiance removed, the Feint remaining in the Ficture] 
 
 rWnttok that would ufe this common manner muft know, that the number of feet that we { 
 1 take upon the bafe, ought to have refped to the diftance that theyfhali have determined < 
 
 JL For to caufe my Propofition to be underftood, I will fet in the firft figure two diftan 
 the one of fix feet, the other of twelve, which have refped the one to the other, by reafon i 
 dividing into two each of the fix parts, we fhall have twelve*. 
 
 Let us fuppofethen that the line A B is divided into twelve parts, and that from ail thefe parts 
 hath drawn Rays to the point of fight C, let us take now the half of thefe divifions A D and d* 
 to the point E, which is the diftance of 6 feet - it is certain that the feeftion of the Ray A C, fhall be 
 abridgement of the fquares view'd fix feet diftant.If from the point D we draw to the pomt F wf 
 is the diftance of twelve feet, this line D F dividing the Ray A C, fhall give the abridgement of 
 Little fquares view'd twelve feet diftance,. He that would have the abridgement of twelve fqua 
 view'd twelve feet diftant,he muft from the point B, which is the whole bafe, drawto the poirn 
 and at the fedion of the Ray A C to the point H, fhall be that which is required : or elfe from 
 point I to draw I F, which fhall give the fame point FI, and the line H K fhall be funk twelve Ji 
 fquares viewed at 12 feet diftance. We fee in this that 12 little fquares viewed at 12 feet diftance. 
 meet in the fame line H K, that fix fquares viewed at fix feet diftance, and all the lines of fix fquai 
 that the fedion of the Diagonal D G hath given, do refled: themfelves by two and two to th< 
 which the Diagonal D F hath given, the reafon why the Diagonal D F hath given two lines for < 
 of thofeD G, is that the diftance is doubled^ If it were trebled it would give three, and four i 
 were four-fold. Now for to finde on the fide B D, the fame fedions, and the fame number of ii 
 fquares, as on the fide D A, without the point ofdiftance be out of the pidure, we muft only 
 vide into two each of the fix equal parts which are between B D, which will make 12 parts, and fr 
 their divifions to draw occult lines to the point of fightC^and if one draw Parallels to the bafe, by 
 the fedions that the Diagonal maketh of all thefe Rays he fhall have 12 fquares of finking in 
 fame line, and if the diftance were of twelve feet, although that G be but fix feet of diftance; the n 
 fon of this is, that by multiplying the Rays we multiply the fquares, and multiplying the fquares 1 
 remove ihe diftance-.fee then how having made twelve parts of fix, which were between B 
 there arifeth twelve little fquares, which make the fame finking that the diftance at twelve f 
 diftant. And he that would have the diftance at 24 feet, he muft divide ftiI 4 into two,each of the pa 
 between BD, which would make 24 parts, and from thc24th. to the point D, to draw the line D. 
 the fedion that it would make of the Ray B C at the point K,wouldbe the finking of the 24feer. 
 
 In the fecond figure, I have fet upon the line L M the fame Meafures as upon A B of the fi: 
 figure, and on the fide M N, the fame finking, and the fame diftance as on the fide A D, which g 
 veth the line H K,to the end that we may fee, that he which would draw the fifth part, as Q G, < 
 from the feventh as R G, that he fhould not have the true finking which is at K:for R G would n 
 fink enough, and QG would fink too much, although from thefe 5 or 7 parts, there would 1 
 made twelve or twenty four. 
 
 Wherefore we muft obferve to take always a Number, which may be multiplied by the diftano 
 as here the diftance of fix may ferve for 12,18,24,30,36,42,48. and fo an infinite number by fii 
 The diftance of 5 may ferve for 10,1 5,20,25, 30, &c. The diftance o£eight,may ferve for 16,24 
 32, 40.48, &c 0 » We cannot fail doing thus, for fuppofing that the point of diftance could not fc 
 nearer to the point of fight then G is near to C, it followed) that if G is at 6, at 7, 8, or at iofe* 
 from the point C, that the half of the bafe hath the fame number, the which number we muft divld 
 proportionally to the removal* which we will give it. For example, if there be eight feet from h 
 to L, and that I would have the diftance of 32 feet without that G go out from his place, I will di 
 vide each of the eight parts, which is the half of the bafe as L N into 4, and 4 times 8 will be 3 1 
 Rays/o the abridgements of the fquare fhould be at 32 feet ofdiftance. 
 
 All thefe little divifions remain not after the Pidure is made, there are none but the principal 
 divifions of feet, which they draw to the point of fight, and the abridgements, that is to fay, the Pa- 
 rallel to the bafe which remain always. 
 
g % A C T I C A U r S •' III 
 

 f> -g s E C T 1 V E 
 
 ^ ‘vcryjint Invent ion, for wake nah rally Ferfpectives without keefing the Rules* 
 
 H Aving fet down all the Rules, that we mull keep for to make exadly. Perd 
 fpedivcs : I would fet alfo this Invention, and the following, for to make 
 thereby perfectly fair ones and very exad without being obliged for to. ufe 
 any one rule therefore 
 
 This ihall ferve for ihofe that love Panting, andrak'e the pleafure to ufe it • without 
 being willing to take the pains to open the Compafs, nor to take the Rule for to draw 
 ajine^ for in this order, we (hall not need neither the one nor the other* And never- 
 thelefs.we may make very fair Perfpedives, either of Buildings, of Gardens, or Land- 
 skips. Before we proceed to the order, we mull know, that the principal piece and 
 necefiary for this invention, is a great leafe of Glafs very clear, enclofed in a frame 
 of Wood well fmooth’d and thin, which I have marked with A: at the bottom of the 
 figure, this frame mu ft Hide between two pieces of Wood, an Inch and an half thick, 
 the which muft be faftned to the end of a board, which is of the breadth of the Frame, 
 as B C ftieweth, ftt for to receive the Frame A. The breadth of this board B D , fhall 
 be of a foot C. At the nftdft of Lhe fore- part of this board, we muft make one or 
 more fquare holes F, for to faften there a little Jron.Rcd or W ire, as a Rule pierced 
 all along, whereby to raife it, or let it down at the top of this Rule F, there fhall be a 
 Round of 3 or 4 Inches of Diameter, without thicknefs,as it might be of white Lattin, 
 the which muft have a little hole in the midft,a s it were lor a piece to go through^ all 
 ihefe things put into one, make the piece G 
 
 Although the figure fheweth the order, and how we muft ufe this piece G , yet I 
 will not ceafeto tell, how we muft; proceed therein* - Having then placed this piece 
 G, before that which one would draw, he fhall look through the little hole of the 
 fpedade F, if one can difeover upon the Glafs all that he would that fhould be there * a 
 if any thing come not there, you muft put the fpedade nearer to the Glafs-, until that 
 he do fee there, that which he defireth The piece being fo fetled, we muft mat k upon 
 the Glafs, all that fhall be feen there, looking through the hole F, which doth here, 
 that which the point of fight doth in other Orders, it being moil certain, that all that 
 fhall be marked upon the leaf of Glafs , having the eye at the little hole of the fpedade 
 fhall be found perfectly in the Rules of the Perfpedive, 
 
 Every one knoweih how we muft withdraw that which fhall be deftgned;, wherefore 
 I fhall leave that, tor to fay that one may mark upon the Glafs with the Pen and 
 Ink. and after that all is done, to moiften a little the other fide of the Glafs far to 
 refrefh the Ink and to fee on the fide, which we f] 1 all have traced, a Paper fomewhat 
 mpift, and then to pafs the hand upon it* and the Paper will take, all that which was 
 marked upon the Glaft. 
 
 If one will, they may alfo ufe a Penfil, and colours according as every one fhall 
 think good, it is enough that one know the invention to ufe it, for to retrad that which 
 they will : For it is as eafie to retrad a Pallace as a CountrcyddouCe, 
 or a Chamber , feeing that it is nothing 1 but to fet ones felf in a place, 
 
 where there may fee that which they would defign, and to bring the fpedacle near -the 
 Glafs., when there fhall be lie d, by the means cf holes, which are in the Board. 
 
 A Painter tr ay alfo ufe this for to retrad figures, at fuch a pofture,as he fhall have 
 given them, for to retrad after the embofting. In a word, for all that he fhall judge, 
 be k aflured, that the ufe will render many things eafie that were hard before. 
 
Hhiij 
 
121 
 
 V E R S P E c T I V E 
 
 
 Another , -my Invention far to exercife the Psrfpectk je } without knowing it. 
 
 T His Invention is found to be as pretty, astdie former, and fome 
 do efteem it more-, by reafon that the other obligech to defign 
 twice: the firfi upon the Glafs: the fecond toretraft that which 
 •ne hath done?there : and in this, we defign but -once, and as exactly 
 as the other, 
 
 I will not fet down the framing of this inftrumetit, it having no diffe- 
 rence from that which I have now given, but only that inftead of a leaf 
 of Glafs, we muft fet there a frame, divided by little fquares, with 
 threads very {lender, as the figure lheweth it, the which 1 lhall call a 
 Lettice; for the n umber of the fquares, Ileave that to the difcretion of 
 every one, I lhall fay only that we muft not make them too great , for 
 ;to work more exaCtly,nor too little for fear of being confufed. 
 
 For the order, there is need, that this piece H, be placed in fuch man- 
 ner, the t one may fee by the hole of the fpe&acle I, all that we would 
 defign ; if the defign, which we defire to make, muff be greater then 
 the frame, or then the Lettice is, or as others will, the Checker-board, 
 we muft make the fquares of linnen-C loth or of Paper, greater then 
 that of the frame, and if it be leffer, we muft make the fquares leffer, 
 but we muft always make fquares for to carry in each fquare of its pa- 
 per, or of the Cloth , that which we lhall fee within the fquares of the 
 Irani", looking upon it by the fpeftacle I, and if all lhall be reprefented 
 proportionab y, thedefignwillbeasjuftforthePerfpeffive, as if one 
 had ufed Rules and the Compafs. 
 
 I have fet the two figures, for to caufe to be feen how this piece H, 
 muft be placed for to ufe it in defigning upon a Table , and when one 
 would paint, by the one and the other manner, we may make more ex- 
 actly all fores of Perfpeftives, counterfeit Pictures, and draw to the life. 
 
 I doubt not buc many will fay, that- this method is not new, and that 
 there is not a Painter, that knovveth not how to enlarge and diminilh 
 Pictures, ufing this Checker- board, that is true, but I beleive that not 
 any one hath ever ufe.1 the fpeCtacle, which is the fecret for to make 
 every thing in its perfection. 
 

 'A N fi 
 
 PROPORTIONS 
 
 Of 
 
 FIGURES 
 
 I N 
 
 PERSPECTIVES’ PICTURES, 
 
 A N B. 
 
 WORKS EMBOSSED 
 
 fffffffffffffSSfffffffffWfff® 
 
 li 
 
m ' P 1 E S P E C T I V E 
 
 Of Figures Elevated above the FLne*. 
 
 T Here are that fay, that the Obje&s elevated 
 from the Earth, have more diminution then 
 when they were upon the Plane, and that for this 
 reafonjkmuft he that a Figure raifcd up q. or 5 feet, 
 fhould belelfer then ifit were on the Ground: this 
 Ihould be good rf it were elevated very high, as we 
 Jhall fay hereafter- but this little maketh that the 
 diminution is unperceiveablc ; for fuppofing, that 
 fuch an Object orFigure could be difcovered at one 
 only view. that is to fay, without lifting up the eye - 
 they ought to have the fame heightbeing elevated, 
 as if they were on the Ground -For example,the fi- 
 gure A mull have the fame height that the figure 
 B,and the figure C,as that of D, and that of F, equal 
 to G,and fo of others. 
 
 for the Figures below, we (hall mark for the 
 fame reafon, the Figures that are below are of the 
 lame height astfiofe above, as is the figure &, equal 
 in height ro that ofH and I, as great as the figure 
 K The/e two Examples Chad ferve for all thafe that 
 wecould make there. 
 
For the Figures having the Horizon high, 
 
 W H EN the Horizon is high, as one is Come times obliged to 
 fet it, for it reprefents fometimes, which one hath- viewed 
 from an high eminent place, we muft keep the fame Rule with 
 the Precedent, although it feem the contrary in that of the Horizon be- 
 low : all the Figures are above the firft, and go always by diminUbing. 
 And for this of the Horizon high, all the Figures raife themfelves a- 
 bove the firft, and the furtheft diftant is always the moft elevated, but 
 neverthelefs the leflfer in proportion, and according to the meafure, 
 which one ihall take thus. Having made the firft figure A B, we muft 
 from the top of Its head, and from under its feet, draw in what place 
 one would of the Horizon, which is here the point C •, all the heights of 
 the other Figures muftbe taken between this Triangle A C B. Forex- 
 ample, defirous to have the height of the Figure from the point D, 
 from this point D we muft make a Parallel to the bafe D E, unto the 
 line A C, which ihall be the point E, from which we muft raife a Per- 
 pendicular unto the line B C, which ihall give the point F this Perpen- 
 dicular E F ihall be the height which muftbe to the figure from the 
 point D. If at the point G we would have yet a figure, you muft make 
 the fame pra&ife from the Point D, and you final! have the Perpendicule 
 H I, which ihall be for the height of the figure from the pointG, And by 
 the fame Method all the other figures ihall take the heights from what- 
 foever place it be. 
 
 For the figure that have feet at the Horizon. 
 
 I T is rarely that one maketh figures upon the Horizon, 
 but if there were neceflity,we muft make thofe that one would makej 
 appeare the firft, greater then the other, that is to fay, to give the® 
 the Natural height, and all the others will be equal to them, and they 
 ihall be r moved according as we ihall make them the kffen For exam- 
 ple, the figure K L, is the greateft and the neareft and that M N, is the 
 moil removed s As the fecret in this for the Painters, is to finiih well 
 thofe before more then thofe of the bottom®, and the further they are re- 
 moved, the mote they are to be fadt and lefs perfect. - 
 The Rule of the r e Figures, and of thofe that have the Eyes within 
 the Horizon, Is no other then their owne height , for as well in the one fa- 
 ihkn a»ie the otherwhere is but only to make the Figures iefter and l .fte 
 pniilhed, which we would have backward and feeme farther off. 
 
7TT 
 
 A C ;T t A T-i 
 
 Cf \ Jiv rtx, crtl. 
 
 Ii iiji 
 
SU •: ' 
 
 i>* B R -S- P B\C T I V E : 
 
 F or Fig 'res in Perfpecti ve . 
 
 A Fter that we have fet down that which may ferve for to make all forts of Per- 
 fpe&ives, with the means to give them a pleafirig and ornaments for to content 
 the eye, there remaineth 40 more but to find out a . way for to -deceive it al- 
 together, whkh is to fet down the figures there e . 
 
 But before wepafs any further, we muft make a diftindipn of figures, for it is ano- 
 ther thing to reprefent a Hiftorv, then to intend to deceive the eye in a peice , which 
 fha.l be fet at the bottom of a Gallery, of a Hall, or of an Alley in a Garden for to 
 thefe all figures of repofe or refting are the beft, and for a Hiftory , they muft be all 
 lively and fpirited, by the diverfity of their pofture. 
 
 The multitude of Horizons, which the Pai ;ters take in their Pidurcs, is the <gaufe 
 that they make an infinite company of Faults there, by not knowing to give the height 
 that they ought to the figures, proportionable to their Horizon, I will giye them a 
 Rule, that they may not fail there, whatfoever Horizon they ft i ail have* 
 
 For the Fig' re having the Eye within the Horizon, 
 
 I N the Perlpedives, which are fet at the end of a Gallery, of an Alley, of an, HsrII$ 
 or of any other place for to deceive the fight, we muft always fet theHorizon at the 
 natural height, that isto fay^ at 5 Feet.F v oyal, which are the height of the common 
 fize . * 
 
 He hat would fet there figures for to appear in the natural, they ought to have* the 
 'eve within the Horizon: for if the Figures have the eyes within the Horizon as we 
 have, they will appear to us of our height, this ought to fyffice for the inftrudion, but 
 * for to be more clear, and to make my feif better underftood, I fhall make ufe of thefe 
 three figures inftead ofmany others, which one may fet there,ifhe wilkThe firftFigure 
 A, fhall have the natural height, and the eyes within the Horizon, if I fhouid yet have 
 ano h r Figure at the place. B, I muft from the point B, raife a line unto the Horizon, 
 and that fhall appear of the fame hdght with the firfh He that would have a third at 
 C let him always let the eyes thereof within the Horizon, it fhall be of the height of 
 the others within the appearance •* In fhort, although there fhouid be a thoufand, 
 there is no o.her Rule to be kept when the Horizon is at the natural height. I intend 
 no: to freak of Children, which oughr to be made improportion to the great figures, 
 and according to the difcretion-ofthe Painters, 
 
 For tie Fig rts having the Horizon helow. 
 
 X 7 Hen Piduresare madeTor Halls^ where ordinarily they hang them,, and 
 \ A/ place them fomwhat high, we muft take theHorizon lower, for to approach 
 ^ ^ to the eye, as far as fhall be poiiible 
 Now for to give juftly, and with proportion, the-' hdght to each Figures , in what 
 place fr ever, we m:e: widi them,, we muft make one at what height we would-, in 
 tome place of the pidure, as is the figure D E, which is here that which we have cafd 
 the line of el evation 1 1 the pr receding orders. 
 
 For to find the height of other Figures, which one would fet into this pidure, which 
 fhouid appear as high as the firft D £, we muft from the Feet of this F, and from the 
 top of its head D, draw lines where we will wiihin the Florizon, as is the point E, 
 and between this Triangle D E F, fhall be found ail the heights of the others : For ex- 
 ample, if I would find the height that the Figure -muft have of the point G , from this 
 point G, I draw, a parallel to thebafe G H, until! that it divide the line F£ , which 
 fra’Ljbe at the point H, from which I raife a XFrpendicule, until that it divide the line, 
 or Rav D E at the point I, and this Perpendicule H 1 iswhe height of the Figure, 
 which we muft take with a Compafs for to carxtyhc ta i?he point G , if.; I would have 
 another at the point K, I have only to make the fame opera cons, and I fhall have the 
 Porp.endi.cule M N, for its hdght, and fo of as many as one will. 
 
I t? 
 
 P E & S P E C T IV E 
 
 Of the Pofhres phat we jhduld give to Figures in the Ftrfyectives., 
 
 W E muft make choice of the Poftures, which wefhould give to figures tots 
 to deceive the eye, feeing that they are not all there good, as we have ah 
 ready faid : Wherefore it deemed good to me to let down fome which 
 might fhew a way to invent others. 
 
 The firft is a Man, which readeth being fet : the fecond readeth a proclamation fan- 
 ned to a Wall : the third playeth upon aLute : the fourth ileepeth ; the fifth fits on a 
 rail, and turneth the back on the fide of them that are two and two : the firft marked 
 
 with fix look upon a defign upon Paper, the other farther ofFfeven* are about ferious 
 affairs 
 
 One might fet thofe that play, that talk together, or entertain at a Table, or ftand* 
 mg up, which write, which pray on their knees, in one word, one may fet an infinite* 
 company of poftures, fo that they be fuch, that one may ftay there long time.- But well 
 muft never fet thofe that are in aftion, for that deceiveth not to fee always one Lep. or I 
 an. Arm in the Air, nor thofe that run without ftirring from one place to.another. ’ “ , | 
 
 t ^ e / ame 5 ^ u ^ es as In Figures, giving the height or breadth 
 to the firft, and from the two ends ofthis firft meafure to draw to the Ho- 
 rizon, to have all the meafures of the others : For example , having made 
 the firft horfe A D, for to have the height of that of B, we muft from the line A F> 
 draw to the Horizon C-, and then from the point B, to draw a parallel to the bafe BK 
 until that it do divide the line A C, which lhall give the point K, from which we ihall 
 raife the Perpendicule K L, for the height of the horfe from the point B " 
 
 For the Fowls we muft from the ends of the Wings E F, draw Rays to the Hori- 
 zon, and between thefe two lines, take the meafure of the others which I fuppofe of the 
 fame bignefs For example, for to have the bignefs ofa Fowl at the point G,we muft 
 draw' a parallel to thebafeG H, until that it divide the Rays E F, which wefhall give 
 the line H I, for thegreatnefs of the Fowl G 
 
 When we would fet Beafts, or Birds in the Perfpeftives we muft choofe thofe that 
 are moft at reft, as may be a Dog fleeping, or gnawing a Bone, a Cat watching of a 
 Mpufe,ora Parret, &c... — ~ - 
 
 Of Beafts and Birds in Perfpective 
 
n5 P ERSPE C T I V E, 
 
 For to find! the height of Figures far removed , the firfi being upon 4 Moun- 
 tain near to the Eye . 
 
 I T is a thing that giveth great Contentment and Satisfa&ion to the 
 Minde, when we have the knowledge of that which we have done,* 
 that which maketh me beleeve that any one will be glad to have 
 the prefent Rule unknown to many. 
 
 When we are to make thtfe Figures, wemuft determine the height 
 of the firft, that is to fay, thediftance from the Ground, whither we 
 would afeend, and at this diftance to fee another figure below of the 
 fame height, from the feet and from the head of which wemuftdraw 
 to the Horizon, for to have the height of other Figures, which are 
 within the Field. lexprefs myfdf 
 
 For example, the figure A which is above the Mountain, hath for 
 its height five feet Royal, which is the natural. I fuppofe, that the 
 Mountain hath twenty five feet of height, if oneberaifed up twenty 
 feet, as this Piece in the midft whither the Beholder is raifed, which 
 ought alfo to have five feet for his height, the Horizon will meet it at 
 twenty five feet, as the Top of ;he Mountain and the Horizon will 
 grate upon it, as we fee at the Figure of the Mountain, which hath 
 the feet upon the Horizon. 
 
 Now for to finde the height of thefe little perfons which are with- 
 in the field, we muff make a figure twenty five feet lower, under that 
 of A, or in fome other place, as is B C. And from the feet B,and from 
 the head C 0 to draw in fome place within the Horizon, as is the point 
 G,and between thefe two lines B and C, which go to the point G,we 
 mud take the height of the little figures, as we h ve done in the Or- 
 ders aforegoing, as for to have the height of the little figure D. We 
 muft draw a Parallel to the bafe, until that it divide the line B at the 
 point E, from which we fhall raife the Perptndicule, which lhall di- 
 vide the line C O at the point F. 
 
 And wemuft take with a Compafs thisPerpendicule E F, for the 
 height of the figure from the point D : If ofte would have alfo the 
 height of the figures from the points G H, we muft do the fame as at 
 the Figure D, and we ftiall finde their height between the lines Band 
 C, which wemuft take With a Compafs, andtranfport them to the 
 points G H, and do always the fame for as many perfons as you would 
 diminifh I all unto one point, 
 
 Obferve here all that maybe faid for theMeafures ofFigures,accor- 
 ding to Perfpe&ive. But feeing that l am engaged for all theMeafures 
 of figures, I have fet down all the Orders followings although they are 
 sot according to this Art, 
 
PRACTICAL? its 
 
 Hori&on 
 
 1 
 
 jri'VxN'i 
 
 ■vvvV«- 
 
 % 
 
f->7 P E II S P E G T I V E 
 
 For to give- the natural height , cr fuch as one would to Figures elevated on high, 
 
 T H A T we may omit nothing for the heights of Figures, we will fet do wn alfo the 
 two Rules Following, whereof one hath already been given by Albert Durey, Ser- 
 liOy and others, for to write letters in an eminent place, and to make them appear e- 
 qual to thole below ; by the fame reafon we may make ufe of it for to finde the Meafures and 
 the greatnefs of Figures, which fhall appear all equal from a certain point where the Beholder 
 fliall.be; 
 
 There is a man at the point B,five feet high, and diftant from the Tower A fifty feet,which ! 
 beholdeth the firft Figure C, which appeareth to him as natural, and at 30 feet higher D he 
 would fet another Figure, which fhould appear as natural as the other from the place where 
 he is : Flow fhould he finde its meafure > 
 
 He muft make a quarter of a Round, or only a little Arch upon the paper, which he muft 
 fet before the Eye, and behold the feet and the head of the Figure C, and that fhall give to 
 the quarter of the Circle, the diftance or the Angle E F, then he muft at the fame time, and 
 without moving the quarter of the Circle, behold the point D, where ought to be the foot 
 of the Figure D I, and to mark the point that it fhall give at the quarter of the Circle, which 
 is here the point G .and at this point (j he muft fet the Angle, or the fame diftance that the 
 Figure C fhall have given, which is E F, which being tranfported unto G, fhall give G H. 
 Then by the point H, we muft look where we fhall divide the line elevate&irom D, which 
 fhall be at the point I, fo that the diftance D I fhall be the height which we muft give to the 
 Figure which we would fet there. He that would make one yet higher, hath only to . do the 
 fame operations, and he fhall have that which he defireth, and they fhall all appear as natural 
 to the Beholder B. If one would know* the reafon, he muft remember the Principles, or to 
 look therein anew, and he fhall finde that all the Objetfts view’d under equal Angles appear 
 equal ^ now it is that the Angle G His equal to E F, whereof the Figure D I muft appear 
 hi: the eye equal to the figure C, 
 
 for to know how much Figures equal diminijhto the eye, the one fet ups n the others in height. 
 
 T HE Beholders K, having a quarter of a Round, or part of a Circle, as that of 
 the firft figure B, he looketh upon the firft figure M, from the Tower L, which ap- 
 peared to him as Natural, meafuri ng h from th e feet unto the head ^ he marketh 
 th? Angle, or the diftance upon his quarter of a Circle, which are N O • then without ftjr- 
 ring any thing, he beholdeth alfo the feet and the head of the Figure P, and marketh upon 
 his quarter of the Round the Angle that it giveth, which is QJR, if there were any alfo 
 higher, he could, take them ail, and fet. them upon his quarter of a Round. 
 
 For to know the difference that there is from the one to the other, we muft with a Com- 
 rafe take the Angles, or the diftances of the one and of the other, and we fhall know that 
 the moft elevated give the leaft Angle, and by confequence make appear to the eye the Fi- 
 gures lefter and then we may fay, that the figure P appeareth not to the eye, but the half 
 of the figure M, although that one be as high as that other. , If one demand the reafon, we 
 fhall fay that the figure P giveth to the; quarter of the Round of an Angle, which is but the 
 half of the figure M, as one may fee that ,QR is but the half of N 0 ,or very little to fpeak of. 
 By this knowledge we come to the other from above, an&from that from above, to this here: 
 for if M and P be of the fame height, and that P from below appear not but the half of M • 
 we may fay afibrediy, that to make P to be feenas M, that there would need yet as much 
 more of heigh:, the fame is of that above, where the figure D, which is double of C, ap- 
 peareth not at all greater, beholding it from the point B One may fay alfo.that if D were 
 not greater then C, there would appear but the half of its height, and fo one Rule is the 
 Reverfe of the o . her. 
 
 As well the firft as the fecond Order ought to be contracted, as the figures are made • 
 heretofore, where we fhall have alfo affuredly the diff rence and proper. ion of the figures, 
 if they were taken at the Natural with this fourth of the Circle. 
 
B.R A 5 I I 5 S U - itf 
 
 K kii j 
 
i»s: P E R S PECT1V E 
 
 Oj "Me a'ures for the Figures elevated. 
 
 C oncerning that which we are fpeaklng of, for the diminution of figures when they are elera- 
 ted,wc rauR draw the Meafurcs in prrportion to thofe which we would eleva te in rhe Pictures, 
 whether we do fet them upon the Mountains, upon t he Eioufcs, or upon the Clouds in the Air. The 
 two Orders tint we arc about to give, (hall render the Method very cafiir. 
 
 For the fir ft, l fuppofe that the man A is fix feet high, the which h ight we mul tiply many times 
 upon a plumb line £ upon the bafe 5 asid from thefe divifions from 6 tc fix f?et, we imift draw 
 to the Head of the Fig.uie Ay Then having fee a leg of the Compafs at the point A, with the other 
 ieg we tnuft make the Arch C D, and the fe&ians which this Areh (hall make of the Rays, (hall 
 be the Meafure* which we mud give to thr Figures, for example, if cne would make a figure ap« 
 peare Elevated 42 feet we muR uke the draught £ D, which dividerh rhe i la ft Rays, which vve 
 mud tranfporr to F, which is elevated 41 feet upon the fame bafeA EUf w c would hive anothet at 30 
 feet high, wc muit take the draught G H, which dividerh the Rays go and $< 5 , which (hall be the 
 height of The Figure P, and io of others. All the concernment is to know how much this lino 
 B oughi to approach or retire back, which ought ahvays^to be the diftance of the beholder to the 
 O >;ed beheid, as here of § j feet, or thereabouts. 
 
 For the fecond Order, ?n Read of th<5 line 8, in the SrR Order I have fet the divifions from 4 
 to 6 feet upon the bafe F T, the two firR points I and 6 ought to be drawn to the point of fight K, 
 for to have between rheie rwn Rays l K, 6 K, the Meafure of fix feet, which is the height that we 
 give 10 the Figures. Then from al i thefe other Measures from 6 to 6, unto 43 or mare, if there 
 be arty, we mud draw to the poiht of diflancc L, and at thefc&ions that we fhall make of the Ray 
 6 K ; we muft draw Rede Parallels to the bafe,between the Rays I 6 ; the which Parallels (ball be 
 the heights of figures Within the finking \ and by confequence, for the figures elevated at the fame 
 diRane , the which w.cRiay verifie, carrying back the Mcafures of the firfi, Order with thofeof the 
 fefond. 
 
 He that would know hbw much each figure is diminifhed from the firR which hadi fix feet, he 
 hadi but only to take the heighc of that which he defirech with* Compafs, and carry the Ccmpafs 
 (o open upon rhe i trie fcale M, and he (lull have char he defireth. For example/ if having taken 
 die height of the figure P wc cany it upon the Lale M, it will give but 4 feet, the which caafeth to 
 know, that a Figure of 6 feet elevated ;o feet, will appear but of 4 feet. The heights or diminuti- 
 ons of others fhail be known by the fame operauons, fo that it be in the fame diRance with thefe 
 here*, if on. change the diRance, all thtOrders mnlt be begun again all anew, andwoikaswe have 
 4 orc, 
 
 TheFigu es VXY, whi. h ire in the Air above the Clouds, at the fccond Figure below, are 
 of the fame heigh*- and pioportion as that in tbefirR .• 1 have fet them down only for to fee, 
 
 that although that the Orders be differcfet,the effects are the fame. 
 
 That which l have faid for to finde the height* and diminutions of the Figures, which are upon 
 the ba e A 8 of the £41 Order, atad l T of the lecond, ought to be obferved in proportion as they 
 are funk, aad it mnR be that themaR elevated having the fame reference with thofe that 
 are 00 the Ground .which are >n the same line as this F p with rhis A For example, in the fccond 
 Prdciyfover a^ainR the UR figure N, there were a figure O, E evatcd upon a Tower, 48 or 50 feet 
 high, what Mcafutes (hou.Ul we give it ? I anfwer, that wc muR giveitthe fame Proportion that 
 thbN, Rial! have with rhe f. And as the UR N, containcth but twice and an half, of the 6 ,ihc I 
 hath,this O which (hail be upon the Tower, ought to have bur 2 an dan half of the 6 parts that the 
 figure N bath. If I would have alfo a.Figurc R, Elcvarcd u on anorher Tower of 48 or 50 feet 
 before the figure Q, we mult take alfo 2 parts and an b iff of 6 , from the Figure Q, for the height cf 
 ifo* FigurcR, He that wouM h*ve alio one in 5 , a: the fame Tower, which is elevated 30 feet, he 
 mn(\ give it 4 ptrti cf t he6, of the Figure Q, that is to fay ,4 feet, as we have found it in the fk ft 
 Or- «r , bitwer? k* Rays G H» fnoaeword, all rh figures do diminifh rhemleJves to theEye,ac- 
 cor Tng as they are Elevated, ss the contrary hapneth, when they are abated. 
 
 Thar which e ight to maketh' Ra’eeRecmed is, char ail the proportions of Figures may be 
 learned by heart, for he that would tske the prlra to make a Meafure of this, where he 
 might joyn more parrs, and they would ferve him lor ever j and he might tender it fo fs- 
 fnili*r f himfelf, that in a moment he will tell you, that bAng removed feet, if the 
 Figure h r? 6 feet, or 6 parts of he’ght, being upon rh? Ground, One cf which (hall be 
 the fame height, bA g deva fd 12 feet, will nor appear but of five and an b-df. Th;t which 
 (hah bee'evared to lit, fip appear but of That which (hall beekvared 44, fhall appear bat 
 &f4a£?d an half Thar of go fiutvf 4. Tin? of ^6 of 3 feer , And that of 42 but of 2 feet 
 and an half i Aud fo proceeding from <vTo 6, as I had done, T ihepsp r would have fuf- 
 ssreiir; H h emngh A iharit is known h,w wc outfit to do, for to fee here a greater nom- 
 
ii 8 
 

 
 
ORDERS 
 
 FOR TO FIND THE 
 
 NATURAL SHADOWS 
 
 AS WELL BY THE 
 
 SUN- -TORCH 
 
 AS BY A 
 
 CANDLE 
 
 AND A 
 
 LAMP 
 
 LI 
 
7 29 
 
 P r. RS PEC T1 V.E > 
 
 r< 
 
 ^ V- *• « 
 
 *«, / S*> tN rt> rtv p{> rt« A ' rt-> fi*> jrt* pfo . N dN A. .C^» .A. 
 
 The 0 r : gynal of S hadovcs . 
 
 Or to define the natural Shadow, we fay not that it is an entire Privation of 
 light ^ for that would be to fay a perfed obfcurity, where we fhould fee as little 
 the objects as their fhadows, but we underfhnd a diminution of Light , cau- 
 fed by the interpofition of fome body which is not qrartfparent, the which receiving 
 iln m, or the clearnds which fhould caff it felf upon the plane where it is fet, gi- 
 veih there a fhadow of its fhape,for the light beingComunicative of it felf,produceth it 
 felf upon all Lhat which is not hidden from it, & Extendeih it felf upon all that is plain 
 and united:but if it meet which the lead Elevation, this hinderance caufeth it to make a 
 Shadow, which rendreth upon the Plane the forme and figure of that which 
 is Enlightned 
 
 The diverfity of lights, maketh a diverfity of fhadows for if the body that enlight^ 
 neth is greater then that which is enlightnea the fhadow will Be lefler then the body 
 if they be equall, the fhadow will be equall to ihe Body enlightned : but if the light 
 be lefTer then the Objed, the fhadow will ftiii be more and more the greater.- 
 For to und rila.nd this the better, we will make the three figures following, which 
 fhall ferve us as a foundation, for the Rules which we fhail give. 
 
 The firfb fheweih that the Body of light A B, being much greater then the En- 
 iigh ned C D, it Enlightneth more then the half of the Objed, the which maketh it to 
 give a fhadow with a Point and frame it into a Pyramide, whereof the Sun is theBafe. 
 This truth is fhewed in the Eciiepfe of the Moon, which is feldom wholly Covered 
 with the fhadow of the earth , which neverthelefs exceedethit in greatnefs forty times, 
 by reafon that the Sun, which is the body full of light, is an hundred fixty fix times, 
 and more, greater then the Earth, which it enlightneth more then the half ^ and by 
 confequencee caufeth to give a fhadow to it in a point. 
 
 The fecond, having the body of light F G, equal in greatnefs to the enlightned H I, 
 it enlightneth the half of the Objed, and giveth its fhadow parallel H I K L. 
 
 The third maketh appear, that the lightfome body, or the light M, being lefs 
 then that which is enlightned N O, is not enlightned by the half, ihe which caufeth a 
 fhadow unto it,N O p which enlargeth it felf according as it is removed, from 
 4e objed, and maketh a Pyramide. whereof the light is the point* 
 

 P ERSPECT IV E 
 
 Of the d:jf. rer.ee vf S'. ad, \v&> 
 
 B Y that which I have fpoken in the Leaf aforegoing , we muff conclude , that 
 one and the fame Objcd may give divers Rapes of fhadows or projections, 
 although that it be eniightned of the fame fide^ by reafon that the Sun giveth 
 ^ °^°n e faild°n r the Torch of an other, and the Day doih not frame it. 
 
 i he Sun rendreih always the fhadow equal to the objed, that is to fay, by parallel, 
 as the hr£l figure flic wet h it. I (hall teach in the Leaves f chawing, how we ought to 
 ufe this method, and to give to every objed the natural fhadow, which the Sun w'ould 
 caufe it to have ^ Ail Painters , Gravers and others may, if they pleafe, 
 ohferve thefe Rules, when they would make any thing pleafing, and not to take the 
 Rule of the Candle, or Torch, for this^ as divers have done. 
 
 l he fhadow of the Torch is not given by paral'cls, but by Rays, whieh iffue from 
 Rie fame Center, that which caufeth the fhadow is never equal to the body, but more 
 large, and is greater alw ays according as it is removed, the wRich may be been in the 
 fecond figure, where the fhadow is larger then in the firft, although that the Cubes of 
 the one and the other be of equal breadth and height. See then how one fhculd be 
 much deceived if one fhould make the fhadow of a Toreh, like as that of the Sun, and 
 of the Sun, as that of. the Candle, feeing that the difference is fo notable. 
 
 There is a ihird fort of fhadow, which is neither of the Sun, nor of a Torch , bur 
 only caufed by a iairDay,the which having not Rrengih enough for to frame the figure,, 
 rendreth only a confufed blacknefs at the objed, as in the third figure. Now this hath 
 no Rule, wherefore every one giveth it, and pradiceth it according to his fancy, 
 
 Ail thefe fihadow T s as well of Re Sun, as of the Torch, and of the Day, ought to be 
 wore dark then the parts of the objeds which are not eniightned, as A, it not fo dark 
 as by reafon that A received! the rtfledion of the clearnefs, which is about it : and 
 B, hath not the refiedion that A, which is in obfeurity. We muff obferve alfo , that 
 Re part of the fhadow moil diftant from the objed, is alfo more dark, then the part 
 nearer as G, is darker then H, by reafon that A cannot communicate that, little re- 
 fiedion which it received! unto G, as it doth to H. 
 
P R A C T ! C A L - ‘3° 
 
 
n i 
 
 P ERSPEGTIVB 
 
 For to finde the jhape of the Shadows, 
 
 \ \ ] E ^all 0 ^ rer ve at the beginning of this Book, that the Definition of Pet^ 
 %/%7* fpedive is to give upon a Plane perpendicular to the Horizon, the Reprefen- 
 ™ tation of Objeds which are upon the Ground, or upon a Plane Horizontal: 
 And for fhadows, it is altogether contrary- feeing that one fuppofeth a Body elevated 
 upon the Plane, t ie which being enhghtnea, cafteth its fhadow upon the fame Plane, as 
 we fee, that the Body A giveth upon the Plane the fhadow B • for to finde the fhadows 
 we mull fuppofe two things, the Light and a Body : The Light, although it be contrary 
 to it, ii is that neverthelefs which giveth it its Being, and the Body or the Objed giveth 
 it its Uiapc and its figure I fhall not difcourfe here but of fhadows, for I fuppofe that 
 we have learned ro fee the Bodies or Objeds into Perfpedive, 
 
 Jor to underftand thefe fhadows more eafily, and render the Orders follo wing more 
 cade • we muff mark that we mull make ufe of two points : the one of the foot of the 
 light, which ought al ways to be taken upon the Plane where the Objed is placed, and the 
 or ber of the Torch or lightfom Body ^ feeing that the Rule is general for the Sun and 
 for the i or ch, with this only difference, that the fhadow of the Sun is given by Parallel, 
 and that of the Torch by the Ray of |he fame Center* We will begin with that of 
 the Torch, feeing that it will help the better to comprehend that of the Sun, which fhall 
 follow* 
 
 We fay then for example, That if one would have the fhadow of the Cube A, as 
 we fee B, that we muff from the point O, foot of the light, draw lines by all the 
 Angles of the Plane of the Objed, as here by the Plane of the Cube O D, O E, OF, 
 O G : Then you muff draw other lines ftom the point of the light of the Torch 
 
 by all the fame Angles elevated, and to continue thefe lines until that they divide the o- 
 ther lines drawn from the point O : for example, having from the point O drawn the 
 line palling by the Angle of the Plane D- if one draw from the pomtTT, -adine paf- 
 firig by the fame Angle elevated • this fhall divide the other at the poiftt H, and the point 
 H fhall be the fhadow of this Angle. If from the point C, we do the fame by all the 
 Angles elevated, we fhall divide the lines of the Plane, at the points H I K L, the which 
 points we muff joyn with right lines, and we fhall have the fhadow of the Cube, as is 
 to be feen at the Figure above, and more dearly at that below. 
 
132 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 ./'V f*V r*S /'V *t<v rl\ 
 
 ^4 §k SKt . sK §14 §14 §M si?. 5K 
 
 Of Shadows taken fn m the Sun. 
 
 HE Sun, that glorious lightfom body, b:ing far greater then the whole 
 Globe of the Earth, as I have already laid in the beginning of this Trea- 
 tife, fhould make ail its fhadows in point, feeing that he doth always en- 
 lighten more then the half; 
 
 In purfiiii of this demonftration we fhould conclude, that all the fhadows of the 
 Sun ought to be lefs then the Body that is oppofed unto it, and to diminifh as it re- 
 moved] it felf far off : which would be true, if there were any correfpondency of the 
 Body enlightned, to the Body enlightning : but all the Obje&s which are upon 
 Earth, are fo fmall a thing in refped of this great light, that the diminution of their 
 fhadows is unperceivable by our eyes, which acknowledged them all equal, that is to 
 fay, that they are neither larger nor freighter, then the Bodies that give them their 
 fhape- for this reafon, we give all the fhadows caufed byuhe Sun by Parallels, as we 
 have feenat the fecond Figure of this Treatife. 
 
 It followeth from all this difcourfe, that for to have the fhadow of what body fo- 
 ever ic be, being oppofed to the Sun, we muft draw a line from above this great light, 
 which may fall plumb at the plate where one would take the foot of the light • and 
 from this place to draw an cccult line by one of the Angles of the Plane of the Ob- 
 ject, and another of the Sun by the fame Angle elevated, and the fedion of thefe two 
 lines fhall (hew how far the fhadow mud go, all the other lines /hall be drawn Pa- 
 rallel un.othefe. 
 
 For example, for to take the fhadow of the Cube A, the Sun being at B, we mud 
 from under the Sun C, which is as the foot of the light, draw a line which toucheth 
 an Angle of the Plane, as C D. Then from tl e oiler Angles E,to draw Parallels to 
 this *. for to Bade the end of the fhadow, we mud draw a line from the Sun B, paf- 
 fing by the Angle elevated F, which fhall divide the line C D in G . Then drawing a 
 Parallel to this by the Angle H, it will divide the line E at the point I, and we fhall 
 have the fhadow of the Cube D G L. 
 
 He that would caufc the fhado ws to cad before, or in any other way • he mud de- 
 termine the place of the Sun, and the point underneath, to draw the lines of an Angle, 
 and make all other lines parallel to that, as you may fee by the figure below, without 
 repeating the Practick, which is the Cure as that above. 
 
, , M m 
 
 * 3 ^ 
 
m PERSPECTIVE 
 
 The Shadows of the Sm an eftal to the Objects of the fame height 3 althwgh that 
 they be removed the one from the other . 
 
 E xperience teacheth us, that many ftiles, or elevations of the fame height-, remo- 
 ved the one from the other, ceafe not to give their fhadows equal in the fame 
 time, I fay in the fame time, for they do lengthen or fhorten themfelves, ac- 
 cording as the Sun cometh near, or retireth himfelf, the which he doth every moment, 
 feeing that he never ftandeth ftilh 
 
 Wherefore when one defireth to caufe the fhadow of feme objed to caft, we muft 
 determine of the place of the Sun and the point under it, to draw from thence the two 
 cccult lines which give the term of the fhadow, as here the Hedge-row A, giveth the 
 point of its fhadow in B, and if from the point B, you draw to the point of fight C, 
 this line B C (hall be as well the fhadow of the Hedge-row D, as of that A, and of all 
 thofe that fhould be in the fame line unto the point of fight, and you muft hold for a 
 maxime, that the fhadows do always keep the fame point of fight with the objeds. 
 
 Following this experience, that the objeds of the fame height do give the fhadows 
 equal, if one would give the fhadow to the Hedge-rows E F, which are ©f the fame 
 height with A we muft only take with a Cornpafs the diftance A B, and carry it 
 to the foot of the Hedge-Row E, for to have E G • and from this point G, to draw 
 to the point of fight C, and to make always the fame Pradice, even when thefe Al- 
 leys were prolonged infinitely. 
 
 Bnt if the light come from the bottom, or from before, as in the figure below, muft 
 we change the Order ? No, we moil only fet forward or draw back the foot, or that 
 under the Sun, and draw lines from the one and from the other by an Angle, as are 
 Hand I, which fhall give the bound of the fhadow of the Hedge-Row K, to the point 
 L •, and from this point L we muft draw to the point of fight M : Then from all the 
 Angles of the Plane of the Paliffades, we muft draw Parallels to the line H, unto the 
 RayLM, and we fhall have the natural fhadows ©f the fame Paliffades or Hedge- 
 rows. 
 
% 
 
 practical; 
 
 H- 
 
 w 
 
 M in ij 
 
H4, 
 
 P E R S P EC T I V E 
 
 Of the Shadows when the Sun is directly off oft, to the Eye. 
 
 S often as the Sun is before our eyes, that is to fay, above the point of fight- 
 the fides of the fhadow that it fhall caufe fhall be parallels, as are all the vifual 
 
 Rays^ wherefore the point of fight fhall ferve always for the foot of the light . 
 And the other Ray, which fhall determine the fhadow, fhall be taken from the center of 
 
 For example, when we would find the fhadow of the Cube A, we mull by the Angles 
 of ins plane B C, draw Rays to the point of fight D, as are B E, C F. Then from 
 the center of the Sun G, draw alfo two Rays, which fhall divide thofe at the point K 
 L, palling by the ends of the lines elevated from the angles B and C ? which are H 
 and I : In fuch manner as the fhadow of this Cube fhall be B K L C. 
 
 The fhadows of the two other pieces M and N, fhall be taken by the fame order, 
 a id fo of all the others, which may there be met withall. 
 
 It cometh into my mind, that one might be troubled, if inftead of - a Cube , there 
 were a Fyramide: by reafon that the Ray of the midft of the plane of the Pvr amide, 
 and the Ray of the Sun, thatpafteth by the point, made but one line, and by confe- 
 quence can terminate nothing for to take the fhadow from the point of this Pyramids* 
 When this fhall happen, we muft from an Angie of the plane, as is here O, draw a 
 Ray to the point of fight P, which fhall make O Qj And from the fame Angle O, ele- 
 vate a Perpendicular O S, then from the point of the Pyramids T, make a parallel to 
 the bafe, until that it divide the Perpendicular O S, at the point V : We muft make 
 the Ray of the Sun to pafs by this point V, and continue it until that it divide the Ray 
 O Qj at the point X, from this point X,we muft make a parallel to the bafe, unto the 
 Ray of the midft of the Fyramide, which fhall be divided at the point Y, the bound of ; 
 the fhadow: We muft draw to this point Y, from the Angles Z and Q,and the Triangle, 
 ZY O , fhall: be the fhadow of the Pyramids. 
 
 Thefe Walls, which are at the bottom of the one and the other figures , take their, 
 fhadows as, we have faid of the Cube A 0 „ 
 
 the Sun. 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 13? 
 
 F r to give the jhadow of the Objects fierced by the light:. 
 
 W H E N the Objed: is fquare, or of a right line, we muft from the point 
 A from under the Sun, draw lines Parallels from all the Angles of the 
 Plane : Then from the midft of the Sun B, draw a line to the Angle the 
 
 fartheft removed C, which fhall divide the line A at the point D,and to drawfrom the 
 point D to the point of fightE, until that it finde the laft line of the Plane F: for to have 
 the reft of the fhadows, we muft draw Parallels to the line BCD, by the corners G 
 H I, by realon that the Sun enlightneth two faces, and maketh the fhadow larger, as 
 is to be feen in the firft figure, that G C and H I are the Diagonals of thefe fquare 
 Pieces enlightned on two fides • and where thefe lines drawn by C G and HI fhall 
 divide the line A, we muft draw to the point of fight E, and we fhall have all the 
 Projedion, or the fhadow of the Objed. 
 
 If it be a Round, as in the fecond figure, we muft make the Round by the Order of 
 the Arches on the fide, as fol. 62. and 63 by elevating the Perpendiculars, and when 
 the Round fhall be framed with its thicknefles, we muft from the foot of all thefe 
 Perpendiculars draw Parallels to the bafe, asLK, then to take for the under-part of 
 the Sun L, which is the Parallel of the midft of the Round. Then from the midft 
 of the Sun M, to draw a line palling by the upper part of the Round N, and to con- 
 tinue until that it divide this Parallel L, at the point O, which fhaU be the bound of 
 the fhadow. The empty part of this Round fhall be found, drawing a Parallel to N 
 O from the point P, which is the upper part of the Round oppofite to the Sun, until 
 that it divide the line I O. The reft of the Round fhall be found drawing alfo a little . 
 Parallel to N O from the point R, which fhall give S. All the reft of the Rounds are 
 found by making Parallels toN O, by all the points of the Round of the Perpendi- 
 cules, which we muft continue until that they divide theParallels to the bafe,fo as I have 
 made that of the midft L O, I had marked them all with points • but I am fuch an ene~ 
 my of coafufion, that this hath caufed me to omit them. 
 
*3» P ; EKSPECT I V E 
 
 ■&.'£& fo. /H ■•dk, fh: lls- *1 ifc, 
 
 vb m m # m m ^ fe # «* s& < 
 
 TV Shadows take the JJjtfe of the fiaw$ vvhe: § they #<? cap 
 
 f 'TT Jt-berto I Have given the fhadows within a Plane united, bqng'afiured that 
 ~~f> lie which fhalj underPcand them well, fhall ndt have any difficulty topraetife; 
 J&. JL thefe here, and the others that follow becaufe that it is all the fame Rule, 
 and that one only direction (hall fuffi.ee for to'make to underftand, how thefe fhadows 
 do raife and abate themfelves according as they finde their Planes 
 
 For to make it appear, that thefe fhadows are found by the fame Rule that the for<* 
 mer, is k not fertain that he which fhouid draw a line from under the Sun A, paffing 
 by the Plane of this GateB, and that from the Sun C, one fhouid draw another by 
 the top of the Gate D, that thefe lines would divide themfelves out of our paper, and 
 would give, the bound of the : fhadow, fo as I have faid of others r 1 But the wall R 
 hindriug the line A B to prolong it felf, as it would do if the Plane were united, ob^ 
 llgeth it to raife it felf as we fee £ G ? wherefore it is that the Ray of the Sun C, 
 which ought to go very far to ieek the line A B, dfvideth It againft the wall at the point 
 G ? and there marketh the fhape, or the fhadow of this Gate, whereof the Top draw* 
 eth ,o the point of fight H» 
 
 The fhadow of this piece K cafteth its felf with its whole length K I, pafiing over 
 this other piece I * and we rnuft mark, that the fhadow keepeth always its length, aL 
 though that it meet with fomething between two ? and it muft be, that the fhadow 
 which pafleth over fomething, obferveth the figure and the forme of the fame thing \ 
 as here the fhadow M and N, keepeth the fhape of the Piece L, 
 
 Although that I have made the Sun to appear in the other figures, we muft not 
 think that he fhouid be fo near the Qbje<fts ^ it hath bin only for to give to ynderftand^ 
 that the Rays do eome from thence, whenas he is in this height \ but neverchelefs, out 
 of the Piece, as in this -fecond Figure, which yet ceafeth not, have the line from 
 under the Sun A B, and that of the Ray of the Sun C 5 by reafon that we ought a U 
 ways to fuppofe them for to finde the bound of the fhadow, 
 
 The fhadow of the Piece O Is found, by continuing the line A B, and making it t§ 
 afeend the fteps, and raife it felf againft the wall* until that the Ray C, paffing by the 
 comer of the piece ? divideth.iut the point S, then from the points to draw to the 
 poi nt of fight T 
 
 For to finde the fhadow of the Piece P, we muft remember that which I faid at the 
 ■beginning ef this Tfeatife, that we muft always fuppofe the foot of the light upon 
 the Plane where the Qbje$ is placed, and fo the Ray C 3 dividing the little fine A B* 
 ftieweth how far the fhadow of the little piece V ought to go ? which muft be drawn * 
 to the point of fight T* 
 
 . The Piece V giveth its fhadow all along, although it defeend into a Pit | the fhadow 
 of the wall R Is found by the fame Order that th§ others* as alfo the lines A B jnd 
 
 te Raj C, mS-t u to be fecn. 
 

 PEES PECTIVB 
 
 Forte find the jhadcw of the objeffs, when they have more breadth 
 above then below. 
 
 W H E N one would have the projedion below, or fliadow of 
 Figures, whereof the upper part hath more breadth or length 
 then the lower, how thefe two figures ought to be. 
 
 They make ordinarily a plane, from which they raife the Perpendi* 
 cularsA B. 
 
 The plane being made, we muft from under the Sun draw a line as 
 I have already faid, and from all the Angles of the plane draw paral* 
 lels to that, then te draw one from the Sun C, palling by one of the 
 Angles of the Objed, as D, until that it divide the line of the plane 
 of the fame Angle A, fo that it make the line D E at the point F , and 
 to draw E and F, at the point of fight G; which lhall give the fliadow 
 of the fquare above the Objed, then drawing from the point of the 
 figure H, to the point F and L, we have the whole fliadow of this 
 Pyramide turned down- wards. 
 
 We may fee well, that the pro/edion, or the fhadow of this crofs 
 below is made by the fame Order, which I will not repeat that I may 
 not be troublefome. 
 
 t 
 
5 
 
P ERS PE C T I V E 
 
 For to find the fhadow of Objects elevated from theGromd. 
 
 His order will be rendred eafy by that which I have newly given* feejng that 
 
 in the one and in the other, we need only to find the plane, and from this plane 
 
 to draw lines, parallels to thofe under the Sun by all the Angles, then from 
 the fame Angles of the Obje&s, elevated into the Air, to draw alfo lines for to divide 
 thofe which are drawn from the plane, and to find the bound of the lhadows * as I 
 have here already faid many times in the figures foregoing* 
 
 The which maketh me believe, that any one fhall eafily imderftand all that I can 
 make of the lhadows taken from the Sun, without that there be any need of other ex- 
 plications for the figures, feeing that they are fufficiently intelligible, and all made by 
 the Rules which one may have learned by others heretofore. 
 
 But as every figure hath always (ome particular obfervation, it will not be befides 
 the purpofe to give notice thereof, to the end there may be nothing, which may not be 
 eafily under flood. 
 
 I fay then, that in the firfl figure, I have only made ufe of the plane ABC D, for to 
 find the lhadows of the objeds E and F, by reafon that they are both upon the fame 
 line, and of the fame height. 
 
 In the fecond, we mufl obferve that the piece of wood G, calling its fhadow upon 
 the Wall this fhadow maketh the fame figure that the Corniche I, which is below* 
 the which is feen alfo at the Staff K, fet againllthe fame Wall H. 
 
 For to find the lhadow of the board L, we mud remember the order afore-going 
 of the Objeds broader above then below : for having drawn the Perpendicule M, 
 where it fhall divide the Ray N O, we mull draw the line from under the Sun M P, 
 then from the board elevated L, to draw a line, which divideth M P, and this ledion 
 dial! be the bound of the lhadow. . 
 
 The fhadow of the Bou! fhall be found alfo, making two Perpendiculars to fall, 
 of which we mufl frame the plane : Then by the Center of this plane , to draw the 
 line from under the Sun R, and from the Sun a Tangent, as QS, until that we divide 
 the line R, at the point T, and alfo another V, which divideth the fame R , and this 
 diftance T V, fhall be the greatnefs of the lhadow of the bouh , 
 
t%9 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 For to find the fhadow at the 5m in all forts of Figures- 
 
 T H E fhadow of thefe Figures is found by the fame Orders of other bodies* 
 that is to fay, by parallels, as well of them from under the Figure* as of thofe 
 that come from the Sun> with this only difference* that the fhadow of the bo* 
 dies* or objefts, is found by the help of their plane, and that the figures have none 
 thereof* but inftead of thefe planes, we muft, from the afpe<ft whereby we fee the 
 Figure, draw a line by the under part, and upon this line make to fall perpendicularly* 
 that which is moft remarkable in the figure, for to help to find the fhadow, and then 
 this line from below, fhall ferve as for a plane* 
 
 For example, the figure being naked, or cloathed, and without a Cloak, as the firft 
 that turneththe back to us; We muft from under its feet A,draw a line to the point of 
 fight B, and upon this line A B, make to fall occult lines from all the points which 
 can help to find the true fhadow : as from the hand C, to make to fall a Plumb-line, 
 which fhall divide the line A B at the point D, and from the Elbow E, to make one fall 
 l© the point F, and yet another from the head G, which fhall give the point H , from 
 ill thefe points D F H, from the feet of the figure, and from the end of his Staff L Ws 
 muft draw parallels to the bafe . 
 
 Then the height of the Sun being determined of, we muft draw a line, as K, palling 
 by the fore-part, touching the brim of the Hat G, and to continue the fame , until 
 that it divide the line H, at the point L, which fhall be the end of the fhadow. And 
 alfo from the brim behind his Hat M, to draw a parallel to K G L, until that k di- 
 vide alfo the line B, at the point N, thefe points N L, fhall be the fhadow of the Hat, 
 We muft draw a parallel by the point C, until that it divide the line D,at the point O, 
 This point O fhall be the fhadow of the hand, which holdeth the Staff: Wherefore 
 drawing from this point O, to the point I, this line O I, fhall be the fhadow of the 
 Staff: We muft alfo draw a parallel to the point E, which fhall divide F- 3 at the point 
 If and fhall be the fhadow of the Elbow, and fo of all the places that one would, as of 
 the Knees, npon the parallels, which pafs under the feet $ and from all thefe points, to 
 mark the fhadow of the whole figure : the little figure Q^hath taken its fliadow by the 
 lame order, I have not marked all the points, nor the parallels for to avoid confufion. 
 
 When they are cioatbed at length, for to find the fhadows of the figures, we muft 3 as 
 I have fold draw from under their feet, a line to the point of fight R, as this S R , and 
 ftom the bottom of the garment on the one fide and the other, draw two parallels to 
 the bdl% m T V, and between T V* another X, which is the rnidft of the- figure,Thm 
 from the top of the Head,, to draw a line Y, which fhall be for the Ray of the Sun, 
 which we muft continue, until that k divide the line X, at the point Z, and this point 
 Z. fhall be the bound, where the fhadow muft end, the reft of the fhadow fhall be 
 drawn between the two parallels T V, .and if any thing flow -over, as the two 
 .folds tj4, and *, we muft draw them by parallel to Y X, until that they divide the Ray 
 V* as we fee that the giveth the fhadow of the Elbow, and the * giveth that of 
 the folds of the Cloak, 
 
P R A C T I C A U 
 
 iff 
 
 139 
 
For to findt with facility thefhadows by the Sun . 
 
 I F I would here fet down thefhadows of all the Objefts which may be given, k 
 were to take in hand a defign without end, for the Obje&s may be given infinite- 
 ly : for befides the great number that there is of them, each would fufficeto 
 make a Book, feeing that it may be turned, bended, and lie down in divers man 
 ners, each having its fliadow different. But this labour would be ver y unprofitable 
 Seeing that every one may make thofe which fliall pleafe him, fo that he remember wejj 
 twoor three Rules which he muft; keep; as I have fhewed in the Orders of theiha* 
 dows taken from the Sun : where two forts of lines give the means to finde all the 
 fhadows which may be the one coming from under the Sun paffing by the Plan e ; the 
 other which parteth from the Sun by the upper part of the Objeft, and goeth.to di* 
 vide this other line, where the fhadow muft go: but as thefe lines muft be each Pa- 
 rallels ; that is to fay, thofe from under the Sun Parallels between themfelves, and 
 thofe of the Sun aifo Parallels between themfelv.es, I believed that I ftiouid t oblige, 
 I gave an Invention to draw them readily the one and the other, 
 
 have faid elfewhefe, how we fhould draw Parallels to the bafe, by the means of a 
 Board well fquared, as this here A, and of a Rule as R, the which fhall ferve to draw 
 lines from under the Sun, when it raeeteth diredly oppofite to the face of the Qbjeft, 
 as may be the line C O , but kit enlighten by the Angle, we muft ufe another inftru^ 
 mm as that marked E, which is a Rule faftned to the End of another pieeeof Wood 
 well fquared, and hollowed of one fide and the other, in fuch manner that the Rule F G, 
 ma » move w ith force, to the end that having taken a line bended as FI D, one may tfaerby 
 make one which may be Parallel to it, which is IK wnhihls falfe fquare orCralhoper, 
 It is fo as theWorkmen call it E F G*this Inftrument doth 'abbreviate exceedingly, when 
 one would "make tlhadows of the Sun, for there h not a line* and of what inclination, 
 iiever k be, whMoi one may not draw Parallels. The uft will mak? us. to know fti.- 
 
 prpfitablenefst ( - -• ■ — 
 
 But for the fhadow by the Torch and. the Candle , It Is of no ufe u ah| by reason 
 
 tfcat all the lines are drawn from one Center, 
 
0o 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 7"he Shadows taken from a Torch, from the Candle, and from aXamfa are found by one 
 
 and the fame Order. 
 
 I Have already faid, that for to finde thefhadows, we muft neceflarily have two 
 points, the one from the foot of the Torch, or of the Candle, or of the Lamp, 
 which ou^ht always to be found upon the Plane, where the Objeft is fet : the o* 
 ther from the name of one of thefe lights. , 
 
 From the firft point, which is the foot of the Torch, the bottom of the Lamp or of 
 the Candle, we muft draw Kays by all the Angles of the plane of the Objed, of 
 which one would have the fhadow : And the fecond point, which is the flame , will 
 give other Rays, which palling by the Angles from the top of the Qbjeds , will go 
 to divide thefe lines drawn from the plane, and to mark whefe the fhadow muft end 
 it felf ; I lhall fhew this by example, ufing the fame Letters^for thefe three lights, in 
 which it lhall be ealie to fee, that it is all the fame order, in the one, as in the Ocher, 
 with this only difference, that the foot of the Torch, or of the Taper is fet below, and 
 that it muft fuppofe in others that they fet it there. 
 
 I fay then, that if one would have the lhadows B, of the Cubes A , that we muftr 
 from the point O, foot of the light, draw lines by all the Angles of the planes of thefe 
 Cubes, as O D, O E, O F, O G, Then from the point C, which is the light , or the 
 Ate of thefe Luminaries, draw other lines, which muftpafs by the Angles of the ob- 
 jects elevated, and continue thefe lines, until that they divide the other lines drawn from 
 the point O. 
 
 For example, having drawn a line from the point O, palling by the Angle of the 
 plane D, if one draw from the point C, another line pafling by the fame Angle eleva- 
 ted P, this of the point C being continued, lhall divide the firft of the corner D, at the 
 point H, and this point H, Lhall be the fhadow of this Angle D P. If from the point 
 C, we do the fame by all the Angles elevated, we fhall divide the lines of the Angles of 
 the plane, at the points H I K L, the which points H I K L, we muft joyn with right 
 lines- and we fhall have the fhadow of the Cubes, as is to be feen in the three figures. 
 By this example, it is eafie to fee, that it is all the fame order, in the one as is in the 
 others. 
 
 In the leaf following, it fhall be taught to find the under parts or the feet of the 
 
 Candles and Lamps. , 
 
PRACTICE U 
 
 141 
 
 14,1 
 
 Oo i i 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 Of the foot of the light* 
 
 S Eeing that the Order for to finde the ftiadows for the Torch, for the Candle and 
 for the Lamp, is altogether the fame in the one as in the other, as we have faid 
 but now. There will be no more need to fet down diftinftions in the Orders * 
 following : for when I fhall fet a Torch, one may fet a Candle or Lamp in the place, 
 by reafon that the flame of the one hath the fame effed with that of the other: where- 
 fore from henceforth, I will ufe the word of light for all three. 
 
 For the foot of thefe lights, which mull: be upon all the Planes, where they fet the 
 Objeds, they fhall be found by this Method. 
 
 Having a Torch lighted within a Chamber, whether we fhall fet it in a corner on 
 the fide, or in the midft as this, it muft be, that all the Parts of the Chamber, or of the 
 Hall, as the Boards above and below, the fidesandthe bottom have a point that 
 fer e h for the foot of the light : that from this point we may draw by all the Angles 
 of the Plane of the Objecft, of which we would have the fhadow, as I fhall fliew in 
 the leaf following, contenting my felf to fhew in this, how we muft finde this point 
 which I call the foot of the light. 
 
 The Torch being placed in A, this point A, is the foot of the light, and B the fire 
 or the light of the Torch ^ this fire or light B remaineth firm and never changeth, 
 but the foot muft be found on all fides. 
 
 For to have the foot of the light at the wall on the fide C, we muft from the point 
 A draw a Parallel to the bale^ until that it divide the Ray D E at the point F,and from 
 the point F to raife a Perpendicular F G • Then from the point B, which is the fire, to 
 draw another Parallel to the bafe until that it divide F G at the point H, and this 
 point H fhall be the foot of the light, as if the Torch were lying, by reafon that its 
 fire remaineth always at the point B. 
 
 For to finde this foot of light at the Board above, we muft from the point G draw 
 a Parallel to the bafe as G I, and from the point B to make a Perpendicule to G I, 
 which {hall 'give the point K, which fhall be the point of the foot of the light, as if> 
 il e Torch were turned upfidedown. 
 
 For to finde it on the other fide of the Hall, we muft make the fame Order as on 
 the fide C, and we fhall have the point L.. 
 
 For to finde the foot of the light at the bottom, of the Hall, we muft from the 
 pc in, H draw to the point of fight O, until that we divide the Perpendicule E at the. 
 po'm M • then from this point M to make a Parallel to the bafe, which fhall divide 
 the Torch at the point N, this point fhall be the foot of the light for the bottom of the 
 Hall. 
 
 The foot of the Candle is found by the fame Order, as that of the Torch, taking 
 the midft of the foot of the Candleft'ckfbr the foot of the light • but when it is a 
 Plated Card’ eftick, or. an Arm' fet agaihft a wall, it muft be that the Arm or the 
 .Branch of the Candle flick, determine the line, or fhall be the foot of the light. . For 
 example, in the- Plate P, we muft -by the branch Qjiraw a Perpendicular to the bafe, 
 a-s R S- then from the fire T to make a final! Parallel to the bafe, which fliall divide 
 R S at the point Y,,„ which- fhall be the fmc of the light for this fide, the point X f hall 
 .be k for the board below, the point Y for the board above, and Z for the bottom of 
 the Hail of Chamber. R ‘ . 
 
 Tor the Lamp, it is -the place where it is faftned, which decermineth' its foot, as 
 here fr omwhicb place they draw a-Paralk! lq the baft unto the fij ft Ray, and alto- 
 gether;^ ft me as at. the Torch, and at the Canal u 
 
practi C h u 
 
*43 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 For to find the fhadows by a Torek s on all the fides of a Chamber , 
 
 T He fhadows taken from the Sun, draw always towards the Earth, by reafon 
 that this Star,comrmimcateth not its brightnefi except it be above our Horizons 
 and by confluence elevated above all the objefts, which caufeth that their flia* 
 dow always defeendeth. But.it is not fo with theTorch^nor with the Candle, or 
 w:-h the Lamp, the which one may fet above or below, or on the fide of the objects, 
 which rendreth their fhadows on ail parts, as we have faid. 
 
 The Figure aforegoing will help to find the fhadows of the Ohjeft$,fet on every fide 
 of a Chamber, for having found the Foot of the Light, as I have newly fpoken, there 
 is no more difficulty, feeing that this is all the fame order, as the Cube of the 141 F Q, 
 whither we may have recourfe s but that we go not to fearch fo far : l fhall fay y that 
 for to have the fiiadow of the Table, upon the which the Torch is palled we rauft 
 from the point A- the foot of the Torch, draw Rays by all the feet of the Table C,then 
 from che point of the light B, draw lines by the corners from upon the Table I , until 
 that they divide the Rays G, at the points O, which fhall be the bounds of the fhadow 
 of the Table, 
 
 The fhadow of the piece D, fhall be found drawing from the point A, by all the 
 Angies of the plane, unto the Angie of the Wall E, and from this Angle to raife them 
 Perpendicularly ; Then from the point of the light to draw lines by the top of this 
 piece D, by obferving the Angies correfpondent to the lines of the plane, and we 
 fhall have the fhadow F, of the figure, or of che piece D* 
 
 The fhadows of all the other pieces fhall be found by the fame orders Wherefore I 
 fha'l quote only the foot of the light, feeing that the fire fhall be always the point R. 
 For to find the fnadow of the piece G v the point L, is the foot of the light. 
 
 For to find the fhadow of the piece N, the point H, is the foot of the light. 
 
 For to find the fhadows of the pieces I and M, the point K, is the foot of the light. 
 
 T;e fecond Figur ■. 
 
 Avlng found the foot of the light on ail the. fides of the Chamber as I have 
 faid intheforegoinglea^ one may have the fhadows of the objefts in what 
 
 H 
 
 place foever they be-, by iheorder that I have given. For by example , ha- 
 ving found the foot of the Lght Q^and its fire P. We mufl for to have the fhadow 
 of the piece E, draw Rays from the point Q, which pafs by the plane of thepeice R, 
 and to continue them infinitely, but becaufe that they meet wish the bottom of the 
 Chamber, or the Wall X, we mull at the meeting of the Angle S , elevate all thefe 
 lines- Then from the point P, draw other lines, by the top of the fame piece R, which 
 ihTi go to divide thofe of the plane, and to mark the place of the fhadow upon each 
 of them, raking care that the Angies have reference to the lines drawn on the plane. 
 This order is fo general, and univerfal, that he which fhall well underftand only 
 how to uke the fhadow of a^ube, fhall fiadno difficulty to find the fhadow of any 
 
 obpft whsrfWer it be. Wherefore having given this order of the Cube at the 
 
 1 4 1 fo! and this above which is altogether the fame, I believe I have Sufficiently 
 firudoi how 
 
 in- 
 
 .five alljthe fhadows, without being obliged to ufe repetitions in all the 
 
 other figures which follow, where I fhall only quote the point for the foot of the 
 For ro find the fhadow of the piece V, the point X, is the foot of the light. 
 
 For to find the Shadow of the piece' Y, the point; 2, is the foot of the light. 
 
 For to find the fhadow of the piece die point is the foot of the light, and 
 the fire or the light, .for all the pieces of this fecond Figure, 
 
 t n nfr 
 
 P» 
 
PRACTICAL* *43 
 
* 4-4 
 
 ? h ;ft § p g § f I ¥ S 
 
 yȣ 
 
 
 Theflwdow by 4 T°rch'ofa Tyr$md$ and another a f fide dg\vn 9 
 
 T HIS Pyramide upright, givethlts fliadow by a Torch, as if It were by th§ 
 Sun, by reafon that in the one and the other, there is but one line only, upon 
 die which they determine a point, which is for the point of ®e Pyramidei 
 Tor example, having made the Plane BC DE, and drawn two Diagonals for to 
 finds die midft of the Plane f 7 we mull raife a Perpendicule F A* then to draw from 
 jthefe four points BCDE, to the point A, and the Pyratmde fhalj be framed | for to 
 finds its fliadow, we mull from the foot of the light G, draw one line only palling 
 by the point J, and prolong it Infinitely. Then from the fire or light of the 
 Torch H, draw another line by the top of the Pyramids Ay and continue it until that 
 it divide G F, at the point I, which fhalj be the bound for the fliadow of the Pyra- 
 rmde, which fliall be finiflied, drawing C to I, and E to I,° for this Triangle € IE, 
 fliall be the fliadow of the Pyramids A- 
 
 For to have the fliadow Of this Pyramids over?tunfd, we muft caufe Perpendicm? 
 fars to fail from the fquare above, and to frame the Plane befow thereby, as we have 
 'fold at that of die SmTfoh 1 § 8. this Plane being framed, we muft from the foot of the 
 Sight Q, draw lineg; by lU thefe Angles*, Then from the point H ? which is the fixe, 
 draw alfo others by the Angies of the fquare above, which dividing tfaofe of the 
 f%te, (frail mark die pi gee of the fliadow &s we have fold in other Orders of thi 
 Torch, 
 
 H Avfeg for 1 Crofs In th# fhzdom of the it feemed to me nmffkryM^ 
 to let’ one In the fliadow of a Torch, to the end that by that and by thf$ ? w$ 
 might know the difference, of ,fre om from the other. 
 
 The Order Is feeu enough, feeing that we have already taught at the I §7 fcfr to 
 Iad-0 rfir Plane, mi dm the reft k m h other Orders of rii§ Torch, 
 
pp 
 
m 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 
 For to find* the Jhadow of Round Objects, by a Torch* 
 
 H Aving made the fore-going figure, it came into my mind , that one might be 
 in trouble, if there Ihould be Bowles, Cups, Viols, Flagons, or other round 
 pieces (which have Ordinarily more breadth above then below) of the which 
 we would have the lhadow by a Tore h • by reafon thatTuch pieces feem more difficult 
 then the Iquares, although that in effeft, it be all the lame Order there being nothing 
 but to reduce the fquare into round fo as I, have taught in the foL 19. 20. 28. 29 and 
 86 : Where we (hall fee all the Orders lor to fet the Planes of round pieces into Per* 
 fpetftive •, the which being known, all the reft is very eafy to underftand. 
 
 I have faid already at tol. 138, how we muft finde the Plane of a Bowie, and by this 
 Plane, to have juftly the greatnefs olthe lhadow by the Sun: But as this of the Torch 
 is different from that • I belieyed it to be neceffary to fet that alfo down here by reafon 
 that it doth facilitate the Order of all the other Rounds. 
 
 For the lhadow of this Bowie, I fay then, that having made its Roundnefs with a 
 Compafs, which is the the Circle A, and draw his Diameter B C, that we muft under 
 this Circle make a line Parallel to B C, which toucheththe Circle at the point H, then 
 from the ends of the Diameter B C, to Caufe Perpendiculars to fall upon this line un* 
 derneaih, as B D, and C E, of the which points D E, we {hall frame the ordinary 
 way the Plane D EFG, whereof the diameter F G, {hall divide this D E, at the 
 point H •, This Plane D E F G, {hall ferve for to finde lhadow of this Bowie A. For 
 after having drawn from the Foot of the Light I, lines which touch this plane on the 
 one fide and other, as are the lines I K and I L •, And alfo another line pafling by the 
 niidft of the plane H, which {hall be the line I H M. We muft afterwards draw other 
 lines from the Light of the Candle N, which touching the Bowie {hall go to divide 
 thefe lines of the Plane, as from the point N,to draw a line, which toucheth the Bowie 
 between A and B, and divideth the line I H, at the point M, which {hall be the end Of 
 the lhadow : for to have the beginning of this lhadow we muft from the fame point N, 
 draw another line which toucheth the fore-part of the Bowie, and divideth alfo the line 
 I H, at the point Qahis diftance QM,lhall be the length of the fhadow, for its bredth, 
 we muft alfo from the point N, draw two lines by the ends of the Diameter of 
 the Bowie Z Z, and they fhall divide the lines I K, at the point R, and this I L, at 
 the point S. Wherfore ifR S, be the bredth of the lhadow, and QM, the length, we 
 have only to joyn thefe fower letters of Crooked lines, which fhall give an Ovall, 
 for the fiiadrw of the Bowie A 
 
 I nave a little Extended my fclf for to facilitate the lhadow of this Bowie, by reafon 
 t at I belLve this only Order fufficient for to finde the lhadow of other Rounds, as of 
 t le Figure V,the which having two breadths unequal], ought to haye a Plane of two 
 And chat below X, which hath three differences, obligeth to make a Plane of 
 
 Cirn 
 
 three Circles • The one for the Neck of the Viol, or Flagon, the other for its Belly 
 and the other for the foot : ail thefe Planes are made as of the Bowie. I believe that it 
 not: neceffary to ufe Re[ e itions. The figure being able to teach of it felf. 
 
perspective 
 
 tfb rV . rt* 
 
 
 ^ v«**, v«*»^ ^ £**, sjrfei. 
 
 «&L 
 
 A si«i 
 
 0 / the Jhadow nfon many Planes Parallels . 
 
 T H E firft Plane, - that is the Ground, where the Chair A is placed, the fe- 
 cond Plane is the upper part of the Tabfe, which is Parallel to the iirft Plane, 
 and either above or below the Table : it might alfo have one, or two, or more 
 of thefe Planes, upon which we fhall finde the foot of the light -for to finde the fha- 
 d ows of the Objed, which fhould be there, . For example, the foot of the light it is 
 C , and the fire B • from thefe points € B, we mull draw lines by the under-part, and 
 the upper of the Objed D, for to have its fhadow E, upon the Table E* 
 
 But to have the fhadow of the Chair A, which is upop the Ground, we mull find 
 upon the fame ground the foot of the light which is upon the Table the point the 
 
 Cider following teacheth this. 
 
 We mull from the point of diflance, which is here out of the Paper, draw a line 
 by the foot of the Table F •, then from the corner upon the Table G, to make a Per- 
 pendicular G to fall, which fhall divide the line F at the point H , and from this point 
 H to draw a Parallel H I, which is equal to the upper part of the Table, and which 
 ought to facilitate to finde that which we feek : for having from the point of fight K, 
 drawn a Ray palling by the foot of the light C, unto the end of the Table X « we 
 mill from this point!, let fall a Perpendicular upon HI, which fhall give the point 
 M • from which point M we mull draw a Ray to the point of fight K ^ and upon this 
 Ray M K mull be the point of the foot of the light, which /hall be found eafily, ma- 
 king a Perpendicular to fall from the point C, the which dividing the Ray M K, fhall 
 give the point N for the foot of the light* This point N being found, there is no 
 more difficulty to finde the fhadow of this Chair A, becaufe that it is all the fame Or- 
 der as of other Objefts-, which we have leen in the leaves aforegoing • that is to fay, 
 that we mufl from the foot of the light N, draw lines by ail the Angles of the Plane of 
 this Chair, and from the light B, to draw other lines by the upper part of the fame 
 Chair, which divide thofe of the Plane, and fhall mark where the fhadow ought to 
 go : the figure will make it known, that ail is to be ordered as I have laid elfe- 
 where, . 
 
 IP 
 
 lit 
 
 r**> tfa ft** pN f** elh* ft* ft* »#>* .tJhte- J&TsJtfo; .fi' 
 
 The fecond Figt re . _ 
 
 I¥ Do not fetdown this fecond Figure, for that I have any particular thing, nor 
 diif rent from that above. But only to refrefh the Memory of that which I have 
 laid in the beginning, that all the Objedls cad their fhadows diverlly, and accord- 
 ing as they are fet about the light, as we- fee that which is upon the Table giverh its 
 fhadow, according as it is enlightncd, that is to fay, diredlv, either on the right or 
 on , the It f: : that which is found by the ordinary Orders of the foot of the light P, 
 and of its fire or light Q.,; ,.ihe roeft part of thefe Obfeds are broader above then be 
 low, wherefore w wrnuft make their Planes, as I. have (aid in thofe folio’s where J have 
 fboken of the like figures. . 
 
§4 1 P ERSPlCT IVE 
 
 The Jhadvw of beared Fhom by ft Torch, 
 
 I Have not fee this figure in the fhadows taken from the Sun, by reaton that this 
 light is above all the Obje&s that are in the World, and by consequence cannot give 
 a fhadow, which fuppofeth the Light, or the Light-fome-body under the Objed. 
 One might objed to me that Experience caufeth it to be feen every day, that when the 
 Rays of the Sun enter within an Hall, or a Chamber : the fhadow of the Floores and of 
 other things ceafe not to appear ^ . To which I anfwer, that then this fhadow, or thefe 
 fhadows, is not, or are not of the Sun, but caufed by the great Brightnefs of the Sun • and 
 fuch. fhadows might not be given by Parallels, as thofe of the Sun, but by Rays from one 
 and the fame Center •* as thofe of a Torch, taking the Window where the Sun pafTeth,or 
 the place where it giveth, for the point of the light, and to do for fuch fhadow, as I am 
 faying of the fhadow of a Torch. 
 
 The Orders aforegoing which oblige to make Planes and to draw lines by all the An- 
 gles, for to finde the bound of thefnadows, would be too long for this, and the great 
 Number of lines, which one mufl draw there, would make this figure very difficult, by 
 rtafon of the Number of Beames and Joyfls which there are met with : the which made 
 me feck the Means to abridge it, for to make is eafie in the pradife, without going forth 
 of Rules and Maximes of Art 
 
 Having made the floore in Perfpedive, as it is taught in the 55th or 57 fol. And 
 placed the Candle, the Torch, or the Lampe, in what place we would. We muft fearch 
 by the means of the foot of the light, the place where the fire ought to to be, or to fpeak 
 more truly, the which we fhall ufe in Head of the fire, for from this point to lines, which 
 pafs under the Objed, and mark out the bound of the fhadows. 
 
 For to have this point of fire, the light being at B, we muft from the foot of the light 
 C, draw a Parallel to the Bafe D E, untill that it cut the Ray fe F, at the point G, from 
 this point G, we muft elevate a Perpendicule G L. Then from the fire of the Torch B, 
 draw a Parallel to D E, which fhall divide the Perpendicular G L, at the point L, and 
 this point L, fhall ferve for the point of fire, which fhall give the place and the length of 
 the lhadow. 
 
 For Example, having to finde the fhadow of the Beame A, we muft from the point 
 L, make a line to pafs under theAngle which is towards us asH,and fee where this line L 
 H,(hal! divide the firft Joyft,at the point I, for this fhall be the place where the fhadow 
 of the Beame endeth : from this point I, we muft draw a parallel I K, and marke upon 
 the Joyfts the place of the fhadow O, for the fhadow of the fpace of the Joyfts, ir will be 
 found by drawing alfo a line from the pointL,by theAngle of the fir ft Joy ftM, which fhall 
 divide the Angle of the Hollow at the point N, from this point N, making a Parallel N 
 P, we fliall have all the fhadow marked Q^for the Beame A. 
 
 For to fmde the fhadow of J oyfts, befides that of the Beame, we muft only draw a 
 line of Ere B, by the Angle S, untill that it divide the Bottome of the Floore at the point 
 T, do the fame to all the other Joyfts, and you fhall finde the fhadow longer at the far- 
 ther diftance from the fire. Having marked upon one Beame all the points T, we rnaft 
 from the point of fightR, draw lines by each of thefe points, and we fhall have juftly be- 
 twe. n all the other Beams, the fhadow of the Joyfts as is to be feen at the points V. 
 
 The figure below is the fame with that above, with this difference, that this is fhadowed 
 and that the former is not, by reafon that the fhadow would have hindred to fee the letteis 
 &nd the fin all lines. There is more in this,the fhadow of the Iawmbsof this Gate, which 
 £K,ft be take 1 from the foot of thelmht as is to be feen in X and Y. 
 
 O 
 
For to fir. do the padow by theft ot of the light* 
 
 *|T F 'the Objefts bw Perpendiculars to the bafe, and more elevated then the fire of 
 I the Candle A, We ought only to draw Hues from the foot of this light B, by 
 JSLdie Angles moft advanced of the Objects, as aye G D of the Screen ? and from 
 the Angle of the wall E, the which lines B G, B D, and B E, fhall make the place of 
 the fliadow at the meeting of the Angles, which the Shuts of the Screen make with the 
 . floor, and alfo the return of the wall at the points G, from which points G we muff 
 elevate Perpendiculars at the bafe G R, which flial! finiih the fhadows which the 
 GandktUck A gtveth^ 
 
 The reafon of this is, that the line A R, is parallel to the lines C H, D X, K, and 
 E L, the which maketh that, in what part foever the fire be upon the line A B, whe* 
 ther 5 on high, or in the raidft, or all below, it fhall give always the like fhadow. 
 
 We mult obferve, that this Order k not good byt in Pieces, which are more eievs*? 
 ted then the fiye ? as thefe here ^ for when thofe Ihew the upper part, as the Objeft M, 
 we muff ufe the Orders aforegoing, by drawing lines from the points of the feet, and 
 cf the fire of the light “V 
 
 Of the Shadow doubled* 
 
 W H E N two lights meet in the fame fubjedt or objed, it is of necefilty that 
 two fnadows meet there, becaufe that each day or each light produceth its 
 own with proportion, I fay, with proportion s for if thefe Fires lights be 
 emiat, at the fame diftance \ It is certain .that the fhadows mall be equal * but if there 
 be the leaft difpropordon, as if the one of thefe lights be a little greater then the 
 o,her, or that thefe fires be a little greater then the other, or that thefe fires, aU 
 thov^h equal , be more or left advanced the one then tho other from the objeft • thefe 
 fhalow$ lhaii be, different * fof example* the objeft O, being .enlightned with two 
 . the one near P, # the other farther off Q •, it is moftaflhred, that the fliadow 
 of die Candle P, fhall be much ftronget then that of the Candle % as is to be fern ? ^ 
 
 * i! The O -ilers of thefe fhadows, are no other, then thofe that I have given* as wqI| 
 
 lb : the Sun as the Torch 
 
practical; a* 
 
 
 0.A 
 
*4 9 
 
 PERSPECTIVE 
 
 For the Shadow of Figures by a Torch 
 
 I T is to bebelieved,that my counfel will be followed that one fhould 
 not turn over the leaf for to learn the order which followeth^before 
 they underftand and remember well 3 that which went before 
 Wherefore fuppofing that oneunderftands well the order, that I have 
 given at 139 fob for to find the fhadow by the Sun, for all the figures 
 of fuch poftures as they may be : I have nothing to fay for thefe, fee- 
 ing that the line below, which I make to ferve for the plane, and all 
 the other meafures are taken jn one, as in the other. But becaufe that 
 the Torch doth not render an equal fhadow in breadth to the body tha c 
 giveth its lhape, as doth the Sun : W e mufl take this advice, which is 5 
 thatinftead of drawing the lines parallels, that one to the other , as 
 they are in the fliadows taken from the Sun, we muft draw them all 
 from the fame point, as from a Center*, that is to fay, that all thelin s, 
 which are drawn by the plane, muft be drawn from the foot of the light 
 A, and thofe above,and about the figure muft be drawn from the point 
 of fire B, in like manner as in all the other orders of the Torch , the 
 which maketh me leave the reft, that would be but tedious repetitions* 
 feeing that the figure exprelfeth it of its (elf. 
 
 ii 
 
Ciqii 
 
PERSPECTIVE 
 
 m 
 
 of the divers dsjpefitions and heights ef jhadews by the To-rch. 
 
 f ' 1“! He fhadows taken by the Sun, do caft themfelves always on ths 
 fame fide, and have ordinarily one and the fame difpofition : it 
 being impoffible that the Sun fhould caufe at the fame time, to 
 caft the Shadow of one body towards the W eft, and of another towirds 
 the Eaft, it is very true that it doth this every day, the one in the 
 morning, and the other in the evening, but in one and the fame hour, 
 it will never do it naturally. 
 
 The which isdone without failing, by the Torch , the Candle, or 
 the Lamp : for in what place foeveryou fet one of thefe lights , if 
 there be many bodiesabout them, they will call their fhadow diverfly, 
 that is to fay, that the one will caft it to the Eaft , the other to the 
 Weft, this to the North, that to the South ; in Ihort on every fide ac- 
 cording as the bodies fhall be ordered about the light, the foot of the 
 which marked A, ferveth them for a Center, whether all thefe fhadows 
 draw, and the fire B, marketh where they muft end, although diverfly, 
 by reafon that the neareft, have their fhadow Ihorteft, and thofe that 
 are farther off, caft it more at length. 
 
 Although that the fecond figure hath not the light in the midft, yet 
 the order of thefe fhadows ce afeth not to be kept, as we fee that they 
 all draw to the foot of the light C, and that they are bounded by the 
 point of fire D 1 
 
w- 
 
 A 
 
 Till: TABLE 
 
 T He Definitions, names, and Ter ms 
 of the Point* >Lines and Figures, 
 which we fall ufe. page i . 
 
 1 Tioe Reft of the Definitions Na nes and 
 
 Terms . 2 • * j wr tv auvice oj tl 
 
 Some Orders of Geometry, fir to make one only point of di fiance . 
 the Lines and Figures, which we are a-j The fifth advice net ' to 
 hot to define 3 . r ,n 
 
 For to frame the Figures . 4. 
 
 Of Poly gone s Circular, which are Fi- 
 gures with divers angles within one Cir- 
 cle. ibid . 
 
 Of the Rays vifiudl. 5 . 
 
 Wherefore one may fee better a Perfpec - 
 tive, with one Eye only , then wdh two. 
 
 ibid 
 
 The fir ft definition. 6 . 
 
 The j econd third and fourth definition j 
 Wherefore the Objects that are far di - 
 pant fieem to approach and joy n them] ‘elves 
 
 ■*%$£ ,h ‘ r 
 
 JSt*?*'**'. '****" 7 -’ 
 
 The ftnh advice of the Safe fandl'f 
 
 Min tie MeafreW f ^ 
 0 fip flMhadvke °f point of di fiance 
 
 “ ** ~ 
 
 The eighth advice to abridge fin divers 
 
 manners . b 
 
 Of planes viewed directly or in • from la, 
 hanes viewed obliqueiie or on the fide. 
 
 Of a Triangle . 
 
 (gthe Pentagone cr five angles. 22. 
 Of tbe H exagone or fix angles . 23 . 
 
 Whfrefre the Objects draw near to\ O/fi 
 
 each a her, being viewed afar off. p. 
 
 Of the Hcriz.cn. j j. 
 
 Of the Raft. 22. 
 
 Of the point of fight , Point cf Perfpec - 
 five , Poirt Occular , or Point Principal* 
 
 ibid 
 
 Of the points of di fiance. ibid. 
 
 Of poius accidental. ibid 
 
 Of i he po int of the Fro nt . 13. 
 
 Of the point of the fide . ib. 
 
 Of the 'iftifml Rays 14 s 
 
 Of the Diagonals or Diametral's and of \ 
 
 ths.r feet] on s . $>. 
 
 Of the d fiance , or Removal and fetting. 
 
 16 
 
 The fir ft advice about the point of the 
 Me- l6 
 
 Ofthe Hexagone cr fix an fie s. fb. 
 
 Of t he Octogone double . in 
 
 Of t he Cir c le Jft 
 
 Of the Circle double. ‘ 
 
 A plane of the, foare viewed fiom the 
 angles. 
 
 A pavement of f quotes viewed by the 
 angles. . J • 
 
 Of ffuares compafflng a Border or Fill 
 let. « 
 
 Pavements viewedby the angle compg. 
 fed with a bran d'or Fillet. ft z 
 
 Pavements cf "f quarts viewed by ] the 
 front, com faffed with Bands cr Borders 
 wh. ch have ffitar. cs feet: from r he a Te hi 
 
 the midf h . ;y 
 
 A pavement of ff fares fieen from the 
 
 an ule 
 
 4_. 
 
 ¥ 
 
The 
 
 % 
 
 angle with. Church offq J ares/ bi the fibtifrl angle . 
 
 . ■ ' " ' ‘ 33 , . 
 
 A pavement offq 'ares in fi.cnt with - far as one wo Id . 
 
 Chairs tffq arcs jecn from the=. angle, j Of Walls viewed direc'fy. 
 
 ib . 
 
 A pavement of l ttle fquayes Qctogone 
 
 . 5 O', 
 
 For to raife bodies and remove the n ' as 
 
 5 1 • 
 • ■ 52 . 
 
 Another wall viewed- fr^m the angle. 
 
 .ib. 
 
 For to place a door in what, place one 
 
 mingled with the fq ares. * 3 4 
 
 A pavement of finglef flares viewed in l wo Id of a W all. 53. 
 
 front . ib. j; For to frame Windows in Perfipective. 
 
 j 54 * 
 
 Of the Plane hers above. 55. 
 
 Another Ordering of Planchers in Per- 
 
 57 ' 
 
 The plane of a Garden abridged . 3 5 , 
 
 The plane of a B' tiding a ridged. 36 
 The plane tfa Cfo rcF abridged 3 7 , ] 
 
 The plane if an rlotfe with a Garden. fective 
 
 The plane of a 'Fortification abridged J arches viewed directly . 
 
 38. I A jingle draught of doors and round. 
 
 is) rrp/) . c St.rcho.t <7)1 P.wp.d. s)l'SPrti\) $9' 
 
 39 
 
 Round arches above the Pil 'after viewed 
 
 The plane and figure irregular abbrevi - , directly 
 
 ated . 
 
 40 Of the third poht in the arch'. 
 
 /) T IS' IS! PIS ti : ‘islf/tt- r.Ttlni/f T) !T ■? V 
 
 60. 
 
 ib. 
 
 Another plane of a Church allreviated 1 A f rther p. rfuit of this figs re. 61. 
 
 For to frame and fiet into Perfipective 
 
 . . zj. i « xi// j i i/irft, z £4,ri (A (sdtv Z l <u(gt 
 
 Some neceffary advice for the ord rsfol- j doers and round arches . 6 2 
 
 lowing . 42. | Fm to frame and put into Per jfective 
 
 Of the lines of elevation to give the 1 d ors and arches round double , Jhewing 
 
 heights to all kind of be dies and figures 3 
 and in fuch a place 3 as one would within a 
 plane . 43 . 
 
 The elevation of a Cube in Perfective 
 
 44. 
 
 The Triangle i Perfipective. 
 
 t heir thickne fifes . 63 . 
 
 Of figures in arches of another fafioni 
 Arches viewed obliquely in Perf ective. 
 
 ib. 
 
 Of arches flat/ r in manner cf a basket 
 
 45. or Demi-circle. 
 
 65 
 
 Tne Pent ago ne cr five angles in Per- \ For to fiet arches cr half circles upon 
 
 fee five. 
 
 ib. I Pilafiers 3 cr Columns . 
 The HexagoniPcr fix angles in Per- 
 fective. ib. 
 
 Of the Heptagone 3 or feven angles in 
 Perfective. 4 6. 
 
 Of the Octogone or eight angles in Per - 
 j fective. ib. 
 
 The double crc f in Perfective . 47 . 
 
 A ft-ne flatted or fireakedhke a Star in 
 Perfective. ib. 
 
 Of Pilafiers in Perfective. 48 . 
 
 Of Pilafiers viewed by the angle. 
 
 ib. 
 
 67 ' 
 
 Arches in the third point . F. 
 
 For to fet into Perfective 3 Vaults 3 or 
 crof f arches . 68 . 
 
 Fi-r to makg the fame Vaults more ex- 
 actly . 69 . 
 
 For to. make the Vaults more fir ait and 
 
 7©. 
 
 A Vault made by the Orders. 7 1 . 
 Of arches and diors with three fq i fares. 
 
 72. 
 
 Of another arch 3 half Decagone cr 5 
 fquares. ib. 
 
 The effects of the diver fity of Horiz.cn. I The elevation of round figures in Per - 
 
 49. fective . 73. 
 
 The elevation cf Objects viewed by the \ The elevation of Pilafiers fet into a 
 
 large. 
 
 roui 
 
The Table. 
 
 r»fnd ib. [ Of flams and tk* fir ft elevMitns of 
 
 A vault Itks a Set ll&p fita# fet into Per- 'moveables. pg 5 
 
 j pictive, 
 
 74 . Of the Elevations of Moveables. 97 , 
 
 Of open Rounds in Steeples or V wits j For to make the upper pare of Tables, 
 pierced in Perfective. 75 * Stools, &c. g% 
 
 That the multitude of Objects and plu- j For to elevate a Court Cupboard or 
 
 raiity of florin ought to have but our point ,< Cabinet . 
 
 •fight- 76- 
 
 To fet Chimneys into Perfective, 77. 
 
 Of S tairs in Perfective . 78. 
 
 Other fieps bellowed underneath in Per- 
 fective. 79, 
 
 Steps ui font in Perfective . ib. 
 
 For to make Stairs which one may Jhew 
 f om fBkr fines . 80. 
 
 Stairs viewed on the fide s in Perfec- 
 tive. 81. 
 
 Stairs within a Wall in Perfective • ib. 
 
 For winding flairs with Refls in Per - 
 fective 8 2. 
 
 Stairs winding upright in Perfective . 
 
 83. 
 
 $<f ares fet into around in Perfective. 
 
 84. 
 
 Round Stairs in Perfective. 85. 
 
 Round Stairs viewed fiom the fide in 
 Perfective . ib. 
 
 . for the winding flairs up turning a- 
 feent. 16 . 
 
 Of Columns or Pillers in Perfective. 
 
 87. 
 
 Of Corn fits and Mouldings in Per- 
 festive 88. 
 
 A great Cor nfi above the U ri'Lon in 
 Perfective. 89. 
 
 , , 99 - 
 
 For the' elevation of Chairs . 1 00. 
 
 One other fajhiono of Moveables in 
 Perfective . IO i. 
 
 Of Moveab les f >t without order . 1 02 
 
 Of Moveables lying or thrown upon the 
 Ground. 103. 
 
 For to fet altars into Perfective . 104. 
 Of Merchants Shops m Perfective . 
 
 105. 
 
 Of the out fide of Buildings . 106, 
 
 F>.r to fet the Roofs of Houfes in Per- 
 fective. IC7# 
 
 The refi of the Roofs in Perfective « 
 
 108. 
 
 For to fet a flreet into Perfective . 1 09. 
 That the Objects afar off flew not the 
 
 thicknef. tI0 . 
 
 For the buildings viewed by the Angles. 
 
 in . 
 
 For to fet alleys of Trees into Perfec- 
 tive. 1 12, 
 
 For Gardens in Perfective. 1 1 3 , 
 The little flares with borders . ib . 
 For to elevate and fet in Perfective 3 
 Fortifications. 1 14. 
 
 For to make the defigns of Perfective. 
 
 IJ 5 * 
 
 For to draw little perfective s into great 
 
 For to find the unehr part of the great] and gnat into little. 11^, 
 
 projectors. 90 Orders to facilitate the Vniverfal man- 
 
 Of the Cor n fie s and the Mouldings | ner of the Sfesr G . D. L. 117. 
 
 under the Florid n. 91. Of a general manner for to exert ife ptr- 
 
 F or Corm fin s with many Returns. 92. Effective without fetting the point of di- 
 For the op ning of do. rs in Perfective, fiance, out of the picture , or field of the 
 
 93 . [workby the Si a rG.DL. 1 1 % . 
 
 F r the opening of Windows in Per fee- Fcr to give jufiy the di fiance removed, 
 
 tivs 94 . | the po nt remaining in the picts re. 1 1 9 
 
 fcr the opening of the Window with [ A very fine invention, for to make na- 
 Chamfretti gs . ib. Rurally perfect ives without keeping the 
 
 Of divers «. 1 her openings . 95 . [rules . 120. 
 
 A 
 
The Table. 
 
 jinother pretty invention, for to cxer- 
 cife the perfective , without knowing it . 
 
 12 I • 
 
 For Figures in ferjpective . 122. 
 
 For the Figure having the Eye within 
 the Horizon. ib. 
 
 For the Figure having the Horizon 
 below . ib. 
 
 For the Figures having the Horizon 
 high . 123. 
 
 For the Figure that have feet at the 
 Horizon ib . 
 
 For figures elevated above the flares. 
 
 I2 4* 
 
 Of the fofiures that we Jh&uld give to 
 figures in the ferjpective. 12 5 . 
 
 Of Beafts and Birds in ferjpective . ib . 
 
 For to finde the height of Figures far 
 removed, the fir ft being upon a Mountain 
 veer to the Eye. 126. 
 
 For to give the Natural height, or fuch 
 W one would to Figures Elevated on 
 high . 127. 
 
 For to know how much figures equal de- 
 mirnjh to the Eyejhe one Jet above the 0- 
 ther in height. ib. 
 
 Of M eafures for the figures Floated 
 
 . I2«. 
 
 The Grig inal f jhadows . 129. 
 
 Of t he differ e m 9 offhadows . 1 3 o - 
 
 Forte find the jhape of the Jhadow. 1$ 1 
 
 Of jhadows t akin from the Sun . 132 
 
 kTe jhadows f the Sun are squall to 
 the Objects of the fame height althoghthae 
 they be removed, the one from the other 
 
 133. 
 
 Of the Jbad ws when the Sun is directly 
 
 offofrte to the Eye . 1 3 4 • 
 
 For to give the Jhadows of th Object s . 
 pierced by the light . 135 
 
 The jhadows take the jhafe of the p!ane s 
 where they are caft. 136 
 
 For to finde the jhadow of the ob fee 
 when they have more bredth above then 
 below . 137. 
 
 For to finde the jhadow of Objects Ele- 
 vated from the G round . 138, 
 
 For to finde the jhadow at the Sun in all 
 forts of fig p . res. 139. 
 
 For finde with facility the jhadow by the 
 Sun. 140. 
 
 The Shadows fallen from a Torch, fivm 
 a Candle and from a Lamp ,are found by 
 one and the fame Order . 141 . 
 
 Of the foot of the light. 142. 
 
 For to finde the jhadows by a Torch, on 
 all the fides of a Chamber. 143 . 
 
 The jhadow by aT or ch of a Pyr amide 
 upright and another up fide down • 144. 
 
 The jhadow of a Croft. ib. 
 
 For to finde the jhadow of round Objects 
 by a Torch. 145. 
 
 Of the Jhadow upon many planes pa- 
 rallels 14 6 f 
 
 The jhadow of boarded Floors by a 
 Torch. 147 tt 
 
 For to finde the jhadow by the fcot sf 
 the light. 148. 
 
 Of the Shadow doubled. 1 b , 
 
 For the jhadow of figures by a Torch . 
 
 149* 
 
 Of the divers dispofitions and heights of 
 Jhado ws by the Trch. 15© 
 
 N I $. 
 
 Rr 
 
A CATALOGUE of Becks Printed for Rob. Vnck^and are to be fold 
 ct his Shop over againfi the Crofs-Keys in White- Crofs-*itree£ 5 and 
 the Golden Lyon, at the Corner of New*Cheapiide near Bethlehem, 
 
 A New Trca.ife of Archltectvrc , according to Vitruvius. Wherein is dtf* 
 /% courfed of i-he five Orders of Columns, viz.. The Tujcan^ Derick^ Jonicl^ 
 J ,1L Ccrimb.gn and Compete. Divided into feven Chapters Which declare 
 their different Proportions, Meafures and proper Names 3 according to the Practice of 
 the ancient Architects, -both Greeks' and' Romans *, As alfo of their parts general and 
 particular, ncceffary in building oi Temples, Churches, Palaces, Cadies, Fortrefles,' 
 and all oilier Buildings with their Dependents ; As Gates, Arches Triumphanr,Foun- 
 tains, Sepulchres, Chimneys, Crofs-barr’d windows, Portals, Platforms, and other 
 Ornaments •, ferving as well tor the beaudfying of Buildings in Cities, as for neceffary 
 fonificaiipns of them:' ddigned by Julian Adauclerc Lord -of IAgncron Adauclerc 
 Brojfard ere and Rcmangms. . Whereunto are added the feve^al Meafures and 
 Proportions of the famous Archi teds, Scham^zi^Valladw^ and Vignola : with fome 
 Rules of Perfpedive. The whole reprefented in fifty large Prints, enriched with the 
 rated Ornaments of Antiquity, and Capitals of extraordinary • greatnefs, with 
 their Architraves, Friefes, and Corniflies proportionable. Large tol. price bound 
 12 s. s # . 
 
 A New Book of Architedure, wherein is reprefented fourty figures of Gates and 
 Arches triumphant Compofed of different Inventions, according to the five Orders 
 of Columns, viz* The Tnfcan , Dc rlck^ Jomef^Cc rim hi an and Compofue, by Alexander 
 Francihe Florentine, Engineer in Ordinary to the French King ; With a DefcriptL 
 on of each figure Large fol bound i o s. 
 
 The Art of Fair Building : Reprefented in fever al Uprights of Houfes,with their 
 Ground-plots, fining for perfons of fever a 1 Qualities Wherein is dividedeachRoom 
 and Office according to their mod convenient cccafion, with their Heights, Depths, 
 Lengths and Bredihs according to Proportion: With Rules and Diredions for the 
 
 placing of Doors, Windows, Chimneys, Beds, Stairs and other conveniences : with 
 their jud Meafures for their bed advantage, both of Ccmmodioufnefs, Health, 
 Strength and Ornament Alfo a Defcription of the Names and Proportions of the 
 Members belonging to the framing of the Timber- work, with Diredions and Ex- 
 amples for the placing of them By Vierrc le Mi et, Archited in Ordinary to the 
 Yrer.ch King, and Surveyor of his Defignes and Fortifications in the Province ofP/- 
 cardy Large fob price bound 8 s. W p- 
 
 A Bock of Arc! :itcd, containing Cieling-Pieces, Chimney-pieces, Tountains, and 
 feveral forts ulefulfor Carpenters,] oyners, Carvers, Painters, invented by J Btrbet. 
 
 Gcthngs R ediviytrs or the Bens Mrjhr -piece. Being the laft work of that emi- 
 nent and acccmplifncd Mader in this Art, Containing Examples of all curious 
 H ands wiitten, and now in Pradice in Eng^nd, and the Neighboring Nations : with 
 neceffary Rules and Diredions towards the attaining of Fair writing, &c. 
 
 An Excellent Jr.trodi.ction to Architect ire, being a Bobk of Geometrical Practice 
 Which is the flrft degree of all Arts ; wherein is contained Variety of Examples 0 f 
 
 — that 
 
that* admirable Science, /hewing and deferring the making of feveral figures in that 
 Nature, with the proper Names belonging to each Member and Figure, and how to 
 begin and end them after a plain and eafie manner, it being of great ufe to all Artifts 
 and V V orkmen concerned in Building : More efpecially, Si rveyers. Architects, E?h- 
 
 gineers .Mafcns ,Carf enters , joy iters. Bricklayers, Blaifterers, V aimers, Carver s,G la- 
 fur s,&c In general, lor all that are concerned or delight to pra&ife with the Rule 
 and Compafs, 410 price bound 2 $. 
 
 M gmm in Banjo, Or the Pra&ice of Geometry. With a new Order and parti- 
 cular Method thereof • Wherein is contained Examples of Zandskips, Pieces of 
 Berfpective, and the like -.Reprefented by Eighty two Plates : Each Plate having 
 
 a full Defcrptiion.Bound with fillets 4 s. 
 
 Likewife there is Choke of Copy-books, Maps, Landskips,Cieling-Pieccs, Books 
 of Birds, Bealls, Flowers and Fruits, coloured, or black and white, Alfo very good 
 Choice of Italian, French andltoc^Prints^there likewife you may have mony for fuch 
 like Books or Prints in Engbfh, Italian » Frm^and Dutch m others in Exchange for 
 them. 
 
•Members belonging to me mui— 0 
 
 amples for the placing of them By Vierre le Mi er, Arcmteu. 
 
 Irene b King, and Surveyor of his Deiigoes and Fortifications in u 
 enrdy Large, lob. price bound 8 s. 
 
 A Bock of Arcbitcd, containing Cieling-Pieces, Chimney-pieces^ 
 feveral forts i.fefilfor Carpenters,] oyners, Carvers, painters, invented 
 G ethnos l edi'vivvs or the P ens Mnflc r-piece. Being the laft work * 
 rent and ace cmplifricd Matter in this Art, Containing Examples of 
 H and s wi itten, and now in Practice in Eng^nd, and the Neighboring Natl 
 neccfiary Rules and Diredlions towards the attaining of Fair writing, &c. 
 
 An Excellent Introduction to Architect t. re , being a Book of Geometrical 
 Which is the fir ft degree of all Arts ; wherein is contained Variety of Ex.' 
 
’K/al. ?5-P> 
 i 1 4 4^